Home

Infopost-Manager Online Help as Manual

1. 333 io 14 2 1 a Export wizard Step 1 Specify output file 5pecity the file format and file to be used for exporting the Addresses Output format File format Export file File name C Users Public Documents N ew Project Addresses ce T Filter Only those 30429 addresses will be exported which match the current filter criteria Filter used used addresses A Attention Please note that NO post pecific fields are available if you export via the address management module the created file is thus WOT suitable for mall hots ou should use the export from the menu ResultesAddress export for further external processing of pour addresses Load template e Of course you can export your addresses without having to make any changes to the default settings You can also use the Load template button to load previously saved export options These templates for instance make it easier to export files for specific further processing on a regular basis The use of the specific template lt import structure gt ensures that the export files where possible have the structure of the original file which you used for import In the last step of the export dialog the current changes can be saved in a new template on page 331 Specify output file In the first step you define the file format and the target file s for the current export Output format Infopost Manager provides a variety of file formats for addr
2. From page J on all pages Invisible A Dependent on field Size Via the option Keep side ratio it is possible to link the width and height of a position frame allowing the proportions of the frame to be retained if a value is changed As soon as one value is changed the second is automatically adjusted Position The position of a frame is measured by the distance to the left and upper edges of the sheet Keep distance to This option refers to the margins on the following page set within the document Each of the four margins can be chosen as reference point If these chosen margins are moved within the document the position of the position frames linked to them changes accordingly Visibility In this area you can specify the pages a frame should appear on Choose Invisible to hide the frame Invisible frames are positioned but are neither visualized nor printed With the options On page s and From page you can let the frame appear on multiple pages It will be at the same position for every page it appears on The option Dependent on field allows for controlling the visibility of the frame by the content of a field 210 Address fields unden Nr a in the range zj Interpret empty fields as Colors and lines tab This tab is not available for the position frame types rotated text franking mark and barcode o Edit properties Era ines Top E Left Right
3. Text Edt Format Extras ly u T Ai n wE u E Insert field Additional address fields Letter salutation Sehr geehrte Damen und Herren Sehr geehrte 1 1 2 0 1 50 Jahre Muster AG Ein Grund uns zu bedanken For die langj hrige und gute Zusammenarbeit bedanken wir uns ganz herzlich bei Ihnen Nicht zuletzt durch die Treue von Geschaftspartnem wie Ihnen k nnen wir mittlerweile behaupten weltweit zu den f hrenden Unternehmen bel der Herstellung von Mustern z hlen zu k nnen Anbei finden Sie unsere Finmen Chronik die wir Ihnen dankend berreichen 50 Jahre Muster AG Ein Grund zum Feiern Zu unserem Firmenfest anl sslich dieses runden Jubil ums laden wir Sie ganz herzlich ein Datum Uhrzeit und Ort entnehmen Sie bitte der beiliegenden Wegbeschreibung el in ls in ubain is abala in walle is ln shan 26 10 Insert 11 2 6 Properties i Besides the specific tabs which are accessible only for the current position frame there are some tabs in the menu Properties which are available for all position frames These can also be opened and edited via right clicking on the respective frame or by selecting a frame and pressing the key combination on page 313 Ctrl Return 269 General tab Edit properties Size Width 17 85 on Height Keep aspect ratio Position Left 1 55 om 11 75 amp Keep pitch to left margin top margin E right margin bottom margin Visibility On page s
4. support formats XLSX and ACCDB project templates improved multi change on page 71 address management support name prefix and suffix on page 69 several program optimizations and error corrections What was new in version 8 0 1 from 12 12 2012 new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 National new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 International Discontinuation Infobrief and Infobrief International new posting list on page 180 Frankierservice Support pick up on page 153 of international items some program optimizations and error corrections What was new in version 8 0 from 11 10 2012 Networkability on page 234 Data backup on page 232 DHL Infopost Interface to order management on page 162 Reshipments new license model Activation on page 336 several program optimizations and error corrections What was new in version 7 5 1 from 11 06 2012 bug fixes for detection of street numbers What was new in version 7 5 from 29 03 2012 Support IT franking variable images in mail merge DHL Infopost partial coding of incomplete addresses new filter parcel center new address spread by parcel centers Support PURLs for Adressdialog Aligment of routing labels at top left margin Usage street supplements 309 Export 2D barcodes further program improvements and error corrections What was new in version 7 4 3 from 25 11 2011 new posting lists National n
5. Create Pack amp iGo file Default Default Default Directory Specify whether Infopost Manager should suggest the last used export directory the last used import directory or a user defined export directory The available options for a user defined directory are the same as in the Import presettings on page 237 File name without extension Here you can specify the name of the file that contains your export result more precisely With activated option Suggest default file names Infopost Manager will suggest names appropriate for the respective export results Select option Suggest user defined file name to let the suggested file names be dependent on properties of the respective projects The same fields as in the Import presettings on page 237 are available In any case Infopost Manager will choose a file extension as appropriate for the respective file type e g xls or xlsx respectively for Excel User defined export settings for selected functions In this area you can explicitly specify the export directories and file names for various actions Select the action you would like to customize and click on button Edit 239 ja Settings for directones and file names a lM Use alternative configuration for function Create PackGo file Directory Suggest last used export directory across projects 5 Suggest last used import directory of project Suggest user defined export directory C
6. File name Addresses Explanation New Project Esport ce 24010 If this option is selected all addresses of a project are saved in a single file The respective affiliation to a category e g Infopost remaining items is shown in the table in the Category column Addresses of category unused items will not be contained in the export file If necessary export these addresses to a separate file If this option is used you will have to take care of dispatching the different categories separately especially if you process the addresses with external programs Save addresses per category in separate files Export file 6 Save Addresses in one file Extended settings H Save Addresses filtered into file s Filter Director CSU sers Public Documents lli File name Addresses Explanation Mew Project Infopost National css 4 0M0 Infopost tems O New Project Letter National csv O Remamning items Mew Project Unused tems caw 6 808 Unused items If you activate this option the addresses of the categories Infopost remaining items unused items and international items are saved in separate files for each category and can be further processed in this manner By default categories which do not contain any address record are not exported this can be changed by clicking on the ticks for these categories Module International optimization With activated module International optimization additional categories wi
7. 228 E s Available news 02 01 2014 Price and Product List 30 The new price and product list is available 02 01 2014 New Postal Routing Data of January 2014 The postal routing data for the 1st quarter 2014 are available 26 11 2013 Infopost Manager v2 1 1 The free update to version 8 1 1 is ready for being downloaded New features include support of SEPA and Responseplus In addition to that this version contains adaptions for data exchange with the order management system of Deutsche Post Please make sure that you wall work with version 8 1 1 or higher on 01 01 2014 the latest Othernvise exchanging data with the order management system will not be possible 15 10 2013 Important Modification to Data Exchange As of 01 01 2014 the interface to order management will be transposed to anew gateway Thus Infopost Manager will have to be modified accordingly Please make sure that you will work with version 8 1 1 or higher on 01 01 2014 the latest Otherwise exchanging data with the order management system will not be possible Watch the update check which will indicate this version s availability 01 10 2013 New Postal Routing Data of October 7013 The postal routing data for the 4th quarter 2013 are available 10 07 2013 Infopost Manager v8 1 This version will be available for download in mid July New features contain the new OTAC and posting lists DHL Infopost becoming valid as of 01 08 support of name prefix and suffix
8. F Sender 0123456783 Heues Bevi 3 l X Haik 3 Heues Projekt Paper X DescoptioreLabel Onder Label Order descriphon E Ml 15 of 15 Oiders in this view The request of the order details can take place in various ways e Press the F6 key e Choose the item Request order details of the Orders menu e Choose the item Request order details of the contextual menu right mouse click You can also request the detailed information of all shown orders at a single blow by choosing the respective command from the contextual menu resp from the Orders menu If you categorically and always want to see all information of the various orders activate option Always request order details of the Options menu Right after the request the detailed information are available and the status are adapted accordingly In addition to that the font color turns from grey to black in order to signal that the order is already request An order created with Infopost Manager can possess one of two status after the request Status Explanation Ga The local project data correspond with those on the exchange server Further details about the request order can be shown in a separate window if desired This Properties window can also be called via various methods 23 e Double click the order if necessary the order will be request beforehand e Click the icon in the icon bar Choose the item Properties of the Orders menu e Choose
9. Minimum filing amount for ZIP Tray like for AR Tray Do not produce AP Tray Min tems per IP Tray Infopost Manager proposes the assumed correct tray type Grof and Maxi items should only be posted in size 2 trays The appropriate information on the maximum filling amount for trays is dependent on the provided item settings in particular weight and thickness Since the Infopost Manager does not know anything about the item s flexibility or compactability you should specify this value as precise as possible here in order to simplify the production and to benefit from further production rebates This value for half full is very important for posting your items in trays because e g rebates can only be granted for the production of ZIP trays if they are accepted by Deutsche Post as being half full or if the respective minimum weight is kept You can obtain more information on the half filling amount from the Deutsche Post Hotline 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part thereof from a German landline or a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network or from a Direct Marketing Center close to you You should provide information on the half filling amount as precise as possible because Infopost Manager is unaware of the flexibility or compactability of the items and thus cannot conclude the item s exact volume Number of trays Checking the option Minimize postage higher pr
10. Postal routing data tab This tab gives you information on the status of the postal routing data used by the address check 97 He 4 5 2 Edit Settings Extended Postal routing data Used version Datafactory Postalcode 1 2014 Datafactory Streetcode 1 2014 Demoversion Contains street directories only for those 218 cities with multiple delivery ZIPs The address check uses the so called Datafactory which is available in two versions The small street directory Datafactory Postalcode contains all street and city names of the 218 largest cities in Germany The large street directory Datafactory Streetcode contains all ZIPs city and street names in Germany The Datafactory Postalcode is already included in Infopost Manager while the Datafactory Streetcode has to be purchased separately Since cities and communities are continuously developing and the purchase of updates hence becomes useful it makes sense to take up the quarterly subscription You will find the order forms with information on prices conditions etc of the small street directory Datafactory Postalcode in the file personal use resp supplier and of the large street directory Datafactory Streetcode in the file The data which you need to find ZIPs city or street names in the address management or the ZIP search can still be updated free of charge on a regular basis on the Internet You can update the demo versions of the two s
11. Te oo Se o O o E E E Re amr oT a A LA oe 1 The spread by cities can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to h Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 7 4 Spread by provinces This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses grouped by provinces Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check You see the number of addresses belonging to a specific province 191 ie E Address spread by provinces Preview 4 Print Print options Esport Close Used 24178 Unused 24 257 Province el Addresses e 170 QO Brandenburg O Bremen Hamburg A Hesse Lower Saxony Mecklenburg Westen Pomerania North Rhine Westphalia Rhineland Palatinate Saarland Saxony Saxony4nhalt Schlesvig Holstein Thuringia m L The spread by provinces can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width
12. When using this option it is mandatory that your address list contains at least one date field which also had to be imported Select the field containing the date to be considered via the dropdown menu Date field and specify one of the supported formats via Date format If desired you can advice Infopost Manager how to handle empty or invalid field contents with the options Set missing date as and Set invalid date as In area Write to address you finally decide whether you want to write to the address with the youngest or the oldest date The selected options for invalid or missing dates are surely taken into account Once you clicked the button it will be extended by an arrow You will be able to change the settings anytime using this arrow Prioritization of data sources If you for example bought or leased foreign addresses you have to synchronize them with your own addresses With activated module Professional in duplicate search you will find a button E with which you can specify the priority of the data source Select according to address soun Priority of address source Source Directory Addresses Adressen Labelfor C Users Public Docume 4579 Adressen ls C Users Public Docume 19678 International xls CAlUsers Public Docume 6567 recently created O If several markings from one address source D Keep marking Mark address with most data Mark first address 5 Mark last address
13. which have to be contained in the orders respective fields Otherwise the orders will not be shown This filter serves as an additional filter to the two filter criteria mentioned above and reduces the orders to be displayed to a minimum if 20 Ho 3 3 2 necessary The text to be searched has to be entered case sensitive i e small capital letters will be taken into account Find tab As an alternative to filtering you can also specifically search for a dedicated order if the respective order data are available Projects Orders View Options ae Fiter Find Number of Deutsche Post Order number Humber of customer Cuestamer ma Order nunber ho ode Specify in this window the order data which you usually receive from your customer in advance Clicking the button calls the customer index on page 201 where you can comfortably select an address whose customer number will be taken into the respective field Request You are going to contact Deutsche Post s exchange server by requesting those orders which meet the defined filter criteria The request can take place in various ways e Click the Request button e Click the icon in the icon bar e Press the F5 key e Choose the item Request of the View menu 2l Projects Orders View Options T mm Y F iter Find Project Sbabuz lipe Category Order ma UFAG Poshng debe 3 na proyect Period P E 17 01 20
14. Address Street Ho EP City Monschau P O Box AP City Major recipient AP City Clear input 219 ie Tie You can even expand this example by entering only the first letter s of the city name Please note however that such information can lead to very long computing operations if several cities have to be considered You can also use the wildcards and in all three fields in order to replace strings resp single characters For example B chstr will find Buchstr and Bachstr while Buch will find Buchenweg and Buchberger Allee Using the key combination Ctrl P directly calls the ZIP search from the respective dialog fields Deutsche Post AG provides the necessary postal routing data on a regular basis free of charge They can be downloaded from the Internet If you subscribe to the Infopost Manager newsletter you will be automatically informed if new data are available or you configure the News and Update Check on page 227 to be launched each time you start Infopost Manager You can register for the newsletter and download the updated data at www infopost manager de The postal routing data used by address check are not affected by updating the postal routing data for the ZIP search The required data have to be purchased separately 8 10 Update address check Use this menu item to update the Datafactory which is required by the address check on page 91
15. Differing from the national optimization production rebates are not granted for international mailshots If appropriate you will find some explanations on the optimization results on tab Notes el Notes Al posteges are without obligation in any case the current rales tariffs and biasa are valid Due to the malisho siza posting is only possible at a larger accaplance office 1 673 iniemational addresses wore sored 04 All tables are also shown in the project statistics on page 184 and thus can be viewed at any time 15 2 2 5 Payment method properties e 15 2 3 15 2 3 1 On the Prepayment tab you can also manually enter amounts which are already stamped on the international posting list and thus have to be deducted from the grand total Payment method Infopost National Stamped on items Remaining postage stamped on list Infopost Intemational Stamped on items Remaining postage stamped on list Letters International at kilo rates Stamped on items Remaining postage stamped on list Please note that the values which can be entered are dependent on the chosen franking type on page 145 Thus input fields might be disabled Results menu You can access inter alia the production lists menu item International which you will need to cor rectly produce the various items Additionally all forms for Infopost International which are required for posting international items can be printed It is understood th
16. E Only apply to ambiguous groups Cancel With duplicate groups containing addresses from different address sources only that address will be marked which originates from the source file with the highest priority The priorities in the list view are descending i e the topmost file has highest and the bottommost has lowest priority If duplicates originate from one single address source you can determine using the options in If duplicate group from one address source which record shall be marked The option Only apply to ambiguous groups can only be checked if at least one duplicate group is unambiguous When using this option Infopost Manager offers you the capability of handling these special groups in a sophisticated way for instance by choosing other options like Select first address After confirming the chosen options are only applied to these groups Once you clicked the button it will be extended by an arrow You will be able to change the settings anytime using this arrow 125 Chosen options By clicking the button you open a window which shows the chosen options for the current duplicate search Chosen options Regular search Consider contact person with companies Ignore addresses without contact person Find retail offices in same city Consider field Company3 Compare company and name fields Consider first name with home addresses Show similar address as duplicate Match accuracy me
17. General Type QR code O Datamatris Content Value Address fields Firmal Data format alphanumerical Preta Format Version Module size Version required 3 What will be exported is actually a multiline hexadecimal string that can be transformed into the graphical code by the font Deutsche Post Premiumadress Except for line separator on this page the available options correspond to those of inserting on page 302 a 2D barcode into a mail merge document Line separator You can choose in which way a line break shall be denoted in the exported string If you export into a Text file separator txt on page 420 please take special care of the option Replace line breaks in fields Using this option would overwrite the settings made here Responseplus Insert this field if you want to export the information used by Responseplus on page 304 post matrix code 407 Define condition field Address fields PLZ Stra e Interpret empty fields as Value if condition is fulfilled Value Address fields PLZ Strabe Aachen Value if condition is not fulfilled Value Address fieldsePL Stra e The settings for the areas Contractual partner Customer order number Item ID and Grouping of response analysis in this window correspond to those of mail merge on page 305 Only the ZIP of the reply address will be part of the matrix code You can either use the address of the s
18. Here all pallets to be produced are shown each having a unique sequential number 174 Pallet No Het kg Grogs ka 1 61 3 2 100 6 3 60 4 4 326 0 3 350 7 E 110 2 T 130 0 g 02 1 3 Aaa 0 262 1 150 2 The net weight only sums up all item weights for a complete pallet while gross weight is the net weight plus the weights for trays and the pallets themselves More detailed information on pallet production can be found in chapter Production guidelines on page 319 Quantity This area shows how many trays respectively bundles containing how many items have to be packed on the pallet Quantity Trays ltem ll Je 5 3 J6 30 AB 54 80 r a Pallet target A pallet target comprises all pallets for the same routing zone RZ first digit of the ZIP or routing region RR first two digits of the ZIP Germany pallets also represent a pallet target 108 5 158 5 66 2 450 6 479 0 166 1 effi 200 3 3995 6 293 0 132 6 3 095 5 038 13 421 16 300 18 037 5 510 lalate 10 105 14 659 13 107 6 512 175 Pallet target Type Marking NN ANN A BD NY A NON The Type indicates the pallet target type RZ RR or Germany The Marking will be printed on the pallet label This is in particular important if the marking of the different labels will be done manually 6 4 Pallet target list Similar to the tray bundle target list the pallet target list is for controlling purposes durin
19. Variant Variant Variant B Variant C 0 of 4 entres selected Cancel The command Change variant of the contextual menu right mouse button will help you quickly and comfortably assign consistent variants to the filtered on page 71 and or selected on page 70 addresses Multi Change Fields Field Variant Mario nd Value trom held OK Conca 15 3 3 Preparation menu Use this menu to enter all relevant information for a VarioPlus mailshot You define the variants specify which addresses belong to which variant and decide how to produce the different variants Depending on these settings the results of the postage optimization on page 154 may differ signifi cantly 361 15 3 3 1 Item properties In the Item properties window there are two new options e Coextensive e Vario dd International Wrapper format lt of largest varnant Format DL 220x110 mm Preview Length eel Length width 110 E E Portrait 8 Landscape Thickness weight ss varants gt E 0 Coextensive Ota 5 100 5 Wario Variants i Yanants Product Format ira If you activate the option Coexrtensive you will not produce a Vario mailshot In this case you can define the weight and thickness for all items in the appropriate fields As soon as you activate the option Vario the window changes and a button Details appears which you can use to clearly show the variants
20. means that the current data record is released for writing to Ignored addresses can be identified by an icon at the left border of the table which represents the respective reason for deactivation Se 40 Be 5 Se 2 Each address can be separately edited and set active in the dialog window of the address management which open as soon as an address is double clicked The data records can also be activated or ignored by double clicking the line number of the respective address on the left table side Address type used Up to three types of addresses are available for each data record e the street address 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 e the P O Box address e and the major recipient address The used address type is shown in this window and the following rule applies Major recipient address is preferred to P O Box address which in turn is preferred to street address ZIP used Here you will see the ZIP which is used for this data record Category During postage optimization the items are distributed into categories e g Infopost remaining items After postage optimization has been successfully passed you will see here the address item category Country Name Country ISO code By using the assignment of the Country field and the country code the respective country name is determined This is also available for instance in mail merge Address source This information shows the source file from whi
21. not specified alphanumericall Info line not specified Product Mame InfopostEatalog Grok 0q Fremiumadress mit Hulle Version 490 21 11 2013 12 23 07 When starting the print job with OK all addresses are initially checked whether or not they comply to the Premiumadress prerequisites Errors occurred while checking Premiumadress Printing will be canceled Do you want to open the report If errors occur printing will be stopped and you can open the report in order to locate the error Infopost Manager only checks those Premiumadress impressions which will be actually printed Thus it is possible to print only addresses with valid Premiumadress impression by specifying address ranges in the Print dialog window GOGREEN In case you have activated the option GOGREEN in Item properties on page 142 this position frame enables you to place its logo onto your mail merge document 294 Edit properties General Logo variant 8 Colored 5 Black white You can define a color mode before you arrange and if appropriate scale the logo in your document 11 4 7 Image You can insert Bitmaps or JPG files e g your logo into you mail merge document via the graphic frame If you right click on a graphic frame the Image tab opens Source Statical File No image selected gt Properties Width 0 00 crn Height 0 00 cm 0 Fisel O Fisels 5 Dynamical file name from field Options 10 gt
22. ow election Province Mielze Schleswig Holsteirn Hamburg Bremen North Rhine Westphalia Hesse Ja Lower Saxony 1 1 2 Rhineland Palatinate Ja Baden uertemberg 3b Bavaria 4 Saarland Ja Berlin z Brandenburg E a A A B A 8 8 E E A E 6 of 17 entres selected Countries This filter shows only addresses with dedicated countries 80 He e Filter Country a z Available counties wd election Country ISO code Address Canada 124 20 Colombia 170 1 Czech Republic 03 1 J Denmark 208 43 5 Finland 246 17 E France 250 115 German ero 20 825 Ghana 208 1 Greece 300 4 Hong Kong 344 1 Oria 340 ac Range 116 170 208 276 300 7 of 44 entries selected 7 28941 Addresses _ Ja A A A oO oO A nO A K Please note that only those countries are offered which are contained in your project Details on how to use the selection methods can be found here on page 419 Import file By using this powerful filter you can select addresses coming from dedicated source files or manual insertion Countries Caller Public Documents Deutsche Pest 40 Iinfopoot Manager Data Examples Adressen Labelformat accdb En leer Public Documento Deutsche Post AG Infepect Manager Data Examples Adrescenale C Users Public Documents Deutsche Post AG Infopost Manager Data Examples Intemational_als Manually inserted addresses Thus you can e g select an erroneously added data source and delete i
23. Anredenubenpiuhung Adresssendenung paused sel 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 1 mn Anschriftenuibereuhung Anschniftenubenniuihung paused ad 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 0mm Demo DHL Infopos Demo DAL Infopost Cemoalmgs 06 11 203 13112013 1hl4mm Demo Intemational Demo Intemational Demo Mallings 06 11 2013 20 01 2014 1 h 34 mn Demo Standard Demo Standard Demo Madinge 06 11 2013 13112013 1hl4mm Demo Standard Demo Standardz Demot alng 06 11 4813 21 01 2014 6 hdi mm Demo Yano Demo Yano Demotialngs DE 11 2013 13 11 2013 1h14 mn Dubletteri Dubletter 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 D mi Neues Proekt 21 01 2014 21 01 2014 341 mi Mero Project 21 01 2014 21 01 2014 2h57 me Volagenprojek 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 Umm Sender Mailer Save You can use the Save menu item to save the last modifications to your sender data Save and close You can use the Save and close button or menu item to save the last modifications to your sender data and finish managing your sender data Close You can use the Close button to leave the management of your sender data without saving any changes Projects Prior to clicking on one of the options which are explained below with the exception of New project you first have to select a project on the Projects tab Afterwards you will be able to apply one of the following commands Open project You can use the Open project menu item to continue working on an existing project after you have se
24. Bundle production properties Production properties Bundle production properties Max items per bundle Bundles Minimize postage higher production complexity Minimize production complexity no minimal production rebates 5 Produce bundles dependent on item volume Min items per ZIP bundle Do not produce ZIP bundles Order Optimize production sequence for small bundle Maximum quantity per small bundle E Production sequence Per pallet first Order in group Ascending by ZIP 5 Ascending by number items 5 Descending by number items Here you specify the maximum number of items per bundle Deutsche Post recommends a maximal bundle weight of 10 kg Number of bundles Checking the option Minimize postage higher production complexity lets Infopost Manager produce as much as possible routing region respectively ZIP bundles Thus you have to produce more bundles and production complexity increases Option Minimize production complexity less production rebates particularly produces routing region and maybe some Germany bundles but no ZIP bundles With this option you will produce less 150 5 3 1 4 bundles and production complexity decreases but you also waive potential rebates The last option Produce bundles dependent on number of items directly affects the number of bundles to be produced If the granted rebates do not amortize the production efforts which have to be spent for pr
25. Muster Mak Musterman 21 01 14 13 45 Administrator Click Create to add another user Using the context menu or by clicking the arrow to the right of Create you can use additional functions Create Edit Copy Delete Reset password Import users from You may copy a user The dialog Create new user will then be pre populated with data of the selected user The menu item Import users from allows you to import user data from another program installed on your computer e g Manager Presse Distribution or Postwurfspezial Manager The menu will show all available programs Use this menu to delete or edit on the following page an existing user as well The menu item Reset password will reset the password preset by an administrator or specified by the user himself Enter a new password in the same named dialog Optionally you may activate the check box to force the user to change this password by his next login Use this function for example in case a user has forgotten his password 214 Change password at next login You need to have administrator user rights in order to call user administration He 8 6 1 User data User data User name Mustertrau Complete name Erika Mustermarn Descriptio Phone E mail Erika Mustermannamuster de Network Logir Administrator E Account locked Main user In the field user name specify the name which will be used to log in ik Th
26. Project name Demo Professional 3 5 Reopen Descriptor Demo DHL Infopost Demo International Customer Muster AG Musterh Muster AG Musterh Demo Professional Demo Standard Demo Vana Delivery 18 08 2014 120 Muster AG Musterh Bauer Keach GmbH Muster AG Musterh 24 01 2014 120 Infopost Manager saves a list of the most recent projects you have worked on and allows you a quick access to these data 2 Rio Project New Infopozst DHL Infopost New from project k Request order Open Reopen O Promotion Demo Professional Project explorer 1 Promotion Demo Standard 2 Demo Mailings 0 emo Standard Import Pack amp Eo Data backup Quit Alt F4 Select the desired project from this list it will be opened automatically In the Extras on page 223 menu you can define how many projects shall be shown in this list 3 6 Project explorer Working with this project explorer is easy On the left you see the folder tree including the sub folders if available On the right you see saved projects 28 o Demo DHL Infopost Muster AG Musterh 18 09 2014 12 a Pero International Muster AG Musterh a Demo Professional Muster AG Musterh y Demo Standard Muster AG Musterh a Demo Vara Muster AG Musterh Depending on the state of processing the projects are marked with particular icons in column Status Icon Des
27. Settings Key fields ID E Ignore empty key fields Consider case Key fields Using this dropdown menu you can select the fields by activating the respective check boxes Ignore empty key fields If this option is activated empty key fields will not be taken into account For instance if the key field Customer no is empty for lots of records the duplicate search detects those records as duplicates Checking the option avoids such an unwanted behavior Consider case By default e g eBay ebay Ebay or EBAY will be similarly treated and thus will be shown in one duplicate group Activate this option if you do not want the duplicate search to show duplicates which differ in case 4 6 2 Results OL X Cancel Il Pause View e Group overviews gt Fields Edit l C Users Public Docum Internationalsis Address vie Duplicate group 10473 Association for Computing Machinery c o Election Service P O Box 93 98 Boston MA 02205 C Users Public Docum International slds Write to 2 addresses Do mot write to 0 addresses The found duplicates are shown combined in groups Thus you can immediately decide whether or 119 not they are really similar and if yes which of the listed addresses should be written to You can use the navigation arrows to browse these groups By right clicking an address you will either edit it release or lock it for writing to Yo
28. The following data will be transferred to Deutsche Post in order to improve the product 22 Transmission on 06 07 2015 08 21 45 HHH System information Product Infopost Manager Version 8 5 0 42335 License ID A98 972 9F9 E36 System ID B90AB7C9 1504 4450 A440 A95CD2C4F34F Number starts 1 Duraton 22 ms FIP version 06 2015 PPL version 32 Network installation No Operating system Windows 7 Service Pack 1 Version 6 1 Build 7601 64 Bit Edition Resolution 3840 x 1080 px Memory 8189 MB Start of data recording 06 07 2015 08 18 41 End of data recording 06 07 2015 08 21 45 Projects 2 Transmission on 06 07 2015 08 18 40 System information Product Infopost Manager Version 8 5 0 42335 License ID 498 972 9P9S E56 System ID B9OAB7C9 1504 4450 A440 A95CD2C4F34F Number starts 1 y Delete archived data Activate option Delete archived data to remove this information from your computer 236 8 11 11 Directories and file names On this tab you can specify how Infopost Manager will support you on selecting directories and file names for import and export You can of course still choose arbitrary directories and files The settings you specify here will be used in the file select dialogs as pre allocations in the hope they will facilitate your work Import presettings 5 Suggest last used import directoy across projects 9 User defined configuration Di
29. The icon for this address type is the blue tick Show manually corrected addresses Use this option to show or hide in the result view on page 103 the addresses which were manually changed The icon for this address type also is the green tick combined with the magnifier Show addresses with changed spelling Use this option to show or hide the addresses in the result view on page 103 for which the spelling of the street or major recipient name was changed by Infopost Manager The icon for this address type also is the green tick Default By clicking the button Default you can always reset the settings to application default Report tab This tab allows you to select the information which will be listed in the created address check report In detail these are the following options Report options Show statistics Show complete address E Show Company field E Show original address Show error messages E Do not separate addresses for pagination Show chosen options Preview Show statistics If you show the statistics of the address check in the report all relevant address check information and results on page 103 will be given Report of address check summary Status 20 01 2014 Project Demo Professional Page 1 of 2 Statistics Postalhy correct addresses 23 055 26 52 Y Manualhy corrected addresses Li 0 02 55 Automaticalhy corrected addresses 603 156 Thesaurus corected
30. Thesaurus 99 Fo Address No 1 Record 2 Write to address SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH Ignore address type Magdeburger Str 3 20457 Hamburg Major reopient Y Status of Street address Postal y incorrect Error descrip bon No such street name existing for this ZIP Suggestions for Street address 1 100 Street Waldenburger Strabe 3 ZIP 22045 ee Steet L neburger Stra e 3 ZIP 21073 OL Steet Moorburger Stra e 3 ZIP 21079 Accepting a Thesaurus suggestion is similar to accepting a normal address check suggestion on page 108 Thesaurus editor The Thesaurus strictly contains only postal correct entries Using the Thesaurus editor you may control the application of the Thesaurus in some way by explicitly activating or deleting an entry for usage Deleted entries will not be considered later on neither for automatic corrections nor for the provision of Thesaurus suggestions Based on the fact that all Thesaurus entries have to be postal correct it may happen over the years that single Thesaurus entries become postal incorrect In such cases Infopost Manager automatically deactivates the respective entries by marking them deleted Thus it is permanently guaranteed that there will not be any incorrect addresses created You can launch the Thesaurus editor either by clicking the Entries button in the options on page 96 window or via choosing the item Thesaurus editor in the results
31. nalyes Extras Help Pa tagih A hee i New Project SenderiMailer Santer Bauer Finch GmbH Aachen Pol culiar numer ATTE Bauer kirch Giph Aachen Pos culiar maTi Informacion dor this order de number Last karste Machina FRANETT denier Default doc umeni Project nama kiaw Proje Desorption haw Propet Pree jE D rindas ragika on 072019 10 36 41 Ey jb Lhanged on 40 07 2014 10 36 50 Ey b Opimized on About Admririnio If you imported on page 49 your addresses from various sources you can easily delete the addresses of a dedicated file without launching the address management on page 66 start filtering and then removing the filtered addresses Just go to the main window to the Addresses area 10 a Infopost Mienager Professional Demo Professonal Project Address Preparation Results Anats Extras Hao F 2588 DAY 214 9 3 ua venea Pe Tha al Adreses wo ge Search im bel 30 816 used addresses 1 993 international addresses Linusod Total lademational LE Mie Total irand bois Address source Quick Clicks Fila Typa Addres Management an nii Ween ule umena Wer Publ Documenta Leal alutation check BASE jU Pe file Admrisinor MS Excal workiheel M3 Excel wike Each address source additionally possesses a y button This can be used to remove the respective addresses from the database with prior explici
32. 0 9 Tray Bundle targets are enumerated by Infopost Manager If appropriate change the column layout on page 417 in order to see the target numbers of the trays resp bundles in the table The Type indicates the sorting criterion ZIP RR or Germany which has to be considered when filling the items into trays or bundles The Marking will be printed on the tray bundle label Depending on the tray bundle type this is the ZIP the routing region or 0 9 for Germany tray resp bundles Producing Germany trays means that the items have to be filled into the trays sorted by ZIP in ascending order Bundles however have to be target clean i e they may only contain items with the same ZIP or routing region Tray target Marking Type 99974 PL 139374 PLZ 99976 PLZ Ef LA En LA 69 LA 0 9 BRO e The first two lines of the image above show ZIP trays with the same target Here the marking of the tray is the 5 digit ZIP e There is only one ZIP tray for the target 99976 e The next trays are routing region trays Type RR for the targets 67 68 and 69 i e for each target there is only one tray 171 e The last line shows a Germany tray the tray label will get the marking 0 9 Pallet When pallets should be produced the tray bundle list will additionally contain the columns pallet and pallet target Peete Print Frirt oplions Esport Close Tra Trap larget Pales tangat
33. 4 Postfach 7s rae PLE Postfach A PLZ Grohemptanger Beset core dl Mrk Cb A The selected column should 60 pixels wide Cia 89 Edit first name list Use this menu item to edit the user defined first name list on this page 4 4 4 First name list Infopost Manager hold a first name list with approximately 120 000 entries Abbreviated first names e g Friedr Wilh are not contained If you address list should have a recipient whose first name is unknown or whose first name is e g abbreviated you can add it to the user defined first name list It is also possible to add first names with genders that differs from Infopost Manager s definition Thus the results of the salutation check can be respectively influenced Add first name Basically there are three ways to include a first name to the user defined first name list 1 Via the contextual menu item Add first name to user list 2 Via the Confirm dialog which appears for unknown first names Invalid first name fou r a First name D La The first name D La is not contained in the first name list Here you can e g specify the gender D La will be added to the user defined list as first name gt Ignore D La will be ignored during the process gt Ignore all All unknown first names will be ignored during the process You can overrule the suggested gender with the Change button while Add adds the first name with th
34. Auto Correct pairs The spell check s configuration opens new ways for you You define how Infopost Manager shall replace a word not only during spell check but already during typing Tiea Auto Corrections Adding an auto correct to your custom dictionary allows one word to automatically replace another Replace We thy hertalich herzlich Add dazz Delete Mit freundliche You can use this functionality to auto correct often wrongly entered words e g typos or even to expand common abbreviations As soon as one of those words to be replaced is followed by a space strike Infopost Manager automatically substitutes it If a word is not automatically substituted because you did not type a space but a special character or a carriage return the replacement will be performed during the real spell check Cie Settings You specify Infopost Manager s behavior during spell check via this options dialog 311 11 5 4 o Spell check settings Options Ignore words in CAPITAL LETTERS Ignore words with numbers Ignore abbreviations Suggestions only from main dictionary O Gror two capital LEtters at the BE ginning of a wOrd Check spelling before printing With activated option Ignore words in CAPITAL LETTERS all shifted words are deemed correct The same holds for Words with numbers e g 3 dimensional V12 cylinder if the respective option is ticked A check in field Ignore abbreviations skips abbrevia
35. E Bottom Coo MAN Thickness 1 Pisels Type Complete O Use background color Lines Each of the four bordering lines can be individually activated and deactivated the thickness and type of the lines are changed using the thickness and type options Color You can also change the color of the lines Click on the button color and select the desired color Complete Use this option to define the background color of a frame Activate the color button and select the desired color 2 1 i 11 2 7 11 2 8 11 2 9 Margins tab This tab is only available for position frames with none rotated text elements that is it is not available for the position frames rotated text franking mark barcode graphic and empty frame Edit properties Inner Margin Lett Right Tog l Bottom With this tab the margins within the frame itself are chosen for the selected position frame Delete With this menu item selected frames are deleted from the mail merge document If there are two or more frames simultaneously selected they can also be deleted via the contextual menu or via the Del key Arrange The frames that a mail merge document is made of may be arranged individually before or behind one another The frames can be either moved one layer up or down or can directly be placed into the foreground or background By this arrangement the content of the top most fram
36. In the Properties area you can manually define a specific width for each field You can use the button Verify field widths to set the maximum width required by each field and automatically remove empty fields from the export file If fields are found during the field width verification which are too long Infopost Manager automat ically offers to split them to several subfields on page 411 The following fields widths of your export field definition are smaller than required FIRMAL Thus data will be incompletely exported to some extent which might easily lead to errors Do you want the field widths to be adjusted If you click the No button the field contents will be truncated 330 o 14 13 Start export All information required for esporting the Addresses are now available Summary File format CSW file File name C Users Public Documents New Project Infopost National TrT gt caw CU sers Public DocumentsHNey Project Infopost National TrT gt caw CAU serPublic DocumentsHNev Project Infopost National Trl gta caw C Users Public Documents N ew Project Infopost National TrT gtb cev CAU ser Public DocumentsHNey Project Infopost National TrT gtr csv Field structure CFIA RAT FIRMA 2 ABTEILUNG ZUHAENDEN ZUSTADA 2USTPL2A 2USTORT LAND BRIEFANRED KUNDENHA SORATEG 12 SDNR 12 RDNA Create export description CAL zer Public Documents New Projec
37. In this area you determine how Infopost Manager shall handle the field salutation for male resp female recipients If option also replace existing is activated the field salutation will be always overwritten The activated option else delete salutation results in flushing the field salutation if the salutation check does not find any clear result Possibly existing contents will be deleted Foreign salutations can be simply generated by specifying respective entries for the fields For instance enter the value Mr for male and Mrs for female Afterwards activate options also replace existing Right after the salutation check is finished English salutations are available and can be used for the letter salutation on page 402 o 84 4 4 2 Additional settings activate auto correction Definable salutations which e g are based on a known first name will be automatically set Conflicts will be ignored and in particular not be shown activate user defined first name list If this option is deactivated Infopost Manager ignores the user defined first name list on page 90 and is not able to add new first names to it The entries of this list are not contained in Infopost Manager s system based first name list It is normally created during processing incorrect salutations do not write to incorrect not corrigible addresses All recipients will not be written to whose salutation can not be identified by Infop
38. Letter mail item Preview B O Buchersendung D larensendung Sample 5 Postcard Ci Infocard O Katalog D Infopost Kreativ 5 Infocard Kreativ The content type of wrapping and format of Infopost items have to be coextensive Wrapping E Unwrapped item e g catalogs without envelope 50 Product Format Postage cara On this tab you can specify the content type of your items Brief explanations help to select the right option You will find details on postal regulations in the product brochures which can be read via the Help Brochures on page 242 menu item or from a Deutsche Post AG Direct Marketing Center or by contacting the Hotline Phone 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part thereof from a German landline or a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network In particular with remaining items which cannot be sent as Infopost it is worthwhile declaring the content type because book items or merchandizes can be sent cheaper than normal letter items Unwrapped items can only be posted as Infopost Thus the category remaining items does not apply in such mailshots 144 Rie Ho 5 2 3 Hint for unwrapped items If you want to send less than 4 000 unwrapped items you should test various settings Basically the following applies The more widely spread your addresses are across Germany the more likely it is that
39. Options You can use this menu to adjust the Infopost Manager settings to your requirements 221 8 11 1 General Data backup Administrator Directories and file names Telemetry General Presettings Internet Order management Launch application Welcome screen 5 Last project 5 Open project Main window Customer index only in lettershop mode Show wizard Always 5 With new project 5 Never Launch application You can define here which view Infopost Manager shall call after having launched If Infopost Manager starts up with the Welcome to Infopost Manager screen you can select the fol lowing options immediately Welcome to Infopost Manager New project Last project Open project Customer index New Project a lea a S Show this screen when launching the application The Last project option automatically opens the project which was last processed with Infopost Manager The Open project option directly calls the project explorer making it possible to select a project for further processing If the Main window option has been activated Infopost Manager will be launched with the main screen and you can select the desired action via the menus 227 8 11 2 With selected option Customer index Infopost Manager will call the customer index on page 201 directly after having launched so that you then can select your customer or one of their projects with which you like to
40. Step 2 Responseplus assistant Step 2 of Contractual partner EKF Customer order number Number Items Number Item ID Start number Contractual partner Specify here the Post customer number of the contractual partner for your Responseplus campaign normally yours Customer order number Here you can specify a unique identifier for your Responseplus campaign This order number is crucial for the response analysis Only if it is unique for every order a valid statistic can be compiled This will e g allow for calculating the number of responses that have actually been sent The order number can contain up to 15 characters Allowed are capital letters from A to Z and digits from 0 to 9 Items Specify here how many items you would like to produce Item ID Each reply item must have a unique identification number Infopost Manager will automatically set the IDs for you By specifying a start number you can ensure different campaigns will not use the same IDs Step 3 This step is only necessary in case you are producing Responseplus Referral 212 Responseplus assistant Step 3 of 3 TAN list File name C Users PubliclDocumentsyesponseplus tz ses Password ATT TT at least 4 characters Password confirmation s Consecutive no E TAN list For each item a TAN will be generated A TAN will be used to determine whether an item has already been sent or not and can therefore avoid ab
41. Use the data fields to pause your printer before starting each new batch tray or a new palette series Thus you will be able to pack the items appropriately even during address printing You can use the Change settings option to insert the printer specific control codes Distribution list identifier In the category Item you can also find the configurable data field distribution list identifier For the production of routing region bundles the distribution list identifier fulfills the function of the bundling labels to identify these bundles Insert here via change settings the values for prefix and suffix if applicable Although postally not required you can get this field filled with appropriate data for ZIP tray resp bundles Just check the respective option You can insert the distribution list identifier above the first address line via the menu item edit address 412 block and the option insert field in the position frame address block on page 280 Distribution list identifier forma Distribution list identifier Frefis H kd Suffix as prefix F filled also for ZIP bundles postally not required Example 454H Relative pallet begin and end When producing variants in multi flow method variant after variant or variant clean on page 368 the fields of the category Pallet might be of interest The fields Begin relative and End relative are of certain interest because they insert a
42. a4 E Low 376 Keep aspect ratio 5 Short franking mark Preview Ein Service der Deutarhan Past Responseplus franking mark tab The settings on this tab correspond to those of Franking mark on page 288 with limited complexity For example RESPONSEPLUS will always be printed as the product name Moreover for the form referral no short franking mark is allowed Responseplus does only exist for national items and hence no international franking mark exists 11 4 16 Payment hint Bitte ausreichend Tankieren paz Instead of a franking mark on the current page you can also print a placeholder for a postage stamp To do so enter a text to ask the sender of the Responseplus reply for franking 307 11 5 1 11 5 2 fe 11 5 Extras In menu Extras several additional functionalities are available for printing the addresses onto your mail merge documents Address management on page 66 Machine readable fonts In order to machine process your items and thus to deliver them as quickly as possible the address block has to be printed using a machine readable font Infopost Manager knows a large number of machine readable fonts approved by Deutsche Post and automatically identifies which of these fonts are installed on your system Edit fonts Use the Delete button to remove fonts you previously added from your system or the Add button to install additional machine readable fonts Fonts you installe
43. address check All addresses are deemed to be Postally correct where the required fields in particular the ZIP code and city are not empty and compliant with the postal regulations The line Corrected manually contains information on how many address data records you have edited manually after the automatic check The Corrected automatically line contains information on how many of your address data records were automatically changed by Infopost Manager during the address check in order to be compliant with the postal regulations Addresses are said to be Corrected by Thesaurus if they have been corrected by applying a Thesaurus entry instead of having been become postally compliant via automatic or manual correction The information in the Spelling changed line refers to the data records in which the spelling e g of the street or the major recipient name was adjusted Whether and how this happens depends on the settings given in options on page 92 Address data records where several address types are available and where at least one of them does not comply with the postal regulations are listed in the Incorrect address type line The quantity and percentage of the addresses where neither an automatic change has been performed nor any suggestion for manual processing could be made are listed in the Postally incorrect line Here only a manual correction of the addresses is possible whether they will be already released for wri
44. click Keep The existing addresses as well as the unassigned fields on page 56 will be conserved When assigning the field types make sure that the fields of the file to be imported are assigned to the corresponding field type of the existing address database During the import all fields without any assignment will extend the address database by an additional column The field contents are set empty for all addresses previous to the import The various source files of the address database are explicitly displayed in the result area of the main window Address source Fie Typs Add renee Imported Germany intermiilonal C Wer PubiciDocuments Deutsche Fost AG nfigpest Manager ia E so MS Excel 6 561 6561 4555 1 003 Dro Pa Cers PubbciDocuments Deutsche Post A04nfoposi Managa i Text fe DOS 830 230 5x0 C era Pubid Document Deubscre Posi AG rfopesi Manage i l dBASE ML ile 4 579 4579 4579 50 p a 4 1 1 Please note that for technical reasons the number of files that can be imported into each project is limited to 250 Import options When importing text files the text file wizard turns up to assist you with making the correct choices a Text file wizard select file type The text import wizard detected that pour addresses are available in format Separator IF this should be wrong please choose a format which better describes your data As soon as all entries are correct click on Next Select the dat
45. iiaj anisi ed rnd aha CONE Card il onda conde Loma Orgy Jim T ram E T lm FFU ia T Oj 1 Emm Heh bH i Lo E Fakta e Moca Fisher 12 2 or Hariburg 2 SPECUAD Arabia inclement Eb Hagdebuge 3h 1 A 2 H umie E y Irgi thri anpra Wiegen Gabh u Co FIG Hahn j 3 Compare 5 cda Schuko 5 Com E oo Gr Fabio ud Veis d2 Compargll T ls Hecht Gib b Ca EG E Eman Seno Gt PD ben D EDE Hiesa Gendt Di ts 1 EFEDO WERE RUDOLF FLATE prH t Co kb Bd rete ade ZF jij Meal bh amp Co Bahus mj Paridad Bare arre Madero 1A Cigna 14 Adhe Fathwarrair 32 Cubrir Ta Gudenbeageng Gt Cobertura Go Oidentas par sbeebs of atten Gane 5 Cider gach voki SD Dhana Lab Cubanbas ara T al Cai E Am peers 32 a 2 Gubdeenng Hedred Gib 23 DU Mem ud eee mbh La i 24 EEH DATALRE Sembrar e Dita rbeburg omer ZE duren Parets S600 1 or PD elector GrH 26 der 25 ps r ll Co E SU Lel Bae atrial alt 1 Padres Dies Gobi Se Lead GabH u Co aa Fabs d deis Enri ia a 5 UA OA Crec Copan Lidl ar borda Mrk ad os shear F ah D Pieka FOG Hch dr AD 41 Para Ebert Gabh lara Caribes U roh Gap Fark L Prac Lt ds Huia rada haare mbH yo Ot Sree gt reri rei be For address files which only contain company addresses the field Company 1 has to be assigned for Belabobetie herning taladrar Feed J of 19 Frednch Ebad Sh 1 Laude il ri ches Targa 1013 Uchoa Sh 176 Rocher 1 Bere Ales du Aegobeiga Chinos 1
46. me This button shows or hides the folder tree view If the folder tree is hidden there will be more room for the table of saved projects in the current folder Clicking this button creates a new folder Jump one level higher in the folder structure by using this button The magnifier icon calls the normal search which will show a search dialog instead of the folder structure on the left and a hit list on the right see below MI The quick search finds terms in project name and properties and marks the first project which matches the search criterion Open a project by double clicking it Hit list Start the search by clicking the button A search dialog appears in the left part of the window Find Match accuracy Contains Y E Consider case Enter your search criterion in field Find All columns of the project table will be scanned by the search i e you are not only able to search for a project name but also for a customer status e g closed locked or date You can also select different operators in field Match accuracy e Contains e Contains complete word e Starts with e Exactly By using the check box Consider case you can decide whether or not you want the search to run context sensitively Clicking the button Find shows the hit list in the right part of the project table 30 Match accuracy Contarg LO Folder Hit ist Fi Name G Demo Madings a Demo DHL Infopost a Demo
47. provinces or communes small business owners who are not charged with any value added tax If you process a project as a lettershop on behalf of a customer you must at this point define the payer resp the buyer for DHL Infopost projects and his payment type Payment Prepayment ParerParment by a Sender Muster AG O Mailer Muster AG C Deviant Muster 4G Payer Payment type for remaining postage Cash4EC card C Crossed check C Direct debit Value added tax Pretax deduction permitted If you choose option deviant payer you can select an address from your customer index which is neither sender nor mailer by clicking the button You can define the presets for the payer and his default payment type per customer resp sender in the customer index on page 204 Thus you only have to define deviations from these presettings on a project by project basis ie 5 5 2 Prepayment On this tab the postage is shown which is already paid by direct franking 157 o Ho Payment method Infopost National Stamped on items T6047 36 Remaining postage stamped on list 0 00 Infopost International Stamped on items Remaining postage stamped on list Additionally you can specify here if you would like to stamp the remaining postage on the posting list In order to do so activate the check box Remaining postage stamped on list Entering variable values for the general stamping is only po
48. q v here on this page is met Of course you can change the signature here too Clicking the Name line button offers you the possibility of editing the text which is laid underneath the signature Option Use variable signatures activates the Data field and the condition area on the current page In the data field area you specify the field which will be compared against the defined values A dialog window appears and you can easily select the desired data field Condition area In the condition area you define the signature to be printed if the specified data field equals the value assigned to the respective signature By right clicking the condition area you can Add Change or Delete a signature condition With the context menu item Change field value you specify the content of the data field necessary for printing the signature Each field value can only be assigned uniquely 300 Rio fo 11 4 10 When assigning field values please mind their case sensitivity i e lower and upper case letters will be treated differently Kirschweg and KIRSCHWEG are different field values Additionally possible jokers will not be interpreted as such The field value st thus does not equal Postfach or WeststraBe In above example Max Mustermann would sign if the salutation equals Herr while Monika Muster frau would if it equals Frau In all other cases like for instance Firma or no co
49. 02 2014 06 02 2014 07 04 4014 2 014 4114 Content Pallet Grogs kc FZ 2 3 RR 30 31 AR 27 48 RZ b Hz 4 2 In this menu you can define the jobs and assign them to a specific producer Job splitting Partial postings Once you have optimized your mailshot you can start to divide your items on the suppliers by using the option Job splitting Partial postings in the Preparation menu The number of trays and the weight is shown for your information 373 No Desenplion on Trey You can define the first job by using the Add button in the dialog Manage job splitting partial postings 374 General tab General Content Supplier via main supplier Muster 4G EKP 0123456789 O via sub supplier O a Date Date 05 02 2014 Time 12 00 Delivery use global delivery place Pick up Musterst 12 12355 Musterhauser Pallets being picked up by Deutsche Post Pallets posted at a Deutsche Post acceptance office Muster Al Mushterstr 12355 Musterhausen Desorption Automatic 05 014 Muster AG 1 O Manual Supplier At this point you can specify the supplier you want to produce and deliver the current job You can choose between the main supplier normally this is you or a sub supplier who you can pick from your customer index on page 201 using the button Select The respective supplier s name and Post customer number will be displayed in brackets afterwards
50. 1 Goto page Using this menu item you can navigate to a specific page within a multi page document Tie 11 3 1 Ric 11 3 2 You also will directed to the Goto page dialog if you double click on the respective area in the status bar Page 2 of 4 11 3 View Use the menu item View to select various options which are useful for designing mail merge documents formats These are Object inspector The object inspector helps you to keep track of all position frames on page 279 integrated in a document and to check the position and structure of the various frames This may be particularly helpful if different frames are hidden by others and therefore cannot be selected with the mouse In the open object inspector you can see a list of all frames including all their fields and their respective position within the document By using the tick before each frame you can activate and deactivate the visibility of the different frames without deleting them from the document Position 2 005 00 9 30 9 05 cm Premiumadress Signature Max Mustermann Test 50 Jahre Muster 4G Text Musterhausen den Mail mergelCurrent dates Text Additional address helde Letter salutation Sehr g Signature Mas Mustermann Muster G bmp Test Vorstandsvoarsitzender Mas Mustermann HAB E Test Musterstr 12012345 MusterhausenlT el 01237456 1 47 12 89 13 33 1 04 1 24124 56 1 5172773 11 7 2 06 1
51. 15 2 3 3 Mail merge The module International optimization also extends the selection of address categories in mail merge mode Dependent on your address data you will find in the toolbar on page 278 the additional categories Infopost International Letters International at kilo rates and Remaining items Interna tional 21 th Infopost International Ww Within these categories printing can also be filtered by trays bundles tray bundle targets pallets and pallet targets Use this functionality for instance for printing only items for dedicated countries General Options Extended Additional pages Paper source Printer Mame POFCreator Overview Document Mail merge letter DIN 44 hoch 1 991 addresses Printing 1 991 pages Addresses GAl 5 Current address 5 Addresses 1 Tray 1 24 Insert With activated International optimization module new position frames are available in Infopost Man ager and existing ones are extended Franking mark The position frame Franking mark on page 288 is also useable for international dispatch 353 Edit properties General View National International Franking mark with franking wave Choose automatically Product specification National Franking mark Ein Service der Deutschen Post Particular motif as supplement wah International franking mark Keep aspect ratio Medium O Short franking mark Preview AWFO
52. 386 18 Version history What is new in version 8 3 1 from 03 09 2015 minor optimizations some bug fixes What was new in version 8 3 from 31 07 2015 optimized production sequence for small bundles on page 151 improved address check on page 91 by recognition of legacy street names dispatch properties on page 140 before item properties on page 142 international improved support for country specific bundled support for items heavier than 1 000 g support for separation of projects into partial projects on page 41 immediate deletion of export files at anonymization on page 35 import new option extend 4 digit ZIP with leading zero on page 75 save import structure and suggest it for subsequent imports improved multi import on page 49 various options for user defined paths for import and export on page 237 mail merge condition field on page 411 word wrap within fields on page 286 updated wizards Danish Polish several program optimizations and error corrections What was new in version 8 2 4 from 29 01 2015 bug fix for international mailing addresses What was new in version 8 2 3 from 15 12 2014 bug fix for postage calculation What was new in version 8 2 2 from 04 12 2014 new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 conformations Responseplus on page 211 387 support pallet storage on page 153 optimizations and error corrections What was new i
53. 5 than a numerical sorting 1 5 10 100 200 The same holds for date fields For instance when sorting dates in text format 1 12 10 would be sorted prior to 2 1 09 Category After optimization you can use this submenu to filter your items according to the different categories such as e g Infopost or remaining items Other items This filter lists those addresses which normally could be posted as Infopost only e g unwrapped items or Infopost Kreativ but which cannot be posted because the postal regulations are not met Not usable addresses This filter shows all the address data records which were deactivated during the address check and or duplicate search or which were manually deactivated via the Edit on page 67 button Used addresses This filter shows only those addresses which will be written to Not usable addresses Before optimizing this filter shows all addresses that are not usable for your mail shot National addresses This filter shows only all German addresses International addresses This filter shows only all non German addresses ZIP range This filter shows only addresses with dedicated ZIPs or ZIP ranges 18 Available IPs Selection ZIP Addresses 30900 52 30916 105 30926 E 30927 30929 30938 30952 30966 30974 _ IS GSE O A SOO Range 20095 21035 22083 22765 22046 220848 30900 30916 3092 13 of 2040 entries selected 354 Addresses Note Hot usable addresses ar
54. All gt option lists all formats Format selection This filter further restricts the formats available for selection System formats are formats known to Infopost Manager as labels envelopes or single sheets When using the user defined formats filter the only formats available for selection are those which have been created by the user The filter A11 shows the entire list of all formats Format In this list you will see all paper formats defined in Infopost Manager which correspond to the current filter The selected format is presented in the Preview The format name corresponds to the description provided by the manufacturer or for user defined formats to the description given by the user the column Description can show more information on this format 255 e Format Mame of DIN BE hoch Y DIN BG quer 4 DIN C4 hoch Y DIN C4 quer W DIN C5 hoch Y DIN CS quer of DIN CE hoch of DIN CB quer Description Size cm 12 50 x 17 60 17 60 12 50 22 90 32 40 32 40 x 22 90 16 20 x 22 90 22 30 16 20 11 40 16 20 16 20 x 11 40 Preview Y DIN C65 hoch of DIN CB 5 quer The formats are represented by two different icons 11 40 22 90 22 30 11 40 Y System formats User defined formats The information in the Tracks column is only available for endless labels and label sheets and refers to the number of labels per page or sheet Format Mame Descripti
55. City mix Land Country Example 3 Heavier mixed field structure This example already becomes confusing Field name selected assignment StraBe mit Hausnummer oder Postfach Street No P O Box PLZ Mix of the three ZIP fields of example 1 ZIP mix Ort Mix of the three city fields of example 1 City mix Land Country Example 4 Highly mixed field structure with very few fields Here the solution is far from optimal Field name selected assignment StraBe mit Hausnummer oder Postfach Street No P O Box Land und PLZ und Ort Country ZIP City mix For both ZIPs and cities one of the three possibilities is used in this example Infopost Manager has no problems dealing with any of these formats However you have to ensure that the correct combinations are used during the field assignment Take another look at the examples and pay special attention to the use of the mixed assignments If the addition mix is used these are combined fields In a ZIP field which is given the assignment ZIP mix it is therefore possible to combine e either street ZIP e or P O Box ZIP e or major recipient ZIP in one address The same applies to the City field which is given the assignment City mix A field may only be given a mixed assignment if the appropriate counter assignments exist An example of this The use of ZIP mix with a field at the same time requires both the assignments Street and P O Box to
56. Contact person Contact e Sautation SS Phones 49 123 4567 89 Tithe Fax Last name Mustermanta Mobde phone Fist name blaw Email infotimusher ag de Position Internet Bank detals Preselbngs for new projects as sender ii IBAN DE 37 700500000000024962 E Payer ghbal presetting Sender BIC BLADE Md Pretax deduchon permitted Bank hlusterbark AG Preseltings for new projects as paper Acc holder a p M EL Payment va global presetting Cash grocadEC BlN AScc no FOOSO0DO AI oh z p Deutsche Past Deutsche Post DHL Customer 2333333333 0401 m Customer identifie 80723 Lard mo Participance mo Ui i If you want to transfer the project data via order management on page 162 to Deutsche Post either the bank details or both fields Customer Card no have to be completely filled 209 Rie 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 Projects On the Projects tab you will find information on all projects stored with your sender data Sub folders where your projects are saved this field is left empty if you saved projects in the root directory Projekte the project status and the creation and last change dates are listed The last column contains the information on the project created in the Project properties on page 42 dialog nager Muster AG 123456789 Customer Projects 5 Save and close 9 Close General Details Proyects Marne Description Status Lieated ori Changed or Time
57. Deutsche Post Response file CA Transfer 2333333533 20140121 095635 400000054 srl ae gt You will receive the response file from Deutsche Post as result of the manual transfer of the exchange file lt contains for example information on whether it has been accepted or there have occurred errors Activating option The data have been successfully transferred and accepted by Deutsche Post skips the input of the response file Deliberately use this option because there can occur irreparable deviations between your local project data and those on Deutsche Post s exchange server lf for instance your exchange file has not been accepted by Deutsche Post s data exchange server for what reasons so ever and thus the project has not been created Infopost Manager assumes that everything is alright and from now on creates only change files which will be rejected from the exchange server due to a missing adequate project Here you can pause the project until you receive the response file e g in order to continue processing other projects Infopost Manager close the project when clicking the Pause button and immediately jumps exactly to this position as soon as the project is reopened Normally the successful transfer of the project data to the data exchange server is acknowledged with a respective message 165 He 5 7 3 5 7 4 Status of executed actions amp The data have been successfully transterred Statue to clipboa
58. E Show automatically corrected addresses E Show Thesaurus corrected addresses Show manually corrected addresses E Show addresses with changed spelling Show incorrect addresses Use this option to show or hide addresses in the Result view on page 103 which are not yet useable although they have been checked The icon for this address type is the red bar Show incorrect addresses with suggestions This option shows all addresses in the Result view on page 103 which could not be automatically corrected by the address check but for which suggestions have been found The icon for this address type is the yellow question exclamation mark Show incorrect addresses with Thesaurus suggestions Use this option to show all addresses in the Result view on page 103 for which Thesaurus entries on page 98 are available which have not been automatically applied because option on page 96 Use for automatic correction was unchecked The icon for this address type is the blue question exclamation mark Show automatically corrected addresses Use this option to show or hide the addresses which comply with the postal regulations after the automatic check in the result view on page 103 The icon for this address type is the green tick 111 Show Thesaurus corrected addresses Use this option to show or hide the addresses which will be automatically or manually corrected by applying a Thesaurus entry on page 98
59. Envelope Label sheet Preview Lether Poshcard Select a symbol to view the preview Create new a Document Template Caneel To create a template mark the desired document type in the selection list and choose the Template option in the Create new area Then design the template and save it as stated using the file type document template ipv in the template directory DocTmpl The options offered for saving templates are mandatory and ensure the document s proper selectability on the template tab see below View selection buttons With these selection buttons you can change the view of the available documents You can use this button to view the document types available as icons This button shows the document types formatted as a list This button changes the view into a document list providing information on the document type the 250 o 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 paper format and the size in centimeters On the Templates tab the icon view is activated as standard As long as you do not create templates of your own you will see the information on paper format and size of the provided templates within the other view types You can either open these templates and then change the paper format on page 256 or create a new template Create new option Document or Template Create new Document Template Templates tab Here you can see all the templates created so far in Infop
60. Format area change 302 He Content Specify the characters to be coded in field Value Here fixed texts can be combined with variable field contents e g for generating a dynamic URL Click the F button and select the desired field to be inserted from the appearing dialog Choose data fields For each address this field may have different values Be careful if you use variable field contents Use a sufficiently large format for the 2D barcode Otherwise it might become invalid when printing critical addresses i e with too large fields If you use the QR code for mobile tagging by coding URLs it is recommended to prefix the protocol normally http The scanning application then usually recognizes that the QR code contains an Internet address and directly opens it in the web browser Afterwards select the Data format for the text to be coded e alphanumerical All values will be coded exactly as you entered them resp as they come from the defined field e g character sequence 255 3 bytes will be stored ASCII coded in three bytes e hexadecimal All values will be read in hexadecimal format internally converted to binary format and respec tively coded in the data matrix code e g character sequence OF 2 bytes will be coded in one byte if desired each character tuple can have a prefix An error will occur if none hexadecimal values are found The 2D barcode impression will become invalid e decimal All values
61. Halle would be extended to 33790 Halle Westf Check names of major recipients When using this option not only correctness and existence of a major recipient ZIP code will be checked but also the company name in the field COMPANY1 will be verified during the address check If the major recipient name stored in the postal routing data is different the address will be marked as incorrect and suggestions will be given if available Automatically correct major recipient names if possible If this option is checked the company name in field COMPANY of a postal correct major recipient address will be compared with the entry in the postal routing data If they are different but there are sufficient similarities the company name coming from the postal routing data will be retrieved Search mode You can define through the search mode settings how precise the address check module shall perform and how many suggestions shall be given Please take into account that the performance may decrease depending on the chosen mode Search mode Search intensity Rating tolerance d low normal high similar dose exact Search intensity Using the slide control you can adjust the search intensity and thus the suggestions and automatic correction to be found as follows 1 low The address check retrieves the first address that is deemed to be automatically corrigible Additional suggestions which might also show a high probability of bein
62. IEKE 2 ead kobe tee hee ee wee ee ee ee 186 7 1 8 Dispatch properties 2 aoaaa aa a 187 tly tem properties w lt s s rindas aa ew abd aw Se oe eR 187 7 1 10 Production properties ooo aa a 187 7 1 11 Payment method oaaae 187 7 1 12 Adressdialog properties a 188 fllo Gross chorp sa creaa paneda REED SERRE AA 188 fell DICO ass dan oo aa 188 rel a NEIRA 189 ELO ETOQUCLNON si 923 idea iris BA 189 7 1 17 Data exchange Deutsche Post 0 eee eee 189 1 2 Address spread by ZIP o o o sos e 189 7 3 Address spread by cities ee 190 1 4 Spread by Provinces s di sew ba ee ra AAA 191 7 5 Spread by Nielsen regions 0 002 eee eee ene 192 7 6 Address spread by routing regions oe e 193 7 7 Address spread by routing zones 2 2 eee eee eevee 194 7 8 Address spread by countries 4 6 64 4 eed bw wee ee aw Bw OS we SG 195 foe Nii NOOO Ur does dt awe wee a ee tae eo eee we ee 196 This menu offers statistical information on your project and on the processed addresses 7 1 Project statistics The project statistics will show you a summary of all results provided by Infopost Manager for the current project and all the information you have provided on the items on production and on the payment method in a compressed format Furthermore Infopost Manager calculates the average costs per item
63. Infopost Manager together with all the information stored in it Before doing this you should save your project e g as a Pack amp Go file on page 38 Rename You can use this function to give a project a new name which must be unique within a folder Anonymization assistant The anonymization assistant helps you with protecting your customers data by giving you the oppor tunity to remove address data of older projects Anonymization level yo Anonymize project Anonymization level 1 9 Level 1 masking of name fields 2 0 Level 2 masking of all fields except ZIP city and country B Level 3 masking of user defined fields X 0 Level 4 delete addresses At the first step please specify the desired anonymization level You can either mask certain address fields or delete the addresses completely If you delete the addresses completely you will no longer be able to open the project You can however still view and print the project statistics on page 184 and posting lists on page 180 provided that they do exist 34 If you select option Level 3 masking of user defined fields you can specify the address fields to be masked in the next step Please select the fields you would like to anonymize Address fields E Ort Stra e E Ort Postfach User defined and additional fields Save selection Always anonymize other user defined fields 35 Other options a Anonymize project Other
64. International Czech Republic International Denmark International International International Germany International International International The spread by countries can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to h Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 7 9 Map Tool This tool illustrates in a map the spread of the used addresses within Germany and for international items in the world by number and by percentage Different color shadings show the spread density The view can be changed between routing region routing zone provinces Nielsen regions and International Choose your preferred region via the menu View or the dropdown menu in the icon bar 196 Ho File View Extras NO a R regions 0 32085 Addresses 15 2699 Addresses 129 2314 Addresses 1928 Addresses 1158 1542 Addresses 772 1157 Addresses 387 771 Addresses 1 386 Addresses 0 Addresses LOGS If you direct the mouse over a region a quick info shows you its number and the number of addresses for that region Icon bar You can directly access the m
65. KOSUS sorea dee ee A ee Oa ee a eo Adressdialog esa ds ee ee ee ee Bee eee Be ee AAs DCUMC ey be boo ee eee ee ee Se be aa A Hoc 4 9 2 Create codes ooa coooa a a 4 9 3 Create export file a a a 5 Preparation menu 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 9 0 9 6 7 Dispatch properties se coibss ocss es less Item properties Dels Li JDMMCNSIONS ssas e ao ebm a AA A RA Se EE O22 APO Pa ARANA Dao ELQUI oca 4 a a aaa as 5 2 4 Remaining item tab e Production properties as eorxoso seras Dola IMOR amp twas a Ae eee rolas sora as rro Postage OPtIMIZANION sor s s ss ee we ER aaa YS ERE Oe Payment method properties a a oads SAVIN et keh ene ee eRe ER we he ERE Eee Ould Prepay sca Gee eee AAA Paral POSUDE a 42a a kaa ee ee ee ee ee AAA Order management ise ee dae the oe RRR EERE Eee Knee ee Be 5 7 1 Data exchange via Webservice 2 e 5 7 2 Manual data exchange via file transfer 5 7 3 Cancel order co os reses oe bo to ee OE EE Ree we SE Oe 54A Reguest status ssr ss ewe we AE ERR EES Me we Ee Re Se 5 7 5 Open in AM portal lt 2 e 488 ee e445 64 eee R Ew REE EKER HES 6 Results menu 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 Lay Bundle arrasan e ee ae rra ARANA Tray target Bundle target list keg e625 44 Fo RBH OEA Palet 2 44654 nadere et ee bee eshte taar bhad ORRE Pallet target at no 544 6664 4e Bee ER oe wee EEE E
66. Ma Contact paoa Cia M arara ae ia hi AZ jaj v AZo iiaj TELE GS 0 43444248 22043 TT EEEEEEE sn Li Cis rima Fields in the source file which are not postally relevant e g Dept or name of household pet but which you would nevertheless like to use in subsequent printing can also be imported without assignment Important Please note the information on field assignment on page 244 There you will find an explanation of the possibilities offered by correct assignment and the consequences thereof le You should remember those postally irrelevant fields nevertheless They might become important during the duplicate search when you have to decide whether or not two addresses which differ in a manner otherwise not evident are duplicates As an alternative to this structural analysis Infopost Manager proposes the use of a suitable template on page 60 if there is one Templates should always be used if you regularly use files with the same format and field structure If you create a template for ASCII files settings which were made in the text file wizard when importing ASCII files are also stored here Crashed or 05 12 2005 Charged on Progeel Beipielrorlage zur Date Die Datei regional tat i 05 12 2006 Diesmo Md aire Show suitable templabes only Infopost Manager will recognize when you import an address file another time You will be given the opportunity to reuse the same field ass
67. Pallet list 174 Pallet target list 176 Pallets 151 Panel print Lane print 263 Paper source tab 267 Paper tab 254 Partial postings 158 Payment method properties 156 PDF export 179 Plugins 385 Position frame toolbar 279 Position frame align 272 Positioning aids 276 Postage 146 Postage optimization 154 Postal routing data tab 97 Posting lists 180 Premiumadress tab 291 Preparation menu 140 pretax deduction permitted 156 Preview and Print 414 Print 293 Print order 263 Print Preview 416 Print Mail Merge 261 Processing in Word 316 Production and posting documents 182 Production guideline 319 Production properties 146 426 Professional 337 Project 15 Project explorer 28 Project menu 15 Project statistics 184 Project tab 25 Projects tab 205 Properties 42 Quick Clicks 12 13 Recent projects 13 Regular search tab 116 remaining items 154 Remaining items 322 Reopen 27 Report 126 Report of address check 110 Request order 18 Reset Password 214 Responseplus assistant 211 Responseplus franking mark tab 307 Responseplus tab 305 Result area 14 Results menu 169 Robinson check 127 Routing district optimization Acceptance office 225 Routing label editor 422 Routing labels 177 Salutation check 83 Save Save as 40 Search mode tab 115 Selection button for all duplicate groups 124 Sender Mailer 208 SEPA validation 208 Settings 311 Settings in Infopost Manager 314 Settings tab 94 Show an
68. Please consider this for future use of the exported data Customer data can be exported into the following formats e Access e Excel e dBase e XML e fixed text e variable text 202 8 1 2 ma ee d a Deutsche Post AG Infopost Manager Data Examples 4 4 Examples durchsuchen Lirganimeren Neuer Ordnar de Deutset Mame de Deuts di Deuts p Diala de Diales de Infop d Det Bo d D JD io Adressen Labelformat accdb Adressen mit Passwortels Ea Adressen ES International ss TH MationaLdbf Regional txt Ciateinarne Diateibyp All files Codes prep dbi ads ado mdb sccdb mb tot zip Ordrer ausblenden Abbrechen Close The customer index is closed using this menu item Edit You can use the New button respectively menu item to create a new customer in your customer index A lot of information for each customer can be managed Via Edit or double clicking a customer a dialog window pops up Here you can manage the current customer s projects and make changes to the data You can use the Customer menu to save any changes you have made and to close the Edit dialog window You can use the Projects menu to manage the projects which have been created for the current customer You can open and rename existing projects and view their properties In the same way you can create new projects or delete existing ones here Use the Delete to irrecoverably remove a custom
69. Production includes putting the printed and packed items in trays or bundles and where appropriate combining the trays on pallets The settings made here will have an impact on potential production rebates 146 The Production guideline on page 319 explains in detail how to deal with trays and pallets You can provide this guideline to the production staff in order to help them process the items of your projects Data Modules International optimization and Vario l If the International optimization module is activated you will be able define the sorting and a deviant production type for international items on a new tab By activating the Vario module you can specify the variants production properties and the production method single vs multi flow on an additional new tab Details can be found in chapters International optimization on page 344 and Vario on page 367 5 3 1 Infopost Set the production properties of the current Infopost project on the different tabs 5 3 1 1 General The items of your mailshot campaign must be placed into trays or combined in bundles sorted by ZIPs Here you can provide the following further information on this Tray Bundle production Production method lt only with Wario Single flaw method Mult flow method with pallet consolidation Variant after variant pallet spanning Pallet after pallet variant spanning Hybrid type simultaneously producible pallets Minimize
70. Professional Cierra Hdmi ssp Dero Mailings Demo Mailings le Project name e Propect directory Details Target Ci lisen Publ Documents Pepet has reos bebe cruel Project tika gg Por prociasira Project has not been changed Project ve opened for processing Project mas optemined with AGE 2014 07 05 2014 11 16 07 07 05 2014 11 16 15 07 06 2014 11 16 39 5033493561 03344351 503344358 Project opened Biin 07 05 2014 11 16 43 T 2033443561 Project saved Bitar Propo most direcion yz 07 05 2044 14 16 55 T 503344355 1 Project saved bes Project root carey a E E me Projectroot directory Project vease opened he procesa Project has mol been changed Project vs opened lor pe lt Pegpsct root directory gt Project root directory gt Papert rool dreri y gt You can specify the period of time you would like to observe Furthermore you can export the log into a file or the clipboard 8 8 Acceptance offices You can use this dialog window to view a list of all acceptance offices within your selected routing region where you can post you mailshot Please enter the first digits of your ZIP to search for an acceptance office in your area In the column Posting column the maximum number of items which can be posted at this acceptance office is shown The acceptance offices highlighted in bold accept an unlimited volume of items Ye Acceptance offices Show acceptance offices of the following routing regi
71. Thus the entry for a contact person will be for example Herrn Peter M ller whereas the salutation address naturally still reads Sehr geehrter Herr Muller The field settings are only valid when no alternative Attn has been given in the address manage ment For private addresses a entry in the field Attn replaces the fields last name and first name First name and last name There are three possibilities for issuing first name and last name together in one field if you click on Change settings yy Format of field First name last l Format of field First name last name First name prefix last name C Last name first name prefix 5 Last name first name prefix Name prefix 402 Letter salutation With the field Letter salutation you can specify individually what this line should look like in your document To do this you can choose from the following options Field properties of Letter salutation So Field properties of Letter salutation Automatic creation Prefix Add an r to form the masculine Show fields in letter salutation Salutation Title only with Prof and Dr E First name Mame pretis 4 Last name Name suffix Fino letter salutation fields are available Defaut Sehr geehrte Damen und Herren Complete letter salutation with Suki Examples Sehr geehrte Frau Professor von Schneider Sehr geehrter Her
72. Thus you can easily make sure that you are always using the latest Infopost Manager version and you save the time for regularly exploring the Internet for new updates For both options you can specify the time frame between checks O starts checks at every program launch 1 every day 7 once a week etc Using the Check now buttons you can immediately and manually start the respective check independent on the settings Any manual check can be performed at any time via item nternet from the Help menu Ee 229 Internet settings With the button Settings you can specify how your computer is connected to the Internet Connection settings Configure proxies to access the Internet 5 No proxy 5 Auto detect proxy settings for this network 5 Use proxy settings of Internet Explorer Manual proxy configuration HTTP proxy proxy Use same proxy server for HTTPS HTTPS proxy proxyssl agag No proxy for Example localhost https deutschepost def Authentication 5 Proxy auto config URL http proxy fmpad dat Specify whether Infopost Manager should use proxy servers to connect to the Internet In many cases the option Auto detect proxy settings for this network will work well Select No proxy to explicitly deactivate usage of proxy servers With option Auto detect proxy settings for this network Infopost Manager will query the network you are connected to for proxy servers to be used Usually the network will
73. Yes Wark incomedt addresses as write to No Keep Upper case No Unify spelling for StraBe No Exdude ignored addresses from check Yes Automatic ignorance of incorrect address types Yes Always append city name with official supplement No Check names of major recipients No Search intensity normal Rating tolerance close Consult Thesaurus library Yes Always automatically apply Thesaurus suggestion Yes Preview You can use this button to launch the print preview of the protocol You will find more information on the additional options in the Print Preview on page 416 chapter Default By clicking the Default button you can always reset the settings to application default 4 6 Duplicate search This Infopost Manager function searches the current address file for multiple existing addresses which unnecessarily increase costs and make a bad impression on the recipient Du T search f Do pou want to start the duplicate search Volume 29 689 Addresses in 50 routing regions Search mode Regular search Match accuracy medium Search intensity Level 5 high slower As soon as you have run the duplicate search once the respective menu item will get a submenu where you can directly access the report This can be also done at any time via the Quick Clicks on page 13 of the overview item duplicate search If you start the duplicate search once again e g due to not having been able to process all results from a previous r
74. able to search orders on Deutsche Post s exchange server which might be created by various customers outside Infopost Manager 3 3 1 Filter and find Filter tab First define the filter criteria in the appearing dialog Request order 19 Ee tio Projects Orders View Options a Fiter Find Pesiod next 32 days from 17 24 ba 24 01 2014 Cusbomes number EXP Sender Mailer Paper DescoptioreLabel no orders Period In this area you can define the period absolute i e from to or relative i e within the next x days in which the orders to be shown will be posted Furthermore you can filter for orders changed within a specific period The exchange server only hosts orders which lie maximal 36 days ahead Customer number Here you can specify one or more Post customer numbers which are normally nominated by the customer on order to reduce the number of orders to be shown if applicable Clicking the button calls the customer index on page 201 where you can comfortably select an address whose customer number will be taken into the respective field Your customer number as data producer which you specify in the application options on page 232 is independent and dissociated from the customer numbers defined here Please note that at least one of the four customer number fields is correctly filled Additional Enter here texts or text fragments using joker signs
75. additional extra items and a low minimum number of items per bundle is profitable making it feasible to send as many items as possible as unwrapped items Infopost Manager calculates how you can use extra items in order to send as many items as possible as unwrapped items Franking Infopost items can be franked by a variety of types In the right part of the window you will see the current preview of the various franking types Dimensions Type Franking Benang tem Franking type Franking mark Preview O Franking mark ZL D Machine franking O FRANEIT IT franking Canceling by sender O Plusbrief O Frankierservice O Frankierservice Pz The total postage will be invoiced on mailing Extra services Premiumadress C GoGreen Product Format Postage Canes Brief explanatory texts below the Preview explain each franking type further information on the postal regulations can be found in the product brochures which can be read via the Help Brochures on page 242 menu item or from a Deutsche Post AG Direct Marketing Center or by contacting the Hotline Phone 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part thereof from a German landline or a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network If you have selected franking mark ZL you can define the start number to be used for beginning the enumeration of the vari
76. addresses Ti 0 04 5 Addresses with changed spelling 130 0 42 Addresses with incorrect address hy pes o 0 00 5 Postalhy incorrect addresses 1 360 448 International addresses 1 983 6 47 Total 30 818 100 00 112 Show complete address If this option is activated you will see all address types which may be available in a data record regardless of which is selected to be written to Released address types are visually emphasized by showing the unmarked address types in italics a Address No 2 Record 174 Autom corrected Aufzug und Maschinenfabrik A Schmersal Nollenhammerweg 10 42349 Wuppertal Emor No such street name existing for this ZIP Show Company2 field This option integrates the Company2 field into the address block in the report Thus more information on each data record is listed E Address No 119 Record 5608 Postally incorrect Dersen amp Stapper oHG Maltsenckteinwerk Krefeld Einsteinstr 2 27221 Morum Error City name and Streets ZIP differ Show original address You can use this option to integrate the original version of all automatically or manually changed addresses into the report In this way you can identify and compare the changes which have been made Address No 119 Record 5608 Corrected Comection Original Dersen 4 Stapper oHG Dersen 4 Stapper oHG Kalksandisteinwerk Krefeld Kalksandsteimwerk Krefeld Einsteinstr 2 27321 Emtinghausen Einsteinstr 2 27321 Mo
77. addresses distributed all over Germany consists of 3 500 items Since the regulations of Deutsche Post AG for Infopost however require at least 4 000 items you would have to pay the letter mail charge of EUR 0 55 i e a total charge of EUR 1 925 If however you add 500 virtual extra items you will pay the reduced charge for Infopost of 4 000 x EUR 0 25 EUR 1 000 Postage without discounts FeFe Podge any Extra ber CHE Ramaning TT Traa pa dr de ad i ARO A EA pbt LATA AA E Ea pnl es e A Discount Within bundle resp tray production and pallet production Deutsche Post grants production rebates for Infopost items depending on the preliminary processing in production The following applies to such production rebates If you only use Germany trays and Germany pallets you may simplify the production but at the same time will lose the possibility of a discount which will only be granted if routing region resp ZIP trays and routing zone resp routing region pallets are produced Infopost Manager s default settings ensures that the production rebates are used to the best In menu item Preparation Production properties you can regulate the number of trays which will have to be 188 7 1 15 7 1 16 7 1 17 fo produced Depending on theses settings you may simplify production but will get less discounts or you may receive higher discounts but will also have to deal with a higher pro
78. addresses which have been ignored by duplicate search on page 114 or by address check on page 91 you will be informed Do not write to Using this command all selected addresses get the status Do not write to and thus are excluded from posting This status can be undone either per address by clicking on its number or via the menu command Write to on the current page for all currently filtered addresses Delete Using this command you delete all addresses currently selected Use this menu item carefully because you will possibly remove a large number of addresses irrecoverably from your project Multi Change The Multi Change function is available for both filtered and selected addresses Once chosen a dialog opens where you can define the field to be changed as well as the common field content Multi Change Fields 5 Fized value Value from field atiors ddress fields Titles Address fielde Last names Choose Fixed value to assign the same fixed value to all entries Using option Value from field you can write dynamically generated values into the selected field This options allows you to copy a column With the aid of a combination field on page 409 you may also create a column whose entries are dynamically composed of the values of other fields Module Vario By using the Vario module you will be able to quickly and comfortably assign consistent variants Details can be found in chapter Vario on
79. amp Go file can be released for editing using this menu item Protect Your projects will automatically be bound to your installation of Infopost Manager Older projects may however not be protected that way This menu item allow you to protect those projects now 37 Rie o When creating a Pack amp Go on the current page file you will be able to remove the protection This will allow for the receiver of your Pack amp Go to use the contained project within his installation of Infopost Manager Create Pack amp Go This important convenient function allows the exchange of entire projects between two Infopost Manager users Additionally archiving closed finished projects in compressed form is possible You may for example create a Pack amp Go file from an active project and send it by e mail to a lettershop which also uses Infopost Manager The lettershop can use all your settings as well as the corresponding mail merge document it can decompress the project and process it directly An assistant will help you to create the Pack amp Go file Pack amp Go assistent step 1 of 3 Protection Password ATT TT Repetition AAA TT 5 Remove project protection Removing the project protection allows for opening the project on other installations E Locally lock project for further processing Target File C Users Public Documents Demo Professional ipg Security You can protect your Pack
80. be used with two other fields or alternatively the combined assignment of Street No P O Box In the second case you have assigned two mixed fields 245 The assignment which postally relevant information was stored e g the city in which field or in which column of your file must be unambiguously defined prior to importing it If a field name is not identical to the names used in Infopost Manager the assignment must be checked and corrected where necessary Not only the field names are taken into account during the analysis but also the field contents Therefore the majority of Infopost Manager s proposed assignments are correct and only need to be confirmed You can also import postally irrelevant fields e g birthday or practiced sport unassigned from your file These may be needed for subsequent mail merge printing e g last year you bought a boat engine for your yacht Polaris We would be happy to and should be imported for this purpose The content of these fields may also be important for the decision which of two addresses recognized as duplicates may be chosen if there are not too many differences in other fields Each postally relevant field has to contain the appropriate assignment You can see the list of all possible assignments if you click on the arrow icon of each field x i i FT ld gal 5 Cancel Pema Amad Feii Load mpk Grepa a Doriyar Dipen Frmsj lt Fral v halle x Pateh PL jaj v AZo
81. brackets shows you which type was chosen on tab franking on page 145 If you prefer a different franking type for your international items check option Set individually and choose the desired type from the dropdown menu Choosing different franking types for national and international items is e g necessary for the franking mark ZL because this franking type is not permitted for international items Extra items for Kreativ In the area below you can specify the maximal number of extra items for the dispatch type Kreativ Due to the fact that Kreativ items can only be sent as Infopost you specify with this value whether you want to send the items only if they are handled as Infopost value 0 or if you are willing to pay extra items if appropriate 343 ls If the total quantity of Kreativ items per country incl extra items does not reach the minimum quantity z required for Infopost all items are sorted out by the optimization and are then assigned to the category not postable items Wrapping weight Here you can specify the wrapping weight of international items if you produce national items without wrapping 15 2 2 2 Production properties As soon as you have chosen option International together with National if applicable in the dispatch properties on the following page the window production properties gets another tab International Production prope les General SES sorting Sort by Country 1
82. button you can change the assignment 44 Details tab Properties of Demo Professi General Order management Transfer order data to Deutsche Post Details For machine franking FRANKIT Machine identitter 123456 FRANKIT identifier 1254567030 J Other Default document Examples Fax Antwvort seitig ipd Word document unassigned Order management If you want resp have to electronically announce your project to Deutsche Post e g due to franking mark ZL please note that this can be only done via order management on page 162 Transfer order data to Deutsche Post Activate this option if you want to announce your project via data transfer to Deutsche Post s data exchange server Whether or not and if yes how the data will be exchanged is defined in the options on page 231 of the Extras menu If option Transfer order data to Deutsche Post is not activated the data transfer will not take place neither automatically nor manually After successfully transferring a project to Deutsche Post AG you can use the button Details to go to the Data exchange on the next page dialog where you can get an overview as well as details about the transferred items For machine franking FRANKIT The dropdown menu shows all currently available franking machine or FRANKIT identifiers which you can use for machine franking your items The number of the machine selected here is automatically filled into the post
83. by choosing a selection criterion in the drop down menu With the button settings you can then specify bundles resp pallets for your printout You will also be able to see how many items each selection contains Details about the possibilities can be found here on page 419 262 In the overview of the window Print you can then see how many items will be printed overall Options tab General Options Extended Additional pages Paper source Options Reverse print order Margins O Field descriptor Options Reverse print order If this option has been activated the addresses with high ZIPs are printed first within the batch This is especially useful if the documents printed first are at the bottom of the printer output tray and would hence have to be turned around individually were they to be printed in their normal order Margins This option is useful for instance when test printing a label on a white sheet it helps you to verify the selected margin areas of the sheet on which you want to print later on Field descriptor Activate this check box if you would like to print the description of the fields on page 275 instead of their contents Label contours only with paper formats label sheet and endless label This option is useful for instance when test printing a label on a white sheet it helps you to verify the selected dimensions of the labels prior to printing on label sheets Optimize sequence fo
84. by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to h Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 7 5 Spread by Nielsen regions This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses grouped by Nielsen regions Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check You see the number of addresses belonging to a specific Nielsen regions 192 ie Fa Address spread by Nielsen regic A Preview ca Print Print options Esport Cloze 24178 Unused 24 257 el Addresses el 6206 3141 88 170 0 138 03 IPs belonging to more than one Nielsen region 12 unknown 0 The spread by Nielsen regions can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 7 6 Address spread by routing regions This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses
85. can position them correctly within the document Any frames that might be out of range are listed one upon the other in the left hand upper corner of the document Search address With this menu item you can search for a specific address in your address file and display it e g in the address block of your mail merge document The entry found is selected via double clicking it or via pressing the RETURN key The find procedure will be closed afterwards and the entry will be displayed in the mail merge document Pressing the F3 function key will continue the search starting from the current entry by using the same search text Find Options C In lines Consider case 5 In all columns E Only search in complete fields In column Firmal ad Find In lines If this option is activated searching addresses is performed line by line i e all fields of a complete address will be scanned before continuing the search with the subsequent address If you want to explore the whole database this setting would be the optimal choice 2 3 11 2 12 In all columns With this option you specify that the database will be scanned column by column Initially the first fields of all addresses will be checked afterwards the second field then the third and so forth This search methodology is by far the slowest because all addresses have to be loaded into memory for several times On the other hand results are quickly found as
86. click Yes The same holds for the export into separate files Enter a unique name on tab General of the dialog window Properties if desired you can provide other information on this template in the info field Created on 24 01 2014 13 01 35 Changed on 24 01 2014 13 01 35 On the Content tab you will see once again which fields will be exported in which order using this template File settings File type CSW file csv Field definitions Fields 13 Field struct 1 2 3 4 A B Fi E 3 O 1 l l Firmal Firmaz Abteilung ZUSTADA ZUSTPLZ ZUSTORT LAND BRIEFANRED UHAENDEN Eunden Mr SOKATEG Click OK to save the template 332 Ee Load template You can load a template at any step of the export wizard Click the Load template button and all template settings will be applied In the Select template window all templates saved so far are shown Choose a template and click OK Hame About Created on Changed omn Comert mpat shuctuness aderen ke m aa lt impol studiues maboral cbt lt mponr structures mibennatiorial ale i ax m Expat db 24 01 2014 24 01 2014 Field detirmtians File settings Cate Diese Vorlage enthalt die F Field definitions File setting Standard Excel 3 24 01 2014 24 0 204 Field definitions File settings Cate By using the lt import structure gt template the addresses are exported with the field structure of the import file as long a
87. column contains the assignment of the respective field which was automatically recognized by the field content analysis of the source file The width of the table columns can be changed by clicking and dragging By a single click on the column name an arrow is inserted showing whether a column is sorted in ascending or descending order a further click undoes this sorting sequence This field type assignment can be printed and exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview and Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 60 e Template If address files with the same structure are frequently used it is possible to create an assignment template for importing them When using such templates the number of fields and the file format should always be identical This pattern always occurs when you frequently import addresses from a specific application e g an address CD via a standardized export procedure for editing with Infopost Manager It is however possible to use templates whose structure does not match the format of the address file completely If you choose to load such a template Infopost Manager will assign the fields according to the template as far as possible This allows you for example to load address files whose structure has with respect to the template been extended by additional fields If you load such a template please check the field structure Infopost Ma
88. controlling purposes during production as well as for retrieving items on pallets for dedicated tray or bundle targets on page 171 It shows the tray respectively bundle data for targets in a compressed format Pres Pair Prirt options Export 4 Posting 05 02 14 1 e le W Close Trap large Quantity Pallet Pallet tanget P M Type Label Het kg a ame Adchesses No Mis S IF j 1 IP 1 3 AR 1 4HAR 1 SARA 1 ERR 1 7AA 1 BARA 1 SFA 1 10 AR 1 1 7 y 1 1 y 1 1 Tare 7 ane Gemary Germany Gemary Gennary Genmary Germany Gennary Gemary Gemarry Germany Gemary Gemary 15 AR Gennary 16 AR E Gernary 17 RA i 1 Gernary 18 AR i l J 202 2 Gemary 13 AR 10 Fa 2 Gemary a al Fa 11 RA 12 HA 13 RA 14 RA Eb Ls e PCI e Eb Cr de CJ Cy 41 enines The above table shows e g for routing region 22 target no 3 that 12 trays with total 2119 items are available The item number can e g counterchecked with your address management tool You can also use this table to retrieve items e g of a dedicated routing region from the pallets based on the pallet numbers Underneath the table the totals of the columns net gross trays and items can be found once again In the lower status bar you can read the total number of tray bundle targets which was calculated during the optimization based on the given information on the various preparation menu items 173 at entries If you defined P
89. different duplicate group entries 121 A OF X Cancel Pausa T View e Group overviews 188 sunlas r a Address No 30577 2 Address No 30576 Firma2 i cio Elecbon Service Arma Strabe P O Box 92 06 P O Box 93 98 Hausnummer Postfach PLZ Stra e PLZ Postfach PLZ Grofiempfanger Ort Strabe Boston MA 02205 9206 Ort Postfach Ort GroGbempfanger Land Anrede Trbel omame Duplicate group 1 of 73 Do mot write to 1 address An envelope over an address means that this address should be written to By single clicking the envelope you can change the duplicate status to not released for writing to ger Duplicate search Demo Prol v OF 3 Cancel Ii Pausa View e Group overview GOO aulas elr A Address Mo 28750 Frmal Tumaryk Firma2 Damen Oberbedeidung Firma strabe Hohweg Hausnummer a Postfach PLZ Stra e PLZ Postfach PLZ Grofiempf nger Ort Strabe Salauf Ort Postfach Ort GroGemofanger Land Anrede Frau Tibe Doris wWilere Duplicate group 10 of 73 Do not write to 1 address 122 Group overview al ee praia search Demo Protessec View Group overview aaa a os lT Group Commo Common city EE Marker G dy Match accuracy Assada BOSTON MA 02205 9206 we 50 Wyeth Me COKILDARE 61 Taylor amp Fr REDHILL SURREY RHI 105 EE Poydrelog LONDON 5SW3 30L 66 Oxford Uni LONDON ECW 396 B25 OPC Led LONDON ECA SEX 525 Amer
90. eg ee he a Sow SO BEE Ee ESE EEE EO ES 276 11 3 4 Visualize areas lt lt kw ee bo we HEROS Sew we SLOG ews 276 11 3 5 Visualize truncated text a a a 277 11 3 6 Refresh view e e amp SoS we ASA A 277 IL ToO 25 6 564 es Fe wee BeOS Oe RS Ree eS 278 ILA DTe sara AAA AAA AA 279 11 4 1 Address block zs ss aaa cauad anaa IDA AR e 280 MAD LED assi eaea ee oR ERE a a OE HEE ESS 282 ILAS Rotatedulext srera 86464625 2S a e a e a a 286 1144 Franking mark suyo tp dress sra rs A 288 11 4 5 Premiumadress suicide AA EEE 289 1146 GOGREEN z iaa eee ou be a A A A A 294 LAS MODE on ee RS ee EE RO oe AAA 295 IAS Pee eae a eee Bee ee A ee ee ee oe oe AO 297 248 Infopost Manager s special word processor for direct marketing provides you with a wide range of LAO iene 4 4 a 30 e sal a A Aa 298 AAA os AE Se ee Ew 301 TLALI D Darcode oss be ea ead dass ar AAA AAA 302 11 4 12 New page behind current page 0 2 0 0 eee ee 304 11 4 13 New page before current page ooo e e a e a 304 11 4 14 Responsepl s gt e users sosa kerasa oe Ee 304 11 4 15 Responseplus franking mark oaoa a e 307 LAO Payment DINE s os sar rr 307 IONES 424 e Sor oe A A oe ae ee we ee 308 11 5 1 Address management 308 11 5 2 Machine readable fonts 0 0 0 ee 308 LS op llek oe ett bbe soso nerga 309 LESA Text llene check wes tasks ds ma A Ee Ee 312 LLO Hot Keys nc escasas re AA ee ws 313 possibilities for designing yo
91. either be configured by a system administrator or not at all If you are not sure use this option Option Use proxy settings of Internet Explorer will let Infopost Manager behave exactly like Internet Explorer Use this option if you know that Internet Explorer is configured correctly on your system With Manual proxy configuration you can explicitly define proxy servers for the protocols HTTP and HTTPS Activate option Use same proxy server for HTTPS if you would like to use the same proxy for both HTTP and HTTPS In the text area No proxy for you can define exceptions For all addresses specified there no proxy will be used You can define exception with or without protocol e g http If you omit the protocol the exception applies to all protocols An asterisk represents an arbitrary number of characters Using the button Authentication you may also specify and check user name and password Option Proxy auto config URL works similar to Auto detect proxy settings for this network Use this option of your system administrator gave you such a URL If you have chosen option Confirm dial up a window appears prior to starting the checks With it you always have the opportunity to manually connect to the Internet if appropriate 230 8 11 7 tio The button Check connectivity allows for testing the communication of Infopost Manager with the Internet and especially with the relevant services of Deutsche Post If
92. holder BIN Ace mo DOSD0Dbo Deutsche Past Customer 3 Card no 233393339335 Min Contact 2299 Phone 49 123 4567 89 Fax Mobde phone E mail info imuster ag de Internet Preselings for new projects as sender E Payer global presetiing Sender Pretax deduchon permithed Presethings for new projects as paper SB Payment via global peesetting Cash gnocand EC Deutsche Post DHL mere Customer idertifie 80123 Participance mo 01 204 Ee i If you want to transfer the project data via data exchange on page 162 to Deutsche Post either the bank details or both fields Customer Card no have to be completely filled Both areas Presettings for new projects as sender and Presettings for new projects as payer are quite useful In the first area you define for new projects for a specific customer who will be the payer if he is sender Thus you may overrule the global settings on page 224 per customer In the second area you define how the customer intends to pay if he is payer You can also choose a payment type other as defined in the application s global settings on page 224 The check box Pretax deduction permitted is from major significance By activating it you determine for your customer being sender that the postage optimization shall run with pretax resp after tax values Ask your customer whether or not he is pretax deduction permitted Typically this privilege belongs to al
93. improved ZIP search improved handling international items e g support Vario new Map Tool new bundle tray pallet labels Reference sample Import via ADO interface only with module Professional Export Premiumadress data matrix code additional coding methods for Adressdialog additional languages for wizard Spanish Polish Czech minor optimizations as well as bug fixes What was new in version 6 2 1 from 20 02 2006 e minor optimizations e some bug fixes What was new in version 6 2 from 16 12 2005 e Support tables of fees for 2005 and 2006 e Support new products Infocard Grof3 Infocard Kreativ Premiumadress Stampit 3 0 Business Stampit 2 0 Home Werbesendung only with module Vario Relocation database file of the deceased of Deutsche Post Adress GmbH extended filtering capabilities in address management improved generation of salutation additional spreads by cities and routing zones new posting lists various detail improvements several bug fixes What was new in version 6 1 from 15 06 2005 e Module Professional e Module International Optimization 394 e Module Vario e Export Multi Export of a field new export format XML e Mail merge Support MS Word Set up and summary sheets e Integration Stampit Home e klickServer interface e Connection to Adressdialog e various improvements What was new in version 6 0 2 from 04 02 2005 e Integration Stampit 2 0 B
94. itor 06 02 14 Bauer Kinch GmbH 1 2 Type i 226 07 02 14 Muster AG 2 2 682 RI i 37 8 101 3 E 43 2 047 RZ 1 i 1 126 2 20 1 208 323 42 1 790 RZ 25 7 69 4 330 344 15 534 RZ a erines If you have defined job splittings on page 373 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various job lists via the arrow buttons See AAA i 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 1 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 1 06 02 14 Muster AG 271 let riant 06 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 2 i iant A 2 a ets AG 2 2 1 iant A 2 Lar 1 Please refer to the pallet list on page 174 paragraph to get further information about the table fields Pallet target list With the Job splitting module specific pallet target lists are available 380 15 4 2 5 Label Hea kg Gross kgl 3 310 r A bee 31 130 171 212 37 B3 245 E 77 2 287 If you have defined job splittings on page 373 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various job lists via the arrow buttons 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 1 H 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 1 ll
95. keep images in memory 295 Source Use the option Statical to print an image on all documents The option Dynamical file name from field allows you to use images which are dynamically chosen by field contents Statical Here you will see the original dimensions of the imported file and the file name of the imported image If you want to undo changes made to the image you can use the Reset button This button will restore the graphic to its original dimensions Dynamical file name from field Here you can specify the fields Infopost Manager shall use to dynamically load an image for each document In order to do this you can choose on which fields the path and file name of the image shall depend Furthermore you can determine how an image will be positioned that does not match the dimensions of the graphic frame Images that are bigger than the graphic frame will be resized to fit The aspect ratio will be maintained in the process Smaller images will be left unchanged Dynamical images are of great use to peronalize your mail merge document You can for example put it into regional or gender specific shape Options You can choose how many images Infopost Manager shall keep in its working memory in order to increase performance during further editing of your mail merge document 296 11 48 Frame Width 4 0 Keep aspect ratio Position Left Keep pitch to left margin top margin E right margin E bottom mar
96. management via the Close menu item All changes and amendments are now available in the project 4 3 2 Edit Using the various commands in this menu you amend or modify the addresses Edit In addition to the detailed address data all fields of the selected address are available for being viewed and edited on three tabs General tab Here the address details of the respective companies or individuals can be changed or added 67 e In doing so you can provide information on the street address P O Box address and the major recipient address Convenient search for ZIPs city and street names When editing an address and when pasting and copying see below you have convenient searching tools at your disposal for ZIPs city and street names If you would like to look for a piece of information or save yourself the trouble of typing in long fields simply click on the icon located to the right next to the street P O Box or major recipient address You will find details of this in the Z P Search on page 218 chapter General Other fields Company A Company 1 Kaiser Nachfolger GmbH amp Co KG Company 2 Metallgiebere Maschinenbau Company 3 Dept Customer no Addrezz Street No Suppl Fathauestr 20095 ZIP City Hamburg P O box ZIP City Major recipient AP city E Ignore address me Here the changed data will be checked for postal correctness If not suggestions are made f
97. may make your project easier to follow Deactivating a field will apply to all addresses in the file at the same time Rie Firmas x 247 11 Mail merge IPM Contents LA DOCUM s s a sas ARA RARA A AN 249 Vicia NOW casos sra a he eR eee RE oe eS 250 Lite OPM on ae cand oe eeu ae cas eeeaeaagasecaaehs Be 4 a 251 Tios OOD sapre ka a AAA AAA AA 251 TETAS un bbe ee eee see GSA EHR oo REE 251 Loe EEE ee Pe eS ee 252 TiO Ov II 252 Mil Edit Onna s yerkak ascos sarro sa 202 ILLS Backeround reuso AA AAA ARA 252 111 9 Properties lt a sas neo he ba aD eee Bee Be he oa Oe eh a 253 CA RAEE 261 11 1 11 Print current address 267 11 1 12Save as PDF document 267 11 1 13 Print reference sample a 268 Pic Eibar os eRe Oe ea eee Ree Ee IEA AAA A 268 Le Undo AAA 268 Toe OA ee om oH oe ew ee oe oe Pe ee ee ee ee ee 268 LAS OCD Bae abe be CRE SEE aE EEA ESD BREE OEE BREA EAE SS 269 ILLAS a a a a ee ee RANA 269 LF OIG usaras tesoro ASADA ee ee 269 11 20 Properties gt aer oe oe PAGER GE eee oe RAE 269 bie De 23a es Bae eS ERE REA SEHR Oe EERE Ee oe ee Die Wee ATADO Pe we eo ES Ee 272 T129 Alin Biase Ga ea ka AAA eee 272 11 2 10 Reposition out of range frames oa a a 273 11 2 11 Search address a 273 Lie GOO a2 ae ee ae eee oe heehee ee AA 274 lides VIC E sere sas oo owe a ew eee we A A ee Ge ee 275 11 3 1 Object inspector 46446 24446 4 4 AR 275 11 3 2 Show field descriptor a 275 EA Mares oe
98. on or which have already been created Silao Addresses Freparat New Infopozst DHL Infopost Nem from project b Request order Open Reopen Project explorer Close Save Strg 5 Save az Create Pack amp Go Import Pack amp Ebo Data backup Properties Quit Alt F4 15 3 1 New Infopost Here you can see the folder structure with which your projects are managed Working with this project explorer is easy On the left you see the folder tree including the sub folders if available On the right you see saved projects You can start a new project by entering a project name on the following page and saving it Project Edit View O O it i Grade Hist S E Projects Mame a Description Customer 5 Demo Mailings Da Demo DHL Infop Demo DAL Infopost Muste AG Musterh 18 08 2014 120 y Promotion Sa Demo Internabonal Demo Intemational Muster AG Musterh Da Demo Professional Demo Professional Muster AG Musterh Sa Demo Standard Demo Standard Muster AG Musterh Eg Demo Yano Demo Varia Muster Ala Musterh 5 IPM projecte Project mame In lettershop mode on page 223 you will specify before actually generating the project for which customer it should be processed 16 o Cu je Comparyl Company2 Compan Street le Z la City street l Salutation Title F 1234 Muster AG Musterst
99. optimization for new projects IP of acceptance office 52064 Routing district optimization has been activated for the routing district with IP sequence 52001 52155 Using the Retrieve dispatch properties to new projects option you can specify dispatch properties for new projects You can use the button Settings to enter the selection menu on page 140 You can use the option Retrieve payment method to new projects to choose how your items are to be invoiced by Deutsche Post AG for all future projects You can use the button Settings to enter the selection menu in which you can activate the desired payment method on page 156 225 8 11 4 Production You can enter on the tab Production the franking machines Sender franking machine and FRANKIT at your disposal fou can specify your franking machines here These are shown for selection in the project properties and can be printed onto the posting lists Machine identifier FRANKIT identifier Ooo These will then appear as selection menu in the Project properties on page 42 their numbers are automatically printed onto the posting lists You can use the Change button to change these entries at any time Identifiers of the sender franking machines Replace Delete Should you have any questions on franking machines the Deutsche Post Hotline will be glad to help you on 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part thereof from a German landline or
100. page 158 with your project Germany pallets or Germany trays respectively bundles must not be contained Activate the check box in order to urge Infopost Manager to consider this restriction Routing district optimization If at least 50 recipients of your items are within the routing district of your acceptance office at which you will post your mailshot they will be regarded as Infopost the charge for these items will be reduced if appropriate If you do not meet the minimum quantity extra items may be required There is no reason for not using routing district optimization in particular when you post fewer than 4 000 items If routing district optimization on page 225 is activated you must enter the ZIP of the posting office where you post the items Module Vario With activated module Vario you can also specify the production method Details can be found in chapter Vario on page 367 Trays Please ensure during production that all items within the trays are similarly arranged The address block on the items have to face the tray label and the items have to be inserted upside down if you are using trays of size 1 148 e Tray production properties Production properti Tray type Size 1 small Mas tems per tray 192 lema half full o0 E Trays Minimize postage higher production complexity O Minimize production complexity no production rebates 5 Produce Tray dependent on item volume
101. printing speed The option Additional character spacing increases the spacing of the text i e the distance between the different characters With this option it can be achieved that a font type becomes machine readable See Extras menu item on page 308 for more detailed information on machine readable fonts 285 Te 11 4 3 Vertical alignment You can use the alignment options to position the text vertically within the frame Three possible selections are available to you here e Top e Centered e Bottom Empty Lines Remove empty lines resulting from empty fields If this option is activated all empty lines will be deleted This can be especially useful for text fields that consist of multiple fields for instance an address block on page 280 If some fields of an address record do not contain any data lines consisting of these fields may be empty These empty lines are automatically deleted when this option is activated Please note that this option will also delete all empty lines that may occur in a single field if option Allow line breaks in fields on the current page is used Remove left spaces in data fields You can use this option to delete spaces on the left side of the field contents remove right You can use this option to delete spaces on the right side of the field contents Smooth lines with data fields remove unnecessary spaces This option removes all multiple and unnecessary spaces origina
102. processing E Mark address for writing to Spelling E Unify spelling for Strae in addresses Written out Aachener Strabe or Stidstrabe Only apply to automatically corrected addresses Automatically corrected addresses Show address for editing If you do not want to accept the automatic modifications without control you can view check and change the automatically changed addresses where appropriate right after the address check using this option Show addresses with changed spelling This option allows you to view a list of those addresses with changed spelling e g only spelling type of Stra e on the next page has been changed at the end of the address check in order to control and verify those changes Mark address for writing to This option simplify the subsequent manual processing of the found addresses Activate this option if you want to write to most of the changed addresses thus you only have to deactivate on page 72 those single addresses which you do not want to write to Keep upper case By activating this option you make sure that all addresses which are completely spelled in capital letters will not be converted into the normal upper and lower case format Such rather atypical address lists can be often found when importing data from mainframe computers Incorrect addresses Show address for editing This option allows you to revise incorrect addresses after the automatic address check if appr
103. right mouse button Table font format In this area you can define the font and its size by clicking the Change button This functionality is especially helpful for printing the tables 418 o Schriftart Sehnttschnit Standard Times New Roman Trebuchet MS Verdana Efekte E Durchgestrichen C Unterstrichen Farbe C Benutzerdefinie Skript Westlich A 6 Filter Selection You can define filter values by activating the relevant check box You can unmark or revert the selection via the contextual menu right mouse button In order to mark or unmark a contiguous block click the block s first table entry and afterwards the last by keeping the Shift key pressed Now press the space bar on your keyboard Discontinuous entries can be selected by clicking them and keeping the Ctrl key pressed In the field Range you can enter the filter values manually Comparable to the Print dialog on page 262 you specify ranges by entering the start and end value in combination with a hyphen or by entering a single filter value Multiple entries have to be separated by a semicolon Depending on the way you defined a filter value via mouse click or via manual entry in the field Range the mutual views will be automatically adjusted A 7 Text file with fixed field width If you want to export your data into text file with fixed field width select the file format Formatted text spaces separated prn Output format Se
104. street directory corrections cannot be made with address check exporting and printing is disabled in duplicate search results cannot be adopted in duplicate search only the statistics will be shown during Robinson check results cannot be adopted with Robinson check only the statistics will be shown during nixie check results cannot be adopted with nixie check all ZIP codes will be masked with in IPM s mail merge only the 10 foremost addresses per category with masked ZIPs will be used for Word s mail merge DEMO VERSION will be diagonally printed as water mark on all print outs lists which are not required for posting cannot be printed e g spread of countries statistics only the first page of those lists which are required for posting can be printed e g posting lists tray labels Please note that an Infopost Manager demo version can not be relicensed to a full version If you want to work with projects created in a demo version in a full version as well save them as Pack amp Go files prior to deinstalling the demo version and reinstalling the full version 384 Fe 17 Plugins Infopost Manager has a powerful plugin interface at his command This makes it possible to provide single letter shops resp service providers with functionalities which are purpose built so much that they will never become a regular feature Those functionalities are intended to facilitate the use of Infopost Manager and henc
105. the address check clicking the preview icon it can also be saved as text Excel or PDF file or be printed Report of address check States 20 01 2014 Project Demo Professional Page 1 of 118 Statistics Postally comect addresses 25 52 56 Manually comedad addresses 0 02 Aulemalicaly comeciod addres e es 1 06 Thesaurus comeciod addresses i 0 04 Addresses with changed spelling i 0 42 Addresses with moomed address types 0 00 56 Postally intorect addresses 4 48 r emational addresses 647 Total 100 001 Y Macoris cra Pa r el Address Ho 1 Record 35 Postally incorrect fdo KG Herm Kal Schmitz 27 gt An den Mihistenen Bares ZIP is missing Address No 2 Record 174 Autom corrected Aufruc und Maschinenbik A Schmersal Pagel el 118 Preview You can use this button to open the report You will find more information on the various options of this report preview in the Print Preview on o page 416 chapter Settings on the structure and content of the report are made using the Options button on the Report on the next page tab Options Use this dialog window to make settings for two important address check functions View on this page and Report on the next page View tab Use this tab to set the various options for viewing the results of the address check Addresses Show incorrect addresses Show incorrect addresses with suggestions Show incorrect addresses with Thesaurus suggestions
106. the different configuration methods are confusing to you or if you are confronted with error messages when starting the checks please contact your system administrator Order management On this tab you specify whether or not you want to exchange the project data via order management with Deutsche Post If yes you also have to state the transfer type General User Presettinas AFMPFRANKIT Order management IT ranking Transfer Data exchange via Webservice Check status when opening projects 5 Manual data exchange via file transfer Allow manual editing of order number D PAG 5 No data exchange Settings Post customer number for the order ID to be transterred 0123456789 User and password lt not sawed Transfer By default option Data exchange via Webservice is activated as well as the check box Verify status when opening projects Explanation A Webservice is a software application which is clearly identifiable and whose interfaces are defined de scribed and detectable Webservices support the direct interaction with software products through the usages of messages exchanged via Internet protocols Choosing this option eases the data exchange the way that you do not have to care about the manual transfer of the created data exchange files If you prefer the transfer of the data exchange files by hand e g via e mail or via FTP up download activate option Manual data exchange via file transfer Please not
107. the main screen of the mail merge module and subsequently select this menu item or enter the desired address number in the Print on page 262 menu Save as PDF document Using this option you save your document in Portable Document Format PDF You can print the created files later on other systems independently of Infopost Manager 207 11 1 13 11 2 1 11 2 2 ave as PDF file General Options Extended Additional pagez Output File name CA Uzers Public Documents N ew Project pdf C Embed fonts Overview Document Endless labels Endless label 30 818 addresses Printing 5 137 label pages total 30 878 Labels Addresses Al 5 Current address 5 Addresses The appearing window corresponds for the most part the print dialog on page 261 In the Output area you define the path and name of the PDF file to be created instead of the printer You can also Embed fonts here by activating the respective option Print reference sample Using this menu item you can print the reference sample which is mandatory for the dispatch and thus has to be delivered together with the posting list The reference sample corresponds with the master document The only differences is that instead of the address information of an address block on page 280 also holds for Premiumadress on page 289 the field names are printed Additionally the complete position frame is diagonally underlaid w
108. the menu item Columns a dialog window pops up and you can define the layout of the customer index aaa Demo M alings Demo M alings Demo madings Demo M alings Demo Madings Shabuz paused eal paused ad paused du opened opened Customer i default mailer Created on 17 01 24 17 01 2014 06 17 2013 06 11 2013 06 11 2013 06 17 2012 06 11 2013 17 01 2014 29 01 2004 21 01 2014 17 01 2014 Changed on 17 01 2004 17 01 2014 1311 23 20 01 2004 1311 2013 4 0 2014 1311 2013 17 01 2014 29 07 2004 21 01 2014 17 01 2014 Time 1 min mr 1Thi4 mn Th 34 miri T h TA mn 6 h 44 min 1h 14 mn mr 3h1 min 2H 57 mir men 206 o Mark the columns to be shown in the view Use Up and Down to change the column sequence al Customer No a Company Company2 Companys 4 Street 4 ZIP street 2 City street 2 Salutation T itle First Last na Dept Created on Salutation Address street P 0 Box Bank Branch code The selected column should 45 pixels wide Select the fields which are to be displayed by clicking the respective check box If necessary the column widths in pixel can be changed in the dialog field below the table Set the column order by moving them up or down The button Default columns will reverse your changes Extended Mode The extended mode offers useful function
109. the original version of the data record as it was imported if appro priate without salutation and or gender Using the menu item Goto you can navigate to a dedicated address number or you can start the address search by choosing Find In address block view the original data record number coming from the source file is displayed in the line above the address Thus you can relocate the address in question in your source file In table view you can get this number by right clicking and choosing the Original menu item All imported fields from the source file are displayed including the data record number Options Clicking the Options button opens the View dialog You can access additional functionalities via another menu by clicking the arrow icon right to the button View You can define here which addresses shall not be shown T hide manually corected salutations hide corrigible salutations O hide incorrect salutations The presettings from the options on page 84 dialog can be revised in this window and you are able to redefine whether or not automatically corrected addresses shall be hidden Fields This button is only enabled in table view you can use it to select additional fields to be shown with each address Mark the columns to be shown in the view Use Up and Down to change the column sequence U Y Titel i 4 Nachname Bou 4 Geschlecht Firmal 4 Firma Firma Strahe v Hausnummer
110. to pay the due charges Special agreements with Deutsche Post AG are required for some payment methods A bank account has to be defined in any case in order to allow Deutsche Post AG to refund unnecessarily paid charges The hotline which you can reach on phone 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part thereof from a German landline or a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network or a Direct Marketing Center close to you will be glad to answer your questions about the various payment methods Payment On this tab you define how you intend to pay the remaining postage Payment Prepayment Payment type for remaining postage Cash EC card Crossed check C Direct debit Pretas deduction permitted Remaining postages are e g the postage costs if using the franking mark the value added tax for Infopost etc The latter also incur if you frank your items by yourself e g via FRANKIT Depending on the franking type you can also pay the remaining postage in advance by stamping them on the list on the next page You can activate the pretax deduction permission by clicking the corresponding check box These settings are important for Infopost Manager as they decide the postage optimization runs with pretax 156 or after tax values i Typically all users have a pretax deduction permission if they are not private end users part of the public authorities federation
111. to regulate the use of upper lower case and to set the maximal length of a PURL In the important area Conflict resolution you can determine how to create unambiguous PURLs out of ambiguous ones Ambiguities result if the content of the dynamic part is the same for more than one PURL This happens for example if multiple recipients have the same name You can decide whether Infopost Manager enumerates the dynamic part in ascending order or whether it appends a unique random number Create Code Password This step will only be displayed if you have chosen Code User name and Password or PURL and Password as encoding method Depending on whether you want to create a code or a password the labels in this dialog differ In the following only codes will be considered for convenience However the same rules and consequences apply for passwords In this area you define the structure of the code to be created or you select a database field which contains the code to be used option Use Code from database field 136 fo Rio Code properties Create Code Prefix Security Low High Use only the following character classes 4 Capital letters Small letters 4 Digits Hide similar characters e q 1 1 1 o 0 0 5 Use user defined character class Valid characters 0123456789 D Use Code from database field Firmal If you have chosen option Create Code you can set the security level using the throttle The higher t
112. und Yertiebegerellochafl Flachelard Leet Nach GmbH amp Co EG Kieler St Schaze imbH Harkortstr Entran Sensoren GmbH Oetetr EDIC Neenalern GmbH Co EG Oetetr EPEDAWEREE RUDOLF PLATTE GmbH amp Co EG hatratzentabnk Oststr Heveling GmbH amp Lo Buchdruckeres und Pormula erlag Bem Umepanneverk Awuiienmann Sohne GmbH Co Midilermeg Engel Ostet 5 dunkeis KG Athausellee Foume Pharma SAMY Febmannstr 7 EM TFST Weelan GrebH tn KG Rute hanna 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 3 19 678 Addresses Bo filter Each column header can be used as sorting criterion by double clicking it Further sorting possibilities are offered if you right click the column header You can specify the format to be used via the command Sort Company Tompanye ERP ES Columns letallgie erei Maschinenbau i o Pe coda SPECTRO Analytical Instruments Gr SE Talc E j Mook und Gobel 2 a As text default l Wagner GmbH u Co KG h As number As date Scheckel A second double click on the column header resp a second execution of the Sort command inverts the sorting order o Address management can be called out of mail merge on page 308 too You can then use it to navigate through your mail merge documents If address management is called out of mail merge the addresses will be shown in the exact order as they will be printed Sorting is therefore deactivated He 4 3 1 Address management Quit the address
113. whether to take the Sender the Mailer the Payer or even a totally different role as Premiumadress contractual partner if you are working in lettershop mode on page 223 Premiumadress requires a Post customer number which can be defined in the customer index Extras Customers menu or in the sender data Extras Sender Mailer menu on tab Details on page 204 Premiumadress 1D When the contract is concluded a Premiumadress ID with number 1 is automatically created As long as you do not create additional Premiumadress IDs you can enter 1 in field Fixed value If additional IDs have been created e g for different departments or divisions you can assign a data field of the address management to this Premiumadress ID similar to the product variant using option Value from field User specific data Premiumadress supports the integration of user specific data such as customer number into the data matrix code This information will also be read and transferred to you if address errors occur The field may contain up to 16 alphanumeric characters For longer strings only numeric values are permitted in this case activate the check box interpret as number This function also supports a fixed value for all addresses e g an internal mailshot number or any value from an arbitrary field of the address management When clicking the button the Choose data fields dialog window opens and you can select a field You ca
114. width format you have to specify the required column separator by clicking on the ruler Any separation can be deleted by clicking on it again 52 y Text file wizard select column width Using this dialog window vou can set the individual column widths The preview of the selected data illustrates how the text 12 going to be shown Address preview File S AprojectsApicaszosdoc DemodateientY As E samples F rubhling tet be DW oy olen bo ne PA D p Field 1 00000000100Bahnhofstr 42 00000000200Bahnhofstr 50 00000000300Bahnhofstr 52 00000000400Bahnhofstr 54 00000000500Bahnhofstr 54 00000000600Bahnhofstr 54 00000000700Bahnhofstr lez 00000000800Bahnhofstr lez 00000000900Bahnhofstr les 00000001000Bahnhofstr 76 00000001100Bahnhofstr Loo 00000001200Bahnhofstr jroo TET la nin 30 fee GE A A A A eo o G AA 40 50 60 il E 66111Saarbriick lss111saarbrick 661115aarbriick 66111Saarbriick 66111Saarbriick 661115aarbriick ls6l111saarbr ck 66111Saarbriick 66111S5aarbriick 66111S5aarbriick 6111Saarbriick 66111S5aarbriick a leran am j Importing Excel files Select the correct worksheet or table where you can find the data to be imported In addition to that activate the option First line contains field name if this applies to your source file The results of your selection can be easily seen in the Preview Here the first 100 addresses resp lines and the first 50 fi
115. with similar format and field structure Importing text files with variable width If you are going to import files with separators you have to specify the separators and brackets If the necessary separator is not listed activate the option Others and enter the corresponding character You can enter the character for the bracket in the corresponding field or select it from the selection list Depending on the defined characters you can immediately see the results in the Preview Thus you can directly verify or change your selection prior to starting the import of the whole file a Text file wizard select separa Using this dialog window pon can define separators The preview of the selected data illustrates how the text is going to be shown Separator Brackets 5 Tab gt 3 Semicolon Comma Space 5 Other Address preview File CAL sers Public Documents Deuteche Post 464 lntopost Hanager Data Examples Regional tet Field 1 Field Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 a 1 M ller GmbH Werk Hamburg Herr Hubert 2 A E datac Herr Ludwig 3 AAC Atlant Frau Fritz 4 abe Werbun GWA Herr L 5 AC Service Max Max 6 Haenelt Co Herr B 7 Ahrens EG Betonstein Frau Tilla 8 Alphabeta Herr Heinz 9 Alphachemi Herr ae Clemens 10 Altmann E _ Herr Jul Pet 4 t Load template Cancel lt Back Importing text files with a fixed width format If your file is in fixed
116. you have selected during field assignment prior to importing the addresses on page 49 only those fields which you transferred from your source 120 file are available to you here Address fields Company 1 Company Companys Contact person 4 Street address J P O Box address Additional fields Customer Mo First name Last name Dept Position Phone Other fields ID Adresszeile 4 Adresszeile 5 Mitarbeiterzahl Griindungsjahr Umsatz Show data source name If your address file contains only individual addresses the fields which are available for selection change the fields Company 1 to Company 3 will no longer be shown You can use the button All to select all listed fields The button None deactivates all fields while the Standard button resets the selection to the default Infopost Manager settings The activated option Show data source name shows the source file s path and name for each duplicate address DEUTSCHE ASFHULT Grebe DEUTSCHE ASPHALT GmbH Haupt vera aleg Haupt verrait Herr Wily Wendt Anm der Gehrespitr 6363 hieu sebo fin der Gehespite 6306S Seu lsenhurg Poathach 1553 At pini lainin Posblach 12339 64292 hmi Leaning Import nation DOF Di Deben international mb Table view In this view all record fields are listed and the duplicates are tiled in the table columns Thus more information is available than in the address block view which can be used for comparing the
117. zones A o Preview ca Print Print options Export Close Used 24178 Unused Total 24 257 Routing zone e Quantity e The spread by routing zones can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 7 8 Address spread by countries This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses grouped by countries All used addresses in your project are grouped by countries For each entry the respective country is given as well as its ISO code and the item quantity separated in total used and unused Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check 195 Preview 4 Print Print options Export Close Addresses 20 818 International e Country group ee 150 code e Quantity e Used e Unused a international gt CU Cd 36 9 9 Australia International Austria International 40 262 262 Belgium International 56 7 116 Bulgaria International Cambodia International Canada International Colombia
118. 12 12355 Musterhauzen Hern Max Musk Create new customer As the project will be clearly assigned to one customer via the customer index on page 201 the name of the project does not have to contain any reference to your customer but may e g specify the content of the mailing You will find more information on the toolbar and the menu items in chapter Project explorer on page 28 Project name Choose a distinctive name for your projects The project name is a mandatory field if you do not enter any name New project is used automatically 17 Ee Descriptions About Folder Project root director Status Pry duration O minutes Created on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Changed on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Sender Muster 4G Wusterhausen 143456709 Mailer Muster AG Wusterhausen H 23456789 Deler PIO cansa The description of a project is always shown in lists and statistics for example in the tray list on page 169 and the pallet list on page 174 or in the project statistics on page 184 Thus it is always possible to assign the results to a project 3 2 New from project Here you can create a new project based on an existing one Such a project will behave just like any other new project The only difference is that the data stock of the template project incl e g addresses and item properties will be used as defaults for the new project 3 3 Request order This menu item is onl
119. 14 16 02 2014 Custome number EXP J Sender On 34567 ES Mailer Paper DescoptioreLabel Onder Label Order desciiphon E Ml 2 of 2 Qiders in this mew All found orders will be shown in a table and grouped according to their projects and categories Pe Module Job splitting If you have defined partial postings on page 158 separate sub groups are created within the projects for these partial postings Every job of a Job splitting on page 372 is treated in a similar way The Status column provides information on the dependency to Infopost Manager Status Explanation This order has been created with this Infopost Manager and has been transferred to the exchange server This order has been created with another Infopost Manager or a foreign system and has been transferred to the exchange server y This order has been marked for deletion on the exchange server The grey font color means that the order details are not request on the current page yet Thus only basic information are available 3 3 3 Request details Explicitly request the order details from the exchange server in order to receive missing information such as e g the posting date or the label 22 Tie Projects Orders View Options To X Filler Find Ippe Category Order ino DFAG Poshng date T Period 17 01 2004 16 0224 Demo Standard Neves Projekt 2 4 Customer number EKP E
120. 17 Nachname 18 Position 19 Abteilung 20 Eundern Hr Content Max length Firma Firmas 0 Sirahe 50 Hausnummer 2d Postfach PLZ Strahe PLZ Postfach PLZ Grobemplanger Ort Strahe Ort Posthach Ort Grobempranger Land Anrede Titel Vorname Nachname Position Abteilung Eunder Hr 38 entries Here you can also create New fields Rename fields Delete fields or Clear fields You will find the respective buttons in the upper area of the dialog Please note that system internal fields such as e g Companyl or Variant may neither be renamed nor deleted This is only possible for user defined fields which have been either imported or created manually However instead of deleting an internal field you can clear all contents at one go The field itself remains existing Columns This menu item makes it possible to determine the order of the displayed columns and to change the width of particular columns With the tick you determine which columns are to be displayed Using Default width the standard width of the marked field can be restored while Default columns restores the standard order of all fields By activating the option Save as default for new projects your adjustments will become presettings for new projects The column order can also be changed by simply clicking on the column header and dragging it to the desired position Reset columns Choose this menu item in order to reset the
121. 2USTPLZ ZUSTORT LAND BRIEFANRED kK I moore hl r Add Delete Remove empty fields Field properties of Firmal Index 1 Content Address helds Firmal Name Firmal Load template Cancel lt Back Nets You can use the buttons Add and Delete to extend your output file by further fields or to remove dispensable fields Select a dedicated field and move it to the desired position within the export file by clicking the Up and Down buttons In general empty fields can be automatically removed prior to the export by clicking the Remove empty fields button Infopost Manager can automatically add all filled address fields Thus you avoid importing empty fields or do not forget importing filled fields Just click the Add button and select those fields which you want to be included in your export file o You can start all actions also via the contextual menu right mouse click During extending the output file via adding one or more fields a dialog window appears where you can comfortably select the field s 328 Choose data fields El Add field Explanation to focused feld El ress fields o P Emart of the sddiess fie Ima F O Fima3 gt O Strate O Hausnummer O Strabenzuzatz O Postfach PLE Strahe PLZ Posttach PLZ GroMemplanger Ort Stra e Ort Posthach Ort Grobempt nger Land Anrede Titel Vorname JBOOBOOOOOO Nachname Ci Th
122. 30818 Additionally the probability is calculated of a code being correctly guessed resp of how many attempts will be needed in average to get a single correct code using brute force methods You can set the address volume in field Assumed number of addresses to a value other than the current project size This might be useful for simulating the consequences for a later code creation Rules for the code length The higher the security level the longer the code will be The smaller the character class the longer the code will be The larger the address volume the longer the code will be Adressdialog configuration In order to use Adressdialog you have to activate the check box Adressdialog activated Adressdialog activated 8 Login only via Code D Login via PURL Login via PLIRL and Password O Login via User name and Paseword Firmal First you have to decide how the user has to log in at the Adressdialog service either via the created unique code or via the combination of user name and password resp how the user shall be directed to the personalized web site via PURL or via the combination of PURL and password PURLs Personal URLs are used to create personalized web addresses e g http www domain deMax Mustermann You can define which fields shall be used to create the PURL in the next step on the current page It is convenient to display PURLs as QR Codes on page 302 and print them on your addres
123. 4 0 3 2 9 Varian 46 25 0 5 2 0 Varian 25 6 0 1 1 5 Varian 6 a 10 3 24 8 Varian aT 0 8 2 2 Varian 28 9 9 24 4 Varian 0 0 1 5 Varian 0 1 1 5 Varia 1 8 Varian OF 2 2 Vanian 1 0 2 4 Varian 6 4 1 9 Varian 1 5 Varian 16 8 Varian 20 1 Varian Hi ps ja sd O fa ji Be 39 456 j a a D ja Rh LA LA pa a fl 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S If you have defined job splittings on page 373 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various job lists via the arrow buttons 4 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 1 i 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 7 1 llet 06 02 14 Muster AG 2 1 art 06 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 2 iant A 2 07 0214 Muster AG 2 2 J iant A 2 ar 1 Please refer to the Tray target Bundle target list on page 173 paragraph to get further information about the table fields 15 4 2 3 Pallet list With the Job splitting module specific pallet lists are available 379 15 4 2 4 GmbH 1 1 o Previ Frint Print options Export E 4 06 02 14 Bauer Kinch GmbH 1 1 05 02 14 Bauer Kinch GmbH 1 1 rr 06 02 14 Muster AG 2 1 A Fo No Net kgl lanos kg Tray mo
124. 50 code then by Variant description Production properties Like National Tray production 5 Bundle production Bundle production properties Sorting Deutsche Post AG does not regulate any sorting for Infopost International for the different countries If you want to obtain an order nevertheless you can select up to two criteria via the dropdown menus A Use the sorting options e g for testing purposes or for preparing the shipping service Direct Entry For the latter select the field Country ISO code first and then Delivery ZIP and city 344 15 2 2 3 pa a Module Vario If you want to sort international items by variants you can choose either Variant description or Variante Vario While the variant description corresponds to the actual variant of an item Variante Vario is the content of an address field If you have specified a default variant it may happen that different values of the field Variante Vario map to the same variant description Details can be found in chapter Vario on page 363 Production properties In this area you specify whether you want to produce the international items differently from the national ones In such a case enter the necessary values in the areas Tray Bundle properties and Pallet properties for tray bundle production if applicable Dispatch properties In this dialog window all settings for the dispatch of international items are to be specified Disp
125. 52411 38 19 59470 5 12 1179 96 19 46424 9 19 521 911 8 0727 221 19 50428 7 19 51 46 06 19 56411 9 The functions which can be activated by right clicking in the object inspector can also be found in the various menus and are explained more detailed in the description of those menus Show field descriptor You can use this button to hide the field contents of the current address The designations of the fields which are used in this frame are shown instead highlighted in blue Thus you can see which fields 215 from your address file are inserted into the document independent of the currently shown address record Address tields Firmat Address fields Firmaz Address fields 4btelung Additional address fields Attn Additional address fields Delwery address Additional address flelds Delvery ZIP Additional address fields Delwery city Additional address fields Country name 11 3 3 Show margins If this option is activated any previously created frame is displayed on the sheet in order to check the set margins If necessary you can adjust them by changing their respective values in the document properties on page 253 on the tab Margins H ee O 11 3 4 Visualize areas On some formats such as single letters or long DIN envelopes you will find positioning aids shown as gray frames For single letters this frame shows the location of a w
126. 6 7 a El 10 jp Pel ml Po ka Ph PA oP Pa ba Po PA E A A Bi Ba PP Bo OP Pl A oP E PA OB OAD GRR BRR RRR eee ees JE Bi nm Em 515 0 If you have defined job splittings on page 373 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various job lists via the arrow buttons 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 1 ga 05 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 7 let 06 02 14 Muster AG 2 1 art 06 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 2 iant A 2 07 0214 Muster AG 2 2 z jant A 2 Lim nes 1 Please refer to the Tray Bundle list on page 169 paragraph to get further information about the table fields 15 4 2 2 Tray target Bundle target list With the Job splitting module specific tray target bundle target lists are available 378 r Kirch GmbH 1 1 x Print Print options Export la 06 02 14 Bauer Kinch GmbH 1 1 06 02 14 Muster AG 2 1 Label Net kg Gross Variant Tray 06 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 1 2 07 17 Yarim 07 02 14 Muster AG 242 22 LI 2 7 Varian ds m 4 34 4 8 Varian 3B 24 5 0 6 5 Varian 42 25 L7 31 Varian 14 26 0 8 2 2 Varian 7 7 57 6 72 1 Varian 7 480 28 57 1 70 2 Varian 470 3 21 0 2 1 7 Varian 2 0 0 1 5 Varian 1 2 O 2 1 7 Varian 11 23 0 3 1 8 Yarian 17 2
127. AA 458 AR 3 AR 3 AR 44 AR 44 RR 44 AR 44 AR 44 AR 44 AR 44 RR 46 AR 503 2 The structure and the presentation of the table is similar for both tray or bundle production Each value refers to the required tray or bundle The table is sub divided into two areas e Tray Bundle e Tray target Bundle target In the lower status bar you can read the total number of the respective production lot which is required after optimization based on the given information on the various preparation menu items i 19 entries Tray Bundle The first area contains information about the trays bundles 170 Rie Ho Addresses Met kg Gross kg il ET EN 2 126 25 3 5 3 105 21 3 0 4 192 3 8 4 8 5 192 3 8 4 8 Columns Explanation No All trays resp bundles are serially and individually numbered Items This column shows the number of items for the respective tray bundle Net The net weight represents the mere weight of all items Gross The gross weight sums up the net weight plus tray and pallet weights Below the table the totals of the different columns can be found Tray target Bundle target Trays can contain items with a similar ZIP or for a routing region first two digits of the ZIP or they can be packed as Germany tray ZIP trays resp bundles with similar ZIPs are combined by Infopost Manager to one tray bundle target The same holds for routing region trays or bundles Germany trays bundles also represent a target
128. All fields in inverted commas Specify field names in first address record Replace line breaks in fields Use the option Replace line breaks in fields to replace line breaks by the character A 9 MS Access database With Infopost Manager you are able to directly export your addresses or other fields into the database format MS Access mdb 420 ie Output format Sethirigs By clicking the Settings button a dialog appears where you can define the automatic primary key to be created Activate the correspondent check box and enter the desired field name for the primary key File format Settings Create automatic primary kep Field name ID An automatic primary key is a numeric field whose value is unique for each record and which will be automatically increased by the database A 10 Inkjet printers In order to create a text file which can be directly imported into a inkjet printer select the file format Inkjet printer fixed number of lines txt Output format File Format Similar to the exports in fixed or variable field format you can also use the dialog window which pops up when clicking the button Settings to define the field and record separator as well as the required character set Field separator Record separator Character set C Line feed LF 04 C Line feed LF 04 Windows C Carriage return CR 001 5 Carriage return CR 001 5 DOS New l
129. Bundle list 320 Bundles 150 Change password 213 Check 309 Cheshire 266 Chosen options 126 Close 40 Colors and lines tab 271 Content tab 161 376 Context menu items right mouse button 32 Control buttons 126 Country specific tab 347 Create Pack amp Go 41 Customer index 201 Data backup 42 Data exchange 45 Data fields 400 data protection 34 dBase files 49 Demo version 384 Details tab 45 167 204 Details Tab 47 Dialog Manager 40 Dictionaries 310 Dispatch properties 140 distribution list identifier 412 Divide into national international 41 Document 249 Document toolbar 278 Duplicate search 114 Edit 107 126 268 Edit columns 31 Edit first name list 90 Edit fonts 308 Edit properties 299 Edit tab 93 Edit toolbar 278 Excel files 49 Exit 47 Export 415 Export addresses from address management 333 Export addresses from Results menu 323 Export Customer data 202 Export addresses 323 Export Customer data 202 Extended Mode 207 Extended tab 96 264 Extra items 154 Extras 308 Extras menu 200 Field assignment 244 Field structure 244 Fields combined 245 Fields irrelevant 246 Filter Selection 419 Filter tab 19 Find tab 21 Fonts machine readable 308 Franking machines 45 226 Franking type 146 FRANKIT 45 General tab 43 159 203 250 253 261 270 345 367 375 425 gogreen 294 Goto item 274 Goto page 274 Group overview 123 Help menu 241 Hit list 30 Hot Keys 313
130. C Oiuck GmbH done cn Strg 6 Abel Ber hh Find Strg F Lukasiowalz Filhaus Kurt Georg 105 Management Kamer Verlag a a 2 E d g el a 2 a al E Eakhott unknown PEAK Werk etolt GmbH iv y y Y y y Y y y Yi y y Address 2 of 27936 Complemented Gender complemented Salutation complemented Save as genderless clears the field salutation and declares the address as being genderless in field gender This classification makes sense for companies without contact person or for instance for addresses whose first name field is filled with two first names Save as male sets the value specified in the Options on page 84 dialog typically Herr to the field salutation and declares the address as being male in field gender The menu item Save as female works the same way Swap first last name exchanges the contents of the fields first name and last name The gender suggested by Infopost Manager is emphasized in bold letters The menu item Add first name to user list extends the user defined first name list on page 90 with this first name You can select Edit to open the Edit address on page 67 dialog window By selecting Write to you can change the status of the marked address record if this option is checked the address will be written to if you uncheck this option the recycle bin icon appears and this address will not be used 00 You can select Original to view
131. Copy file into the project directory after import Select the option Copy file into the project directory after import if you want to create a copy of the import file That way you do not have to keep track of the original file and it may safely be deleted Infopost Manager can import various file formats e Access files e dBase files e Excel files e text files Text files can be imported in both variable and fixed width format If you can choose between fixed or variable format when exporting from another application you should prefer the variable option You can also compile the address data set for the mailshot from various data sources In order to do so you can select multiple files in the selection dialog 49 Multi import 2 files were selected for import The first file ts Adressen xls Import first file File Adressen xls will be imported Further files can be imported upon request Import all files Files Adressen xls and International xls will be imported gt Goto next file File Adressen xls will not be imported Abbrechen Ab Existing addresses This project currently contains 19678 addresses gt Reject All existing addresses will be deleted gt Keep Existing addresses will be kept and newly imported will be added Abbrechen If you want to discard the existing address data click Reject If you want to supplement your already imported addresses with additional records
132. DO connection all required configuration data e g user and password for a SQL database Import via ADO only ZIP Similar to the import from file only ZIP on page 63 menu item Infopost Manager ensures during the address import that at least a field containing the ZIP will be imported Here the import source is not a file but an ADO connection All other methods are virtually identical Import via ADO Label format Similar to the import from file only ZIP on page 63 menu item Infopost Manager finds unerringly the ZIP in up to ten address lines und stores it in the designated field Here the import source is not a file but an ADO connection All other methods are virtually identical 4 3 Address management You can use the address management to display an overview of all aspects concerned with the current address file This menu item is available as soon as an address file has been imported however some of the options can only be activated after the address check and the postage optimization have been carried out On the address management s main screen all imported fields are shown 66 Address management Edit Find Extras Al s a vY Compari Company Street Kee Machos Gb to KS Miaegtat Masehinenas atau SPECTAO dmalptical Instruments GmbH Magdeburger Sur Hook und Gobel cimmengeschalt und 5 agevreik Aungedamm Wagner lambH u Lo El Maschmnentabnk Eullerer Berg Scheckel Schukeg Geselis Giuibel Fabikatore
133. Date Here you can set date and time for the delivery of this job to Deutsche Post AG The data can differ from the data you have defined in the production properties on page 153 before Delivery The delivery place respective the acceptance office can be set here individually or independently of the various jobs Choose the option use global delivery place to determine that you will post the items at the delivery place you have already defined in the production properties on page 153 375 The option Pallets being picked up by Deutsche Post AG destines the pallets to be picked up at the producing supplier by Deutsche Post AG at the specified point of time Use the option Pallets posted at Deutsche Post AG acceptance office to determine a separate acceptance office for the current job This office can vary from the global one You can click the button Select acceptance office to get a list from which you can choose the corresponding office Description In this area you can set a designation for the current job You can choose between an automatic description consisting of date name of the supplier job number partial posting number if appropriate and a manual description Content tab Pallet target F Show available entries only Label Addresses Pallets Gross kg Post 2470 230 3 40 2 183 5 E 2 5 2425 179 4 ha 2 334 2 136 2 165 1 731 2187 ERCEL 1 890 1 522 OOOOOKEE l A job spl
134. Dispatch Item Production Optimization Payment method ae sd Addresses menu Address management Se eg lt 00000 Especially within the address management Infopost Manager Professional with activated module in ternational optimization contains more or extended functions Having executed the postage optimization additional filter criteria will become available in address management In submenu Category filters for the international addresses by Infopost Letters at kilo rates and remaining items are offered 340 15 2 2 15 2 2 1 Address management Edit Find Extras o 7 User defined Fimaz baee Tt Infopost tems Pee j dl all Infopost International tems Hook und Gobel Unused addresses creen und 5 sqeverk Used addresses some Mot usable addresses Gecediuc Giurtel Fab National addresses Inert Nacht GmbH i International addresses Scherzer GmbH Ertan Sensoren Grr EOC Hamaker Gent EPEDAWERKERL Zane Matratzentabek Mevelmng GmbH amp Ci Buchdruckera und Formulary elag Provinces HP range 1 a1 3 4 5 E T B 3 Routing region mun Antfemmann Sohne Engels Countries 5 Junkes KG Wanmamnts FANA Pharma 5 5 Import file 7 AREN TEST Welan rra 20 818 Addresses No filter Preparation menu In Dispatch properties you specify the necessary settings required for optimizing the international items After having executed the postage optimization you can
135. During the first installation of Infopost Manager the Datafactory Postalcode will be initially installed The Datafactory is available in two versions The small street directory Datafactory Postalcode contains all street and city names of the 218 largest cities in Germany It is available in specific versions for personal and supplier use The large street directory Datafactory Streetcode contains all ZIPs city and street names in Germany The Datafactory Postalcode is divided in different licenses for suppliers and end customers In contrast to an end customer as a supplier you have to license the number of addresses you have checked for your customer You will find the order forms with information on prices conditions etc of the small street directory Datafactory Postalcode in the file personal use resp supplier and of the large street directory Datafactory Streetcode in the file A wizard guides you through the installation resp update process installation addres oe The address check compares the addresses in your address list vath Deutsche Post s official postal routing data so called Datafactores and ties to automatically conect found emors There are two versions of the Datafactory The Datafactory Postalcode contains all ZIP codes all city names and the street names of the 218 largest cities in Germany The Datafactory Steetcode additionally contains all street names in Germany Since ci
136. F document e besar rara E REESE 11 1 13Print reference sample a a a a a E ee eaa e a eeann EEE R eee eS UA EIA AA E RA EA ee Hd Foe roo rodear We Ed oo we ew ee ee ee Ee AAA LL 2 0 LOPES 446 oe raso ee GBA Oe Eh ee DS MI ss eke tS ee Be eee ee eee ee ee eee See O MMS ee eb Oe ESSE OEE ee eee Ge OE Ke E E MDMA ocaso eee RR eee eee ee e Se 11 2 10 Reposition out of range frames a E22 bearch address fe eben ee eee eee ee eee eB eS LAICO bo wee eh eee eee eee ee eee tebe ee we eee eee Le VIEW SIA 11 3 1 Object inspector se owe eH Se ss ae ee ee 11 3 2 Show field descriptor oa a a a a a ULA SUN MIT sea a BE SE Ses 11 3 4 Visualize areas exec se sic es orcas 11 3 5 Visualize truncated text 11 3 6 Refresh view a a a a Ms TOOLS ake o ee eh eee eee eee ee eo ThA Ser e daros eee ena do nos sra beeen ee eaes 11 4 1 Address block a a L ALS EE EEEE Pe ma Ad Ova led UGK 4 44 Gee eae oe ee oe Oe ee 11 4 4 Franking mark 4 ow oo ea eR eee ERE EKER EEO EDS 11 4 5 Premiumadress 66 22 ee e664 eb REGS TE ESOS EE EE Ee HES A GOGREEN e eea ee aaa AA IEA MATO a Ska ae ee ee eee eee eRe ee ee ee eee TELAS Be sab ee OLE ee eR SE Re ee eS eS Lio DIEDANG s w 5 5 bao SE aa AID WE A Da COOe amp a ana ee 6G a ee ee ew ee Ee th a ee Eee wae bee a AA LZ Darcode waa es Roe eee Ree Ee ee ee eee 11 4 12New page behind current page 1 ee ee 11 4 13New page before
137. Fipe 2 ini T3 Kia TH Mails E ASE Nady E Holden 0 10 Esa TO Pore Sa 1 1 Peon Sa 34 Fetai El Estaran Jl reco at TA address files which solely contain individual addresses the field last name has to be assigned If an address file contains both company and individual addresses it is very important that the Company 1 and the last name fields are assigned Otherwise the duplicate search will not be able to take into account all records during the various comparisons and thus will lead to incomplete or even wrong results You can show a preview by double clicking an address Double clicking the field name checks all settings for this field once again If appropriate you can also make modifications 246 Content assignment Firmal Content Current assignment Company i Suggestion by field analysis Company i Import Import field 5 Import without assignment Leave preceding blanks Leave succeeding blanks Choose assignment Company 1 Accept suggestion of the field analysis Change name of unassigned fields The ticks next to the field names mean that these fields will be imported i e will be available for the further process of the project Ort Stralde w contains City street Z You do not have to import fields which you do not need for the Infopost project Call the field assignment menu click on the arrow icon of the column header and choose the command Do not import field This
138. GmbH 3 Mook und Gobel ieg GH u Co FG 5 Jeda E Dirbo Gri fiidar ud Verso T ll Hh pri b Ca EG B Samih G Em 5 ost DH TD EDC Rinada Gabh Coh 11 EPED WERE RUDOLF PLATTE GH t Cok Te Alevelag ErbH A Co TS den br de an u Engels 15 Juntos A 16 Foar a Pra SAR 17 LO A05T Verlag Gobi A Co EG 1 Oidertsa par Hobart cian Grii 15 Cider gc voki 20 Ohrana GrabH al Ca EG 2 Gubdeering Hedred Gib 3 06115 Maton und sa GmbH Ca 05 24 EEH DATALNE etbmbrger ha Dieter abatir 25 Ciara 26 jemen Parets S600 1 GF PI iaire GrH CE ab 2S jma HL Ca ED 0 Lahore FI Fiho iihi Beeb E Linbh u Co Se Fekar A Dasme Erak a M Lwie penap und ihya ALLE Labans 7 SE EAN Dh Cheki Corana Lidl Y Hadad Mik babi I Dies L E W PeH hh be 40 hera Rublranbas Grab 1 hra Seniniugen Umi 42 ipank L Peete Dri 43 Hia Schreier haare mbH eth el y 7 J Halaipalaa Macarena Sarena ictal und Geers Beecher gor Misini tak Bhahiukas iaj Fork Veil Lame Macrae Belalobetle her enedurg tall os rolas Faki J o 13 LE Aegobeiga Chinos 1 Segle Cheetos 1 Robedtontran 27 Hass isc Fling 27 Fapa 2 roiie TA Kia TH Hdd E Hablentaicke D Nady E Medien 0 10 Emai TO Estaran I Fecal Y al IRTE x Portech conan aa Cs ral n rk linear ihri anpra er dl Compara Compilar FO Eca Adhe ZF jas 2P Pi do P a e hj City priva Cy Po Beal Cis Coat AP ctp jrm Cord ed E Loria Curiam
139. H DGS Individual Katalog dispatch 1 2 a a Routine labels s x coo ss ok wee ewe EEE Ra we Oe A A es POSING NCS e bead eee Rete eh eee hee eee ee Pe oe ee SG Production and posting documents 2 s a a e a a a a Mail merge IPM 2 224 deeaet eee rro ao raso 6 10 Mail merge Word 2 4 eae Be ee oe ee ee ee eee ol ade G 11 AddresS CxO esa pane ee Shen eb eRe Se Ye ee eke eee eRe ee Bee 7 Analysis menu Vals Project Siatisiies lt lt ee bbe ee Ge hee ee eee de we tee AA 184 fe GONT a mm ee 185 7 1 2 Address import 185 Glo paluan CHACO esos rosa amp e645 DR Ge SS Gee AA 185 CLA Address Cheek s see eZee e hoe rosa 185 7 1 5 Duplicate search ddr ree Bee KEE RREEE AAA 186 7 1 6 Robinsomcieck 444 4658 54 522 BRE RE a noria 186 7 1 7 Nixie check A 186 7 1 8 Dispatch properties as oaoa bees AA AA 187 GAS Item properties s sss sre aa 187 7 1 10 Production properties aoa oa a vean AAA 187 legis Payment method c es errorea eo eS OG penaa GS e e na 187 7 1 12 Adressdialog properties oa a a a a a 188 Telela Gross CODECS 6 EK KAS EHS a A AA 188 Tal LE Discounts 2444 AAA 188 lO NetCar e 6 gue so BA RR Re Ee Ow we Ee Oe we Sw we ee 189 TMG Production s asa iire samd sa cadi aap cea ee bee ese Shee 189 7 1 17 Data exchange Deutsche Post 2 2 20 0 000000 e 189 7 2 Address spread by ZIP 189 7 3 Address spread by cities 190 7 4 Spread by provinces a
140. Ho Addezzes Mat kg Gross ka Type Type R 1 ETTAN E AP 94 RR BG AR B RA 7 0 AR 70 AR 70 AA 75 AR 7 5 RA 7 5 RR ie HH 94 RR 6 0 AR EO AR 94 RR JO RA 1 RA D AR 225 59 If you defined Partial postings on page 158 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various partial posting lists via the arrow buttons Posting 05 02 14 1 I If more than one pallet have to be produced they will be enumerated in order to help you in always keeping the overview The number informs you on the respective tray s bundle s pallet location Pallet Ho m La Ww wa Pd Ra NNNNA H 172 Pallet target Similar to a tray bundle target a pallet target contains all pallets for the same routing zone RZ first digit of the ZIP or routing region RR first two digits of the ZIP Germany pallets also represent a target All pallet targets are enumerated by Infopost Manager If appropriate show the pallet target number in the table via changing the column layout on page 417 Pallet target Type Label Germany 0 9 Germany 0 9 RZ 2 RZ 2 In the pallet target area you can see e which tray bundle has to be packed on which pallet type RZ RR or Germany pallet and e the pallet s marking 6 2 Tray target Bundle target list This list is for
141. Hotline 242 Import 63 Import Customer data 202 Import from file 49 Import Pack amp Go 41 Import Customer data 202 Individual Katalog dispatch 177 Infopost 154 319 Infopost Manager Wizard 241 Information on field assignment 244 Inkjet printers 421 Insert 279 353 Insert address block 280 Insert Barcode 301 Insert Field 283 Insert Frame 297 Insert image 295 Insert new page 304 Insert sender s instruction 355 Insert signature 298 Insert text 282 International optimization 339 International tab 342 Internet 242 Invalid addresses 293 IPM help 241 Item 142 Item details 342 Item dimensions 143 Item properties 142 items without wrapping 365 Job splitting 372 Key field comparison tab 119 lettershop mode 223 Lines 271 Mail merge IPM 248 Mail merge Word 314 Mailer 206 Main window 9 Major recipient address 72 Map Tool 196 Margins 258 Margins tab 258 272 Margins position frame 272 Menu bar and action buttons 11 Modules 336 MS Access database 420 Mutually align frames 273 Navigation buttons 86 103 Navigation toolbar 278 New Infopost 16 New from project 18 Nixie check 130 Open 27 Optimization 154 Options 89 111 221 Options tab 263 Order management 18 162 231 Order tab 24 Order cancel 162 Order request 18 Order transfer 162 Other tab 260 Overview 12 Overview tab 24 46 167 P O Box address 72 Pack amp Go 38 Page toolbar 279
142. INFOPOST MANAGER j a 3 j ae gt NN o Infopost Manager Address management postage optimization information and forms to post Infopost and Infobrief Deutsche Post OQ Version 8 3 1 03 09 2015 MIS Contents 1 Welcome 2 Main window 2d 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 0 Menu bar and action buttons 0 a a a a a Pro NAT tee eee eee eee eee OU Clicks 246 2st e RGR eee PER RS A Recent Projects 4 aa ck aR ewe ee PROD EO ee eRe KERR EM SBR Result area 2 ok theese Peewee eee oe whee eee doh bba fd kaadu 3 Project menu 3 1 3 2 3 9 3 4 3 0 3 6 NA 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 New Tao pO ais ss aro tera New MOD DIOG 444 6k mada oo aa ROS AS Request order o rescate a ool Billteraud 0d sos s e gaisma aseos rra cr dize HCMC arias AAA 3 3 3 Request details es nestor rra Boe Crate asas arras As Close Geo ee Gib aasss ee eee eau eee eee Bete sees ee ees DANCING cas eres Divide into national international e e Creal Barcia CO roscar as ee eR ra AA Import Pack 2 GO es ue eee eee es eh Oe ee eee AAA Data Dae acc mn oso RAE eee See eee we SSS o o 6685 34 GEE E SEES ERA REA E Ee Ee eM BREESE HE EGS 3 13 1 Order management 2 2 aan ae byw we do 6 eee ee Ee ew ee ee EG 2 o Gh GE ow Oia eb ee AA Addresses menu mpar rom Ll ia See we eee en ee ER GER a Ads DOPO OPONE aces iri
143. IPM_PackAnd6 amp os File name without extension 5 Suggest default file names Suggest user defined file name ProjectseProject name Activate option Use alternative configuration for function to use the customized settings The options available here are the same as for the action spanning settings for directories on the preceding page and file names on the previous page 240 9 Help menu Contents 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 Infopost Manager Wizard as sss sse ceske sada katanda 241 IPAE DOD seresa dad ee aaa AAA A 241 POUNNG 4 ee SEE SR RE ROR EME AAA 242 Fnternet on eee hee ewe eee ae eee eS eae ee ee ee eG 242 Brochures 4 4 48 6404546 AAA ee ESS ES ES 242 ADON 2444s ee eo ARIAS eee a eee eee eee 242 Infopost M anager Wizard IPM Help Hotline Internet Brochures About From this menu you can control the Infopost Manager Wizard access the current postal regulations and make changes to your license details 9 1 Infopost Manager Wizard You can use this menu item to launch or exit the Infopost Manager Wizard The Infopost Manager Wizard is largely self explanatory It starts up in a separate window and is available to accompany you throughout your complete Infopost campaign If you need help it can explain the next step point out possible problems and can immediately call the corresponding functions if requested Of course it knows all Infopost regulations You
144. International ig Demo Professional ig Demo Standard fa Demo Vano Description Demo DHL Infopost Demo International Demo Professional Demo Standard Demo Wario Customer Muster AG Musterh Muster AG Musterh Muster AG Muesterh Bauer Each GmbH Muster AG Musterh Concades case 1 folder 5IPM projecte If you want to close the hit list and return to the folder view click the icon in the toolbar or jump to the respective folder by choosing the context menu item Open upper folder a Projects 5 Demo Mailing ipm Sy Demo Mailings O deutsch 3 englisch gt Hilfe EJ Hit list The hit list will not get lost but can be shown at any time by selecting it in the folder tree In addition to that the recently used search criteria can be reselected in the dropdown menu of the field Find The search will not be reset unless the project explorer is closed Edit columns You can change the table layout via the menu item View Edit columns 31 Ee Position 2 4 4 A E P a Mare Visible FE Description Customer Status Delivery Created on Changed on In folder Order management Order no DPAG Order no customer Alignment left justified left justified left justified left justified left justified left justified left justitied left justified left justitied left justified left justified Last transter left justified Pos 11 Width 1421 Alignment leftjustiia
145. KF Order number customer 0123456789 140121400000013 Project tab This tab is only available for orders which an Infopost Manager project is still assigned to Here all properties of the project are listed The list contains in general the same information which can be found in the project properties on page 42 Overview Order Project Project Mame Neues Projekt Description Folder Project root director Sender Bauer Kirch GmbH Monschau ERP 0123456789 Mailer Bauer Kirch GmbH Monechau EKF 0123456789 Project duration minutes Created on 21 01 2014 09 38 45 Changed on 21 01 2014 09 46 17 Info none 25 Ee 3 3 4 Create If you want to create a new project in Infopost Manager which is based on an order stored on Deutsche Post s exchange server click the Create new project button or choose the identical item of the Projects menu If the order on Deutsche Post s exchange server should already contain a shipping schedule i e a list of all trays resp bundles and pallets to be posted it is impossible to create a new project based on this order since it can be assumed that the suitable order resp the project has been already produced or is in the process of production and thus can no longer be modified In particular it is impossible to create new projects for partial posting orders because shipping schedules are mandatorily deposited for such orders Infopost Manager creates a new p
146. Kong Hungary Irelarid Country group International International International International International International International International International International International International International International International International International k i General Transport service County specific Number Trep sry Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy Economy 1 Economy 42 Economy 1 Economy 26 Economy 21 Economy haber sb al A E annn 4 mr J gt Transport Economy Transport Priority Show only addresses which are written to Select the respective country via mouse click and click the button with the desired transport service afterwards Hint 1 If you want to select country blocks choose the block s first country keep the Shift key pressed and click the last one All countries in between will be selected If you want to select multiple countries which are not concentrated in a block click them separately while keeping the Ctrl key pressed Hint 2 Click another column title to change the sorting criterion click the same column title to invert the sorting order If you take the before mentioned hints into account you can comfortably and effectively determine the transport service of your desired countries When opening the tab only those countries are shown per default f
147. P OST INTERNATIONAL Eir Service der Oeutschen Fost ALLEMAGNE Port pay The well known functions like motif or scaling are available either The Infopost Manager ensures that only appropriate options for a valid franking mark can be chosen Transport service If international postings have to be transported with priority they have to be marked with a corre sponding label Edit properties General Transport service View 8 colored O black white PRIORITY PRIORITAIRE LUFT POST This position frame generates this You can choose whether it should be printed in color or black white 354 Ho Te 15 2 3 4 This selection has to be made for Infopost International only Please note that other types of service as well as non priority items Economy are not need to be marked As a consequence the contents of the position frame is printed empty but is displayed on the screen as a light grey frame for the sake of clarity Sender s instruction On the Sender s instruction tab you can select the language for the sender s instruction in your mail merge document and can place it in your document or on the desired envelope Edit properties General Colors and lines Margins Text Sender s instruction Sender s instruction for international items Wenn unzustellbar zuriick O Fundeliverable return to sender 9 En cas de non remise renvoyer 4 l exp diteur C other T
148. Pallet label Default sie Retrieve to new projecte Infopost Manager handles the marking of the bundle routing labels after printing you only have to affix them to the bundles according to the entries of the bundle list on page 169 Other than print the tray routing labels you can specify the format here Decide whether you want to print one label on DIN A5 pages two labels on DIN A4 pages or four labels on DIN A3 pages Bundle labels for ZIP bundles are not required according to the postal regulations If you want to exercise this option activate this check box Pallet routing label Similar to the tray and bundle labels you can print the pallet labels here 178 ie Routing labels Tray label Format Tray label Default Alta Pallet label Pallet label Default Pele Retrieve to new projecte Common options The current default template is shown in field Tray routing label resp Bundle routing label Execute the following actions with the buttons on the right of this field Icon Description E If you click this button you will see a preview on the current page of the label prior to printing This button calls the print dialog on page 261 for routing labels Before starting the prints you can set the printer properties to your needs If you click this button you will run the export on page 323 of the tray resp bundle routing label information You can use the exported data to create the routing lab
149. Post AG acceptance office to determine a separate acceptance office for the current partial posting This office can vary from the global one You can click the button Select acceptance office to get a list from which you can choose the corresponding office 160 Description In this area you can set a designation for the current partial posting You can choose between an automatic description consisting of date name of the supplier partial posting number and a manual description Click the OK to go to the Content tab Content tab o General Conter Pallet targets Show available entries only Type Label Addresses Pallets Gross kg Post To 252 470 3 1 8341 931 1 HRS 614 8 OOOOOOU A partial posting is composed of the items belonging to a particular tray bundle respectively pallet targets i e routing zones respectively regions have to be posted jointly and in ascending order If you activate the option Show available entries only you will see only those targets which have not yet been allocated to another partial posting Tick the targets which you would like to send simultaneously in a partial posting Please note that the first partial posting must total at least 4 000 items In the summary table you will be able to see in each case the status of the current partial posting of the partial postings which have already been defined and of the items which have not been allocated yet as well a
150. Preview Mame Description Size crn 4 DIN A4 hoch 21 00 x 29 70 W DIN 44 quer 29 70 x 21 00 DIN A5 hoch 14 80 x 21 00 DIN AS quer 21 00 14 80 Y DIN AB hoch 10 50 14 80 Y DIN AB quer 14 20 10 50 Dette Properties 11 18 Background You will be directed to the Background tab of the current document s properties Execute this command if you want to define a water mark for your document See Background tab on page 258 for a detailed explanation 252 Document Preview Insert Delete Only for positioning Print also Print in best quality Position and size Original size 1005 11 1 9 Properties General tab Belspielumechlag ipd Description About Folder CAU sers Public Documents Deutsche Post AGA nfopost Hanager Data Docu SE samples Size 20 8 KB 82 743 Bytes Created on 19 03 2001 15 17 19 Changedo 26 07 2010 10 14 49 Description Here you can add any other description to the document name which simultaneously serves as file name About In this text field you can enter more information on the current document 253 Folder Infopost Manager shows the directory path where the current document is saved Size You can see the current file size of your document here Created This field indicates the date when the document was created Changed This date shows when the document was changed last Paper tab On this tab you can choose the pape
151. Project name The text field will now contain the value C AddressesProjectProject name If you now create project Mailing and start to import your addresses the file select dialog will automat ically suggest the directory C AddressesMailing e If the directory as defined above does not exist the last used directory will be suggested instead Ee Export presettings Here you can specify the directories you want to export your results to With activated option Create non existing directories without prompt Infopost manager will silently create missing directories If this option is not active you will be prompted whenever a directory has to be created Select option Suggest last used export directory across projects if you routinely export your results always to the same directory Option User defined configuration allows for extended settings 238 Settings for directones and file names Export Directory Suggest last used export directory across projects Suggest last used import directory of project 5 Suggest user defined export directory File name without extension Suggest default file names Suggest user defined file name User defined export settings for selected functions Function Configuration Field structure address management Default Production and posting documents Default Production lists Default Customer index export Default IM Routing labels Default
152. SIS ass arar sa 132 MOPeESSOIaloe ia a A A YE wie eS eS 134 Aol DECLINA 134 4 9 2 Create codes waked a AAGREBEHR AEE SES SEAS EEE e EES 138 4 9 3 Create export fille e 138 them for postal correctness and where appropriate to remove any duplicates 48 fo 4 1 Import from file Use this dialog window to select the address file to be used for your project and to start importing the contained data Hints regarding data security data protection Address data you have imported for a mailing and which can be viewed and edited in the address manage ment on page 66 will be stored unencrypted and hence unauthorized persons will be able to read them even if Infopost Manager itself cannot be started by unauthorized persons due to its password protection Please make sure on your own responsibility that project data is stored securely and if appropriate deleted in time a Import address file Bb Suchen in ji Examples O t epr z Name Anderungsdatum Typ pie 5y Adressen Labelformat acedb 17 06 2013 11 17 ACCDB Datei Zuletzt besucht E Adressen xls 31 05 0005 17 23 Microsoft Excel Ar T x International xds 14 11 2014 11 57 Microsoft Excel Ar Eh National dbf 08 09 2006 14 16 OpenOffice org XA 1 611 KB Desktop Regional tet 08 09 2006 09 39 Textdokument 114 KB Netraerk Dateiname Adressenads Intemational ads Datetyp All fies bd csv asc pm dbf ads xa mdb acedb
153. Separate printjob per 500 Confirm print job individually By activating option separate print job per you can choose from the drop down menu whether or not you want to generate a separate print job for each category e g tray or tray target if it is deactivated all items will be printed within one single print job With this function you can for example quite easily address a printer pool Just specify the pool instead of a printer and it will then distribute the various print jobs to the various printers in the printer pool 264 ie If option Confirm print job individually is activated as well you can and have to decide for every print job whether or not you want to print or skip it Page area Page area O al Current page O Pages O From page all pages w Everything If you have chosen this option all pages of a multi page document are printed Current page Choose this option if you want to print the current page only e g to check the printout of a newly created page Pages In this field you can print out specified pages or page areas of your multi page document Single pages are separated from each other by commas page areas are indicated by dashes e g 1 2 5 7 10 From page With this option you can choose to print odd or even numbered pages Indicate the first page and specify whether odd or even pages shall be printed For example you can use this functionality for printing double sided l
154. Sos 176 6 5 Individual Katalog dispatch o 2 ee eee 177 6 6 Routing labels lt lt beh sd Hae a WA we ed OH Re SS 177 6 1 Posting LISTS sa asa AA AAA AR 180 6 8 Production and posting documents s s ss so s e s s e e e e e e e oo ee 182 6 9 Mail merge IPM 2 223 922012290000 eee SSH 032000 182 6 10 Mail merge Word gt sa s ociosos sar 183 6 11 Address export 422605844028 82 SSS HRY ridad 183 You can use this menu to print the lists labels and forms required for production and posting and to start mail merge and address export procedures This menu provides you with additional lists besides the necessary posting list which are helpful when packing the items into trays or bundles If you make changes to your addresses or to the item production or payment method properties after having printed these lists and the tray or bundle labels you must print all forms again because any minor alteration to one of these areas may have a major impact on the sequence of sorting on postage optimization on the posting list and on mail merge or address export Modules International optimization Vario and Job splitting With activated module International optimization you will be able to access the international production lists via a new menu item If appropriate the activated Vario module extends the production lists and the routing labels by the information about the produced variant Comparable to this the J
155. a 191 7 5 Spread by Nielsen regions aa a 192 7 6 Address spread by routing regions 2 193 7 7 Address spread by routing zones aa a 194 7 8 Address spread by countries a a a 195 eo Nop TOC wu a he eee se eee eee eee eee eR RS eee ee 196 Extras menu 200 8 1 Customer index uniera 201 Sila separa AAA AAA 202 Slds EU a ss eee ee eee ee ee ee des 203 Slum FPIOlels 4 664665 eee ene aos A ebesa 206 Cul Bd ora sra A A 206 Ss Sender Mailer s as ae ss ee nee ee aaa 208 6 lla Soener averia ew eee drid ee se ee eS o 208 O22 IDG cetacean eee eee ewe Ree ee eee eh eee eRe Eee ee eee 209 Soe BIOs teen an ee dee beh ee wea eee d se bhb tae whe ee e 210 8 2 4 Sender Mailer o ups rra teedee dh oe ed Shoe 210 COs ro 4 6 eae a Be ee eee he oe oo ee ER Bee ewe ee ees 210 Bo loa oe ew eRe ee Re eee eae ee ee Pee ee Se 211 8 4 Responseplus assistant 2 1 a a 211 8 5 Change password 6 244 ah eae eS oe OS ae ew we ee 213 8 6 User administration oso eee HERS EEE EES EE oe Ee ESS 214 Sod Weer Gata 2244 ee CBee e Ce ee ee ee eee ee eee EES EEE eee 215 50 2 User Tete cia eae keene kee eee Eee eho ee eS As 215 Se DUGW lee faa tae kee eee eRe ER EER EEE a eee ee 217 8 9 Acceptance ONCS sa aora aeaa Aaa AAA 218 85 9 AIP geach o a a sasesana ikana akea eee tbe eee ee Bee wae eee 218 8 10 Update address check a 220 SIL OpiONS ase haae aaeeaeeaseeedabueeueheaeeeuowaetvun dc att
156. a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network 8 11 5 Other POSTCARD Using POSTCARD you can cashlessly pay all products and services of Deutsche Post in all German Post agencies and major acceptance offices 220 Tie 8 11 6 IT franking General AFMAFRANKIT POSTCARD Card limit MA EUR The card limit is the maximal amount available for cashless payment per day If You exceed the limit you can pay the Change request remaining amount in specie Operational mode Use working copies default setting Use project files O Ask if project size exceeds 25 MB Printing E Print application acronym instead of name You can enter on this tab the limit for your POSTCARD Clicking the button Change request calls a fax template which you print as limit change order If you specified Crossed check or Direct debit as Payment method on page 156 an error message will appear prior to printing the posting lists if the charge exceeds the POSTCARD limit Operational mode At this point you can specify whether or not Infopost Manager shall Use working copies If you are working with working copies all modifications of the project are transient as long as you do not explicitly save the project You can recognize a project with modifications if the project name in the project window s caption is followed by an asterisk Project Addresses Preparation Resulte Analysis Ext
157. a oe Ge esas ee A 12 Automatic AMAS i 22 do Bk bee ra MUDO anar A ee ADA Import from file only ZIP ooossoenessorsess See aa d i oe get 4 2 2 Import from file Label format 0 0 0 0000002000 Ades Import via ADO 22 pe eas ee een tweieeoiab ous oe eee oe a Ea a 4 2 4 Import via ADO only ZIP 2 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 00202 ee eee 4 2 5 Import via ADO Label format o 0 2 00000000040 Address management oaoa a a 4 3 1 Address management 4 e406 ba ae sa as eS WO MO esas sa ARA E WI pee aeee oe eeu eee BERG H OTR ee ee eee d ewe eeeenas 2 Ao IEXIDAS 3 00 odie a bee bee Ae eee eee ee e ss Salutation Check acia 644 eRe ewe ee eRe E Adde Options oro sois s bopa aa e aa eee ESE S ee Re RE o a AAs Dal 6 4 84 es bec BERR a SEE Se HERR ss Age REIS s oso 4k ss eee kee ea eh eT 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 AA First name st secos o ess reas ee CERES EE Address Check ee ee te ee a Ads Options co 0 rss eee eee eee eee eee eee ee A MEE TE HG no NE Noe Westits 24 24 th hwo se ORR EEE AA eS Diiplicate search 2 544444 49 2434 rra der AGA COLONOS caos errar eB ewe we ee MeO ICUS 8a hae BERBER EERE E Robinson check css dire 4 7 1 Installation Update oros Aids IEXXECUI N 646 G4 be ee ewe ER ORO ERA A doos RONE 4 ae bbeen ete we deka ee ee eeaee eee A ee Nixie check Esso tasas ee Ree eS eRe ee SE dede ODO 2224465547 HSS PERE eR EER EERE SSE eee eee eS OS 2
158. a type best describing your addresses Separator fields are separated by characters such as a semicolon or tab O Fined width felds are ordered in columns which may be sub divided by spaces ale Start import in line 1 Sourcefile E Line 1 contains field descriptor Address preview File C SUsers Public Documents Deutsche Post AGSInfopost M anager D ata xamples Aegional twt Muller GmbH Werk Hamburg Here Hubert Rronenberg Sch A E datacontrol Systemtechnik GmbH Herr Ludwig Geis AAC Atlantic Auto Caravan GmbH Frau Fritz Florath abe Werbung Alfred Berkholz CmbH GHA Herr Dre L Geisa AC Service mbA Max T Max Spaleck Kleine Bahnstr_ 10 Haenelt amp Co 7 Herr B_ Haskamp Grobe Backerstr 13 Ahrens EKG Betonsteinwerke Hamburg Frau Tilla Bramlage Alphabeta Gerda GmbH Here Heinz Geck Steindamm 91 Alphachemie GmbH Herr Dr Clemens van Loyen Alte Sel Altmann amp Bohning EG Herre Jul Pet El rner Ottens maa e rrm mm TT m mee TT mn orem ul Sw ow ook wee de de In the first step the wizard automatically recognizes whether the fields in the text file are separated by characters or a fixed width format is available Thus you will not have to select the file type a Text file wizard select
159. address file will then have to be recreated Data fields which are already used in the Word document are shown grayed out and thus cannot be deactivated As soon as the respective field is deleted from the document this will become possible again and you can switch to the Choose data fields window in order to disable it Use the delivery fields generated by Infopost Manager when processing your addresses with Microsoft Word in order to ensure that the results of the address check the duplicate search and optimization are also available Additionally the delivery fields allow you to benefit from the normalization of the address fields in one column you no longer have to work with several fields for major recipient street and P O Box address and for the respective ZIPs e Data fields of category Additional address fields on page 400 If all settings are done click the Open with Word button Infopost Manager now launches Microsoft Word on the current page with the specified document and links it with the defined address file as data source use existing address file If you already assigned a Word document to the current project this option is activated You can see the data source which is linked to the Word document_in the field File Another data source can be assigned without having to recreate it by clicking the E button Use this functionality to generate the data sources for the various dispatches in advance Give
160. aeuee 221 SILL Gal 2 eed eee ee eR Oe hae ee ee ee ee a a 222 CIR USE lt lt bbw owe oh eee eee REE ee ee OK ew oe Se 223 So d 1esChUINGS st 4e eb bbe ee een eee GS eee eee SS EEG 224 Sid Produci n es aceros oe sees oa 226 So OVUM o e taaan 226 S 11 6 Internet 4226584584882 4 5 6ee84 56664 64 6 8 8 See ue eas 22 i 8 11 7 Order management vis e 8 e Er a o e S18 Data Dack p ee eee ta ee BRK Ree eee eee ee ee eee See 8 11 9 Administrator 2 lt 4 lt 5 e lt e84 ev bbe Ree YE aera EEE eR SALIO Telemetry morra ee Ra OA ee SO ee es A Re 8 11 11 Directories and file names a a a a a a 9 Help menu 9 1 Infopost Manager Wizard ooa aa dl IPM help gt aa Enna ee ee ea eee eee eee eee eo ee ee Voy LOLI oe sie osas oA ar AE 9 5 Brochures s es od SR we AA A FR OG OO 2246408 2 bea eee eee ee eee eee eee eee Peewee Eee 10 Information on field assignment 10 1 Address files and their assignments Examples 00004 11 Mail merge IPM Li Ae Dr saas 4 2 4X 4 we Ek oe EES Oe BORE ES ee oS Re oe ee de INCW causes esoo rada Tide OCR sv aa aa A Dee ew Ee Pico CODE 3k kaa eee a ee RA ee EA MACS abe eee eee bese we eee eee eee se bes oe ees se be a Wee SV ss E E ENE DIVAS a sosa caos asa ee amp ae ILLT Edit ormat E Aw eS LAZOS Background e ee ee a SAA ULA Properti 4 ee ok eee ERE wR eee eS 4 es ee Ew GY MOP AEREA 11 1 11 Print current address 11 1 12Save as PD
161. age 280 but mind the regulations of Deutsche Post for using Premiumadress machine readable fonts maximal 10 lines etc Font Here you can choose another font for the address block The latter has to be printed using a machine readable font in order to be machine processable Thus do not use any font marked with a red cross in the icon q v machine readable fonts on page 308 W Antique Olive 12 Punkt E Arial 10 Punkt You can see the chosen font in a preview area below the drop down menu Optional fields The field selection in this area is similar to the address block on page 280 but maximal 6 rows are possible for Premiumadress 290 Premiumadress tab On this tab sheet you can specify all settings for the data matrix code ee _ Edit properties General Address Premiumadres Product variant Fixed value 5 Value from field Settings Contractual partner Sender Muster AG Wusterhausen 123456789 ERP 122456789 O Mailer Muster AG Wusterhausen 123456789 EKF 123456769 5 Paver Muster AG Musterhausen 123456789 ERP 123456709 O other Premiumadress ID fired value 5 Value from field settings User speciic data fired value O Value from field Settings Data format alphanumerical A Pretix Other Values Fields info line Product variant There are two possibilities for selecting a product variant for Premiumadress e If you want to send all
162. al User Presettings AFM FRANKIT Other Order management IT franking Data backup Administrator Login 5 Do not suggest user name Suggest Windows user name as user name Automatic login Suggest last user name Data protection Execute data protection assistant at application start 15 Logging Logging active Anonymize logging Limit number days in log file Login In this area you can choose if and which user name Infopost Manager shall suggest for login Infopost Manager is networkable That is your Windows authentication is enough to log into Infopost Manager as well Activate the option automatic login to make use of this feature Infopost Manager will then use the name of the user currently logged into Windows and will start without user name or password Input In order to use automatic login you need to enter the Windows user name in the respective user s field Network login cf User administration on page 214 Data protection Activate the option Execute data protection assistant at application start in order to regularly delete address data of older projects Details about the means of project anonymization can be found in chapter project explorer on page 34 Specify how often Infopost Manager should search for old projects and the number of days until a project is potentially old Logging If you activate the option Logging active all user activities on page 217 wil
163. ally 261 need to be printed on Overview Document Envelopes DIN lang 30 818 addresses Printing 30 818 Envelopes Document This area shows the selected document type and the number of addresses to be printed for the current category on page 319 Printing This value corresponds to the number of pages or labels to be printed in the current print job As soon as you make changes to the options in the address area e g by printing only a specific number of addresses or trays this value will be adjusted Address area Addresses a All O Current address 5 Addresses 1 Everything Infopost Manager uses this function to print all addresses in the category currently selected Infopost or remaining items Please remember to print out produce and post the items for all sub categories of your project Current address You can use this option to print only the currently selected address e g for a test print or for printing individual addresses again Addresses Here you can choose to print an individual address or several consecutive addresses Single sheets are separated by semicolons ranges by dashes for example 1 3 or 5 12 This option is particularly helpful if several addresses are to be printed again Filter With Infopost Manager you can filter according to the following criteria e Bundles Pallets e Bundle Pallet targets This enables you to print the addresses for Infopost block by block Start
164. alutation Altern atin The option Accept suggestion of the field analysis replaces your selection by the automatically recog nized assignment or perhaps by an empty field Gender The application uses this field type for the automatic generation on page 83 of the correct salutation As soon as you select this type Infopost Manager passes all addresses and reports the different field contents In the appearing dialog you can now assign the field contents to the favored gender Infopost 5 Manager supports you with this task He already knows the most popular field contents for genders and submits you with respective proposals a Assign field contents sender Field content Quantity Assignment lt E mptp gt 3265 female 16164 male of 3 field contents without assignment Assign kd Reset assignment Use the Assign button resp directly select in the table the desired gender for each reported field content Automatic field assignment If the automatic field analysis should not lead to those results which you expected or if you want to manually assign all fields ab initio you can reset all field assignments via this menu item Please note that this actions can be undone only in a time consuming way by accepting the suggestion of the field analysis for every single field Override the automatic field analysis and assignment for future projects by ticking option Deactivate automatic field assignment f
165. amp Go file with a password Activate the option Protection enter the password you would like to use and repeat it in the subsequent field Note that the password for the Pack amp Go file cannot be reset or changed Your project data is bound to your installation of Infopost Manager In order to use the created Pack amp Go file on a different machine you will have to remove this protection In order to do so activate the option Remove project protection In order to prevent accidental changes being made after a project has been sent as Pack amp Go file you may activate the option Locally lock project for further processing You can see this lock in the project properties on page 42 in the status line Those projects can be unlocked using the Release for editing on the previous page menu item 38 Target Here you can specify the destination where the Pack amp Go file will be created Pack amp Go assistent step 2 of 3 Documents Indude mail merge documents Indude mail merge documents Word Indude user defined routing and bundle labels Comment Demo project Documents In this area you can specify which documents will be included into the Pack amp Go file Comment Pack amp Go files can be provided with notes which will be shown in a separate dialog during import of this file Just fill in your comments in the respective field _ Pack amp Go assistent step 3 of Anonymize Anonymize projec
166. an be used to assign the desired variant to the respective addresses Addresses menu With this menu you access the new functions for the import and the address management Alterna tively you can also click the respective buttons on the menu bar on page 11 Import Within the import you will find the additional field Variant Vario for the automatic analysis on page 54 as well as for the manual field assignment on page 56 1 s Nachname 2 Varnante oa A inz contains contains me O Last name anant Marno Y pi Schall Wi Kemper Hofmann Baersch Baersch Mittermarr ho fs A A C Langenteld B C E E 1d Berghoter B C Rontgen Please note that you should assign a variant to each address in your import database before starting the import Even if all addresses of one database should make up one variant only an additional field is useful as Infopost Manager otherwise has no information on variants and thus either will sort out all addresses or assign them to the standard variant 359 Rio 15 3 2 2 Ye In address management you can use the Multi Change on page 71 method to assign consistent variants to your selected or filtered addresses even after the import The new field Variant Vario will certainly also be considered for future import templates on page 60 Address management Normally you will have assigned a variant to each address before importing it i e the new address
167. ance create a separate file for each partial posting during one export process 326 To 14 1 2 5pecify output file First define which Addresses shall be exported and specify the file format and name Output format File format ES fle es Esport file 0 Save Addresses in one file Extended settings O Save Addresses per category in separate file Save Addresses filtered into file s Type Infopost National Tray targets Save in 233 separate files Director CSU sers Public Documents File name Addresses Explanation Mew Project Infopost National Tray targets 23 508 Infopozt tems Mew Project Infopost National TrT gt 111 New Project Infopost National TrT gt 395 Mew Project Infopost National TrTgt3 Ad Mew Project Infopost National TrTatb 111 Mew Project Infopost National Trl gti al Mew Project Infopost National TrTot3 53 blenn Dri Laken hl abies TT d En Load template Filters can only be applied to addresses of category Infopost since remaining items have to be dispatched separately and can be kept unsorted Directory Directory C 4 Users Public Documents Bie In this line you can define the target directory of the address export If you want to store the file into another directory or if you want to rename it click the button You have instant access to the recent and some system specific default export directories via the button Director
168. antity needed for Infopost items These items can only be delivered to major acceptance offices When producing as Individual Katalog dispatch specific production lists are available in the Results menu under the option Individual Katalog dispatch on page 177 In addition Infopost Manager s mail merge on page 249 will be extended to a corresponding address category International optimization module The activated module International optimization will enable you to dispatch international products like International letters at kilo rate either Furthermore you can define the way international items should be shipped Details can be found in chapter nternational optimization on page 345 5 2 Item properties All required information on the dimensions the content and the franking for the items is entered in this dialog box In the lower part of the window information on the charges due for the categories Infopost and remaining items are always available Infopost Manager automatically classifies the items into the categories Infopost and remaining items during postage optimization and always provides the optimal spread with the cheapest charges It is important that the items for these categories have to be produced separately and posted with a separate posting list for Infopost Remaining items are posted as normal letters franked with stamps or by machine 142 5 2 1 Modules International optimization and Vario If th
169. applications into the following formats e CSV file e PDF e Excel e HTML Text tabs separated Print Print options Export Close 2 CSV file 24 Excel a HTML PDF Text tabs separated ML Clipboard Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg St le Lower Saxony Bargstedt Brest Harsefeld Lower Saxony Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Brask Hamburg Stapelfeld Schleswig Holstei Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Clicking the Export button opens a dropdown menu where you can select the format In the subsequent dialog window you can specify the export file s name and target directory F poi a poe pa po e p po pod da je e j p j j i Unused sen egion Duet e 45 8 27 16 8 19 12 2 205 entries Organisieren Neuer Ordner a 7 Name Anderungsdaturr Typ Gr e Es wurden keine Suchergebnisse gefunden Dateiname Neues Projekt Adressvertellung nach PLZ cov Microsoft Excel CSV Dater durch Kommata getrennte Werte csv Ordner ausblenden A 4 Print Preview A variety of statistics result reports and lists is offered during a project created with Infopost Manager which you can view print or export as PDF file if appropriate The following identical options are available for these reports You can browse through the pages o
170. ara GS lo SD Dham GrabH Lame Cubanas ara T al La E Marat Am lara 7 i Guide Hechas GmbH Fredrch E bad Eb 1 23 OS Bebo ura ian GmbH Ca 5 Cubanas il 24 EEH DATALRE Setembre e Dita rbebirg Dri de Tarpan 103 25 Diane Molalobelacharsesduny Uchar ik 176 iE dance Pharma 56001 Enchenk 1 GF PD dedire Gg rire Ales Hii i Schroth Goby epa Chains 1258 2S rs AL Ca BG See Lis 125 30 Lahore Faberin 27 1 Por iah Eb Hare scales A mg 27 E Lead iGabH u Co Wilco Pobla 2 3 Fabs ll ras Entra a Iria TA cM Landes Pec age nd e kepi TH ALLE pbi 67 Maire E 5 UA oh Chemical Corra Lidl Mischa 5 E Hadad Dic bd Deckers E D Dersle 5 A Holden 0 10 G Piela FOG hhh ih Cn Emai TO 40 hera Fublarbas Gibt Pore Sa 1 1 41 Hara Seiber Um Pura So A 4 Bap Far L Prete rte Fetai El 43 Hutt race Prager amibH Estarei J ES Fed ot 13 reco at are When starting to import the addresses Infopost Manager analyzes the structure and content of the source file In the line below the icon bar the field names from the source file and the proposed assignments of the analysis are listed Strate wf contains Street Street number Z Rathausstr 12 Magdeburger Str 3 Rungedamm 32 Bullerer Berg 3 Schulweg 3 Flachsland 23 Each field which is postally relevant has to be assigned correctly You can see the list of possible assignments offered by Infopost Manager by clicking on the arrow icon of a field 54 1 Kam Hehu m4 Lo F amp SPECTAD Ars frctruenaents
171. arate files is possible ap 1 of 3 Specify outpu First define which Addresses shall be exported and specify the file format and name Output format File format CS file csv ka Settings Esport file 6 Save Addresses in one file Extended settings D Save Addresses per category in separate file Save Addresses filtered into file s Infopost National Tray j Infopost National Tray targets Infopost National Pallets Infopost National Pallet targets Infopost International Tray File name Infopozt International Tray targets Infopost International Pallets Infopost International Pallet targets Directory Mew Projec Load template Y Further advices especially for filter application can be found in chapter Export addresses from results menu on page 323 350 15 2 4 Extras menu 15 2 4 1 Ee Infopost Manager Professional with activated module International optimization offers additional blank forms Blank forms All forms for functionalities which are only available with activated module International optimiza tion are offered in blank format 1 Posting list Infopost International 2 Posting list Letters International at kilo rates 15 3 Vario This module enables you to produce VarioPlus mailshots within a project This module requires the activation of the module Professional on page 337 The functions of the activated module Vario will be directly integrated in
172. arch address check etc are not available Ho This import mode is especially useful whenever you do not want to analyze or edit the address data Please note that due to the lack of details the address block on page 280 of mail merge will not be available You may use a text field on page 282 together with its option Insert field on page 283 instead The option Remove empty lines resulting from empty fields may be appropriate Please note that some services like PREMIUMADRESS require detailed address information and will therefore not be available in this import mode Import from file Label format In principle importing a file with label format works like a normal Import on page 49 The label format is characterized by ZIPs jumping in the various fields i e for one address contains this field in the third line while the next address offers it in the sixth because e g also companyl department and contact person are specified Thus Infopost Manager is not able to analyze the various columns and dependent on the results to propose which field is contained in which column since the contents are varying All fields are exactly imported the way they are available in the import file However you have to specify which fields contain address relevant information by determining address line 1 10 a importing C Users Public Oocuments Deutsche Post AGUntopost ManageriDatalExamples Adressen Labelfonmatacc
173. artial postings on page 158 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various partial posting lists via the arrow buttons Posting 05 02 14 1 e 6 3 Pallet list The pallet list is not required for posting the mails hot but serves as an internal aid provided by Infopost Manager for producing pallets Preview a Print Prirt options Export la zab in Close Pallet Quartiby Pallet target Po Na Met kg Gross kg Tray no fnorm to Tray Auddrecces Type a IE RET 45 50 520 Germany 31 8F 2 610 RZ ES 125 2 643 RZ 127 167 2 736 RA 163 208 2 874 RA 209 250 4 27941 RA 251 283 EE 2317 RZ 1 1 1 2 1 Fi ah z 5 2 6 Pa F 3 8 162 7 2 4011 9 E artist If you defined Partial postings on page 158 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various partial posting lists via the arrow buttons Posting 05 02 14 1 Table The pallet list is sub divided into three areas e Pallet e Quantity e Pallet target In the lower status bar you can read the total number of pallets which was calculated during the optimization based on the given information on the various preparation menu items Pallet
174. ase mind that you have chosen variant clean production on page 368 if you export your addresses j filtered by variants Otherwise the address order in the export files does not match the address order for production 15 4 Job splitting The Job splitting module enables you to spread the production and delivery of your items on differing sub suppliers when producing projects with more than 4 000 items Their items can also be posted on different days Staggering large mail shots can for instance save time and stock space and may relieve the main supplier ces This module requires an activated Professional on page 337 module 372 15 4 1 15 4 1 1 Dividing a mailshot for differing suppliers is only available after a completed optimization and when Data exchange on page 45 with Deutsche Post AG is enabled In addition the first job the first partial posting of a supplier has to comply to minimum of 4 000 items Once you have activated this module on page 336 there will be the new menu item Job split ting Partial postings available enabling you to directly navigate to the settings you need In addition you will get further information about the partial posting jobs in the result area of the main window as well as specified production and posting lists _ y Manage job splitting partial posting Desenplior Posting 05 02 14 1 Posting 06 02 14 2 Posting 07 02 14 3 Posting 08 02 14 4 Preparation menu Date 05
175. at exporting internationally opti mized addresses is still possible Address export is accordingly extended if the module International optimization has been activated International This menu item calls the tray bundle list tray bundle target list pallet and pallet target list for all items of category Infopost International These lists serve as internal aid they aren t required for posting 15 2 3 2 Peer 2 Fie Fini opira Expert Chis Tray laiga Quantity Feet hal Giit jag Tasa 71 4 14 7 175 4 JN Y est Infopost Inten l gt ma a Freier y Print Print opor Espai Coan q rue Cuy Pale ge E Kio Met ikl bros kl Trago can bo Trey a TEE ES These lists do not differ from those for national items regarding the layout There are only other columns and headlines Information on table layout and how tables can be configured printed and exported can be found here on page 417 Posting lists Also all forms required for posting international items will be printed via the dialog window Print postal forms If you refer to chapter Posting lists on page 180 you will find additional explanations about this window Required forms M Infopost oof Posting lists Infopost International Posting lists 2 Notification 2 Pallet notification Phone number for inquires 49 123 4567 09 Sender pe E Specify date 24 01 2014 Pallets will be picked up 352
176. atch properties General Transport service Mode National and International G Only National sort aut international addresses 5 Only International sort out national addresses National products W Allow dispatch as Infopost W Allow extra items to reach higher bulk discounts Send as Infopost E oop Allow dispatch as remaining iter International products Wl Allow dispatch as Infopost International Allow dispatch as remaining ttern Allow dispatch as Letters International at kilo rates Discount 5 kA The properties set here can also be predefined as default for future projects To do so set them once under Extras Options on the tab Settings in the section Apply dispatch properties to all new projects on page 225 General tab Mode In this area you specify which addresses shall be included in the optimization process For instance it is still possible to optimize and dispatch only national addresses although the module International 345 tio ie o optimization has been activated Mode National and International 5 Only National sort out international addresses 5 Only International sort out national addresses Normally you will choose National and International for address lists which also contain international recipients Thus you will receive e g separate tray bundle pallet and posting list
177. atches one of the options mentioned above In the lower right corner you can directly see how many addresses would not be written to with the chosen option After having confirmed your settings by clicking the OK button the results will be shown in the Results window 132 Y OK Cancel Pause View Group overview BH 10 Ho Mame Breet box ZIP City 1 Entran Sensoren G Bengt 27 67053 Ludwigshafen ie Schwridler Packfix G Postfach 240241 42232 Wuppertal Aachener Maschine Rudolfstr 1 11 52070 Aachen Aachener Misch un Vaalser Str 71 52074 Aachen Aachener Printen u Borcherssir 18 52072 Aachen Hellenthal amp Cie Spi Postfach 130 52002 Aachen Ney GmbH Friedhofstr 5 56837 Sankt Juin aba moden Angelika Tiitersburg 37 42277 Viuppertal KEM Kreutzenbed E Postfach 150110 42520 Velbert ABC Oruck GmbH Valdhofer Str 19 69123 Heidelberg Abel Knapper Str 36 58507 L denscheid Lukassowitz Filtha Postfach 1427 s6997 Merspe Management Karr Bayermstr 1 40883 Ratingen PEAK Werkstoff GmbH Siebeneidoer Str 235 42553 Velbert hcad Systeme GmbH Im Miederfeld 4 64293 Darmstadt Lachmann amp Rink n Hagener Str 443 57223 Kreurtal LASogard GmbH Pappelweg 8 10 66687 Wadern NEU MASSIVHAUS Sembadher Str 17 67677 Enkenbach Alsenborn Exact Elo malaria w m e vie Hit 10f 3 362 3 362 hits in total Write to 198 addresses Do not write to 3 174 address The detected Match a
178. b In the Printers area you can see the name of the currently selected printer If necessary you can choose another printer by using the dropdown menu or you can edit the options of the selected printer by clicking the Properties button Print options Printers Mame Del Laser MFP 1815 Properties Printing Line spacing O ofthe line height alternating line colors Area Alignment All unsorted a Portrait Only selected O Landscape Printing area Fit to page Al Pages from Paper Format Tray NS Auswahl Ok Cancel In order to arrange the list more clearly specify a greater line spacing in the Printout area and a gray backeround for every second line In the Area frame you can define whether you want to print only the selected lines or the complete list The values in the Printing area section affect the total number of pages to be printed Here you can choose between all pages or declare dedicated page intervals If the page is not wide enough you can change the page orientation to Landscape in the Orientation area and or activate the option Fit to page Finally you can select the paper format and the paper tray in the Paper section 414 A 3 Export Besides printing lists Infopost Manager is also capable of copying their contents to the clipboard In addition to that the data can be exported for post processing them with other
179. block With that option the application will delete address lines in such a way that the addresses always are complete as required by postal regulations Infopost Manager proceeds hereby in the following order 1 Company3 2 Company2 3 Department 4 Attn You can only select machine readable fonts like Arial Courier or Times New Roman for the address block You can define the behavior of the field Attn on this page if you click the Additional options button Attn Should the name of a contact person be shown in the address block you can specify the layout of line with the data field Attn 401 Extended settings Field properties of atin Show only if salutation is Hern or Frau Pretix Show fields in atin Salutation Tite only with Prof and Dr First name Mame prefix Last name Name suffis Salutation Herr resp Herrn Leave az is Transform Herr to Hern C Transform Hern to Herr The option Show only if salutation is Herr n or Frau is used to leave out the whole line for not personalized addresses If desired you can set a different prefix for this line for example Attn or similar leave this field empty if the line should directly start with Herrn or Frau With the options in the area Salutation Herr resp Herrn you can normalize the salutation i e determine it for all addressed male persons in the same way
180. by a red question mark in pointed brack ets 107 e Address No 1059 Record 5803 Walzholz Kaltwalzwerke Profilbetriebe Harterei Feldm hlenstr 55 58093 Postfach 3880 58038 56085 Address No 1009 Record 2904 Twirl Communications GmbH Industriestr 4 Finnentrop Postfach S723 ANNE ENMNentran Address No 24 Record 2913 Anft GmbH Kunstgieberel Weststr 55c Arnsberg aes Arnsberg lt 75 gt s Status of Street address Postally incorrect Error description Mo such street name existing For this ZIP Y Status of Major recipient address Postally incorrect Error descriptions Mo city name has been specified In the text lines below this address window you will see information on the status of the various address types Thus you can see that a street address was automatically corrected or a P O Box address ignored because it does not comply with the postal regulations A brief error description additionally explains this status information Suggestions for correcting an address Depending on the information available in a data record suggestions are made for correcting the address Probabilities are given for each suggestion which can be used as a selection aid 108 Tie Address No 1363 Record 25566 Write to address Europlast Rohrwerk GmbH Bruchstr 1 Ignore address type STEEL Poo Box Major reopient dq Status of Street address Postally incorrect Error descrip hon No such street name exi
181. caled Thus long addresses may be truncated 312 11 6 Hot Keys In order to make working with mail merge documents even more comfortable several Hot Keys were defined which help you to browse quickly through the various position frames and edit them Via Keyboard Key PageUp PageDown Home End Cursor keys TAB RETURN Via Mouse Mouse Key Left Left as is scroll up in the current page at begin of page move to the previous page scroll down in the current page at end of page move to the next page begin of page top left end of page down right move selected position frames select next object in the object inspector list with a selected text object edit mode else properties Action Key move frame Ctrl change size Shift Keyboard Ctrl Ctrl Shift browse forward page wise through the document browse backwards page wise through the document go to first page go to last page change size proportionally change size with all selected objects properties select all move in only one direction keep aspect ratio Alt move selected position frames in larger steps 313 Ho 12 Mail merge Word Contents 12 1 Settings in Infopost Manager o 314 12 2 Processing in Word 0 1 6 6 64 4 eee eA wee ee ws 316 Beside the internal special word processor on page 249 you can also create and print Micro
182. can close the wizard at any time and then manage the project by yourself You can use the Help Infopost Manager Wizard menu item to launch it again whenever you need to q v Extras Options on page 223 If you reopen a project which you have processed using the wizard it automatically launches at the next uncompleted step You can also call it for explanation of special steps as soon as you start them in the current project 9 2 IPM help This menu item opens this help 241 o o 9 3 Hotline This menu item will open the chapter How to contact Deutsche Post on page 9 4 Internet This menu item provides you with several links to web pages that may be useful for your work Furthermore you can check whether news or updates for Infopost Manager are available online In the settings on page 228 you may also configure to regularly check for news or updates 9 5 Brochures You can read current product brochures about direct marketing using this menu item No brochures are delivered ex works After installing Infopost Manager this menu item allows for down loading the brochures from the Internet If the brochures should be outdated you will be informed via the news check on page 228 or when you open such a brochure You can always download the current brochures free of charge from the Internet A convenient installer will help you updating those files In order to be able to show these brochures an a
183. ccept it via clicking the OK button This window also offers you the possibility to manage your signature pool Using the Delete button you irrecoverably remove a signature from the pool Removing a signature from the pool has not any impact on projects which use the deleted signature because it is not only stored in the pool but also in the project itself This behavior guarantees that projects can be exchanged or sent e g as Pack amp Go file on page 38 and the recipient can work with it nevertheless Clicking the Add button extends the signature pool Edit allows changing the signature properties In both cases the dialog mask Edit signature pops up 298 Edit signature _ Edit signature General Name line Transparency colors Transparency Transparent color Replace color 4 Change colors Replace MO with MN Preview On the General tab you can enter or change the clear designation of the new signature while the Load button adds a graphic You can see the signature directly in the preview area On the Name line tab you can insert the name of the signatory which will be printed in the mail merge document in addition to the signature The font specified in the document will be used On the Transparency colors tab you have two further options 1 Activate option Transparent color if the scanned signature shall be placed e g above a text or if the name line shall also be printed Depe
184. ccount and the fields First name and Last name will be searched Keep this option deactivated if you want to make sure that every company is only written to once 116 Ignore addresses without contact person If a company address is stored several times in your database with and without contact person the duplicate search will collect all such records in one duplicate group Activate this check box if you want to use all records with and without contact person in your mailing Ignore contact persons without first name This option works the same way Suppose you have for a company multiple address records with the same last name of the contact person in your database with and without first name Then the duplicate search will collect all such records in one duplicate group Activate this check box if you want to use all records with and without first name in your mailing Find subsidiaries in same city If you want to look for subsidiaries in the same city those data records where the addresses differ within the same city but where the names are similar are also shown as duplicates e g with subsidiaries of a bank in Berlin or Munich Company 1 Company 2 Street ZIP City Deutsche Post AG Center Filiale K ln 1 Breite Str 6 26 50667 K ln Deutsche Post AG Center Filiale K ln Venloer Str 50823 K ln 30 241 245 Deutsche Post AG Center Filiale K ln Geibelstr 29 31 50931 K ln 41 Deutsche Post AG Center Filiale K
185. ccuracy degree will be shown in a separate column In principle the presentation of the results is similar to the duplicate search on page 120 The main difference is that there are no duplicate groups but simple address tuples OF X Cancel ll Pause 77 View Group overview Fields PE a Ale 18 amp Entran Sensoren GmbH Entran Sensoren GmbH Carl Daume Herr Carl Daume Bensi 27 Benzstr 27 67063 Ludwigshafen Address view Hit 1 of 3 362 sect Do mot write to The table view is comparable to the duplicate search as well 133 ie 4 9 1 y Pausa View e Group overview Edit l aj Address No 1 Nixie address 1 Firma Entran Sensoren GmbH Entran Sensoren GmbH Firma2 Firmas Strabe l Hausnummer Postfach PLZ Strade PLZ Postfach PLZ Grofiempfinger Ort Strabe Ort Postfach Ort Grofempfanger Anrede Titel Yomame Carl Nachname Daume lDetai vien Hit 1 of 3 362 N Da not write to For each shown address you can decide whether or not it shall be written to You already preset this decision by selecting the necessary match accuracy degree in the previous dialog You can call this window once again and specify another match accuracy degree via clicking the button ip 4 9 Adressdialog Infopost Manager supports Adressdialog Deutsche Post s Crossmedia Service Using Adressdialog a fraud resistant code will be created which can be integrated into your mailshot The re
186. cending or descending by number items Pallets As soon as the total net weight exceeds 0 5 tons trays or bundles have to be combined on Euro pallets When producing pallets ensure that the transportation locks bundles and trays are suitable for multiple cargo handling processes The maximal pallet height incl pallet may be 1 8 m Pallets may consist only of one item type either bundles or trays Pallet production properties Activate the check box Also produce if less than 0 5 tons if you want to benefit from possible pallet rebates by producing pallets although this is not required because the total weight does not exceed 0 5 tons 151 e Pallet production properties El Also produce if less than 0 5 tons E Produce stackable pallets Pallet net weight Maximal pallet gross weight Production properties for bundles Max items per pallet Pallets Minimize postage higher production complexity D Minimize production complexity no production rebates 5 Produce pallets dependent on production rebates If you want to stack your produced pallets check Produce stackable pallets Infopost Manager now decides how the various items stored in trays will have to be distributed on the various pallets each but the last being stackable Infopost Manager also takes the reduced maximal weight for stackable pallets of 600 kg in to account Enter t
187. ch are currently installed on your system All other machine readable fonts are excluded from this list Spell check Via the submenu of this menu item you can run and configure the spell check Extras Address management Fl Machine readable fonts mm om i k im Text length check Dictionaries Check images Settings Check This menu command starts the spell check in batch mode All text frames on page 282 are checked one after the other for incorrect words which are shown in a separate window for correction hertelich Skip Replace by Change never herzlich Suggestions Change Change all herzliches herzlichen The incorrect word is displayed in the Not found area while your correction request resides in the Replace with section This can be manually entered or selected form the list of the Suggestions area The Skip button ignores the current word Identical words will be shown again When clicking the Change never button you define that the potentially incorrect word is correct and will no longer be prompted for the remainder of the document If you want to fix your decision for all future documents click the Add button and this word will be included to the user dictionary on the following page 309 Ye The buttons Change and Change all adopt the suggestion item to the document either once or for all identical words Dictionaries In this dialog you define the language of t
188. ch the address is imported Find Find Using this command you search for a specific expression or sub expression in the data Here the usual Find options will be available Find again You can press F3 or Find again to continue searching the database if you still have not found the record you were looking for Goto Enter a specific data record number via the Goto menu item which will be shown immediately Extras Options You can use the Options button to access a number of settings which are useful for examining the current addresses for particular errors Usable Depending on the selected options incorrect address records are marked as not usable 3 Address options Sort out the following addresses as not usable with blank resp nonsensical ZIP F non existing ZIF E invalid ZIP type street address w o specification of street F P 0 Box address w o specification of P O Box Company resp name empty The settings made here are saved with the respective project and automatically reused for the next projects They are only used for German addresses international addresses are unaffected Te Specifically addresses with the following errors can be rejected e address records with blank or weird ZIP field e g special characters or ZIP lt 1000 Bauer Kirch GmbH Am Handwerkerzentrum 25 571 Monschau e address records with non existing ZIP Bauer Kirch GmbH 4m Handwe
189. checked 91 we Ee Ee 4 5 1 Do you want to start the address check Approximately 37 seconds Database E Contains street directories only for those 218 cities with multiple delivery ZIPs As soon as you have run the address check once the respective menu item will get a submenu where you can directly access the report This can be also done at any time via the Quick Clicks on page 13 of the overview item address check If you run the address check once again e g with other options the recent reports can be read via the submenu report archive If you do not want to use the address check for the current project in general uncheck this option by right clicking on the Address check item in the project overview area You will nevertheless be able to launch the address check This function is only for your information Information on the status of the posting routing data used by Infopost Manager can be found via the Help About menu in tab Components Options In this dialog box you choose how the addresses which have been automatically identified as incorrect shall be treated You can use the Default button at any time to undo your settings and restore the preset program options 92 Edit tab Automatically corrected addresses E Show address for editing E Show addresses with changed spelling Mark address for writing to El Keep upper case Incorrect addresses Show address for
190. cial data fields on page 409 204 He Ee e Text tab Edit properties L Colors and lines Margins Text Default font Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Vertical alignment Top 0 Centered Distances Line spacing Percent 100 0 Additional character spacing 0 Empty lines Remove empty lines resulting from empty fields F Remove left spaces in data fields remove right W Smooth lines with data fields remove unnecessary spaces Line break F Allow line breaks in fields Standard font You will see here the standard Infopost Manager font The text properties font size and color can be changed using the Edit text on page 282 button in the right mouse button menu Within the properties of an address block you can derive from this tab whether the current font type is system internal or an added machine readable font on page 308 Distances You can use the option line spacing or Points to adjust the line spacing between the text frames Depending on the option you choose the line spacing will be set proportionally to the chosen font size in percent or absolutely in points 100 percent corresponds to exactly one line Use the option Points if you would like to print out an address block on page 280 with a direct addressing machine Fill in the numbers of points per print head in the appropriate field to avoid lines that overlap the print head and to thus achieve an optimal
191. cific codes outside of Infopost Manager For it select the database field which contains the code to be used Infopost Manager verifies during the code assignment whether or not a login is really unique If not e g because a code coming from the database appears more than once or the combination of user name and password is used manifold Infopost Manager cancels the assignment process Since Infopost Manager does not know neither the used character class nor the used characters for the code the security level of the code cannot be calculated and thus cannot be shown Do select the manual code assignment with extreme caution and make sure that the codes are fairly secure e g against lexical checks 137 4 9 2 4 9 3 Create codes Using menu item Create codes you will assign new codes to all addresses resp create the corresponding PURLs This might especially make sense if the initial question for the code assignment has been answered with No or if codes user name and or password are read from fields whose contents have been changed Either way Infopost Manager takes care during the code assignment that each login remains unique After code creation there are further fields specific for Adresssdialog available in Export on page 408 Create export file This menu item prepares the transfer of the codes for Adressdialog In the dialog window Create Adressdialog export file you can add additional fields to the export fil
192. cipient can use this code to access a personalized Internet web page For instance he can see here tailored order forms update his address information participate in a survey or send some requests to you Adressdialog simplifies resp totally replaces your manual response acquisition Additional information on this service can be found in the Internet at www adressdialog de The unique code which Infopost Manager creates can be integrated in a mail merge document on page 408 later on and thus become accessible to the recipient You will have to export the codes via the menu item Export Adressdialog on page 138 and to transfer the created file to Adressdialog This is necessary for making the unique codes accessible from the personalized web pages As soon as the Adressdialog codes have been assigned the menu item Adressdialog will get a submenu where additional action can be taken Settings Infopost Manager will use a wizard to lead you through the different options for Adressdialog In general you can use the buttons Next and Back to toggle between the steps of the wizard Clicking the button Finished in the respective last step will complete the configuration of Adressdialog In the Preview you can see in every step how typical codes or PURLs will look like depending on your settings 134 Ho Ee Ee fo Preview Code amp NF 6 characters hit probability approx 1 to 898 000 Assumed number of addresses
193. column settings to default 4 4 Salutation check The salutation check determines the gender of the recipient by analyzing the first name and if ap propriate the salutation Consequently the correct salutation can be derived and the respective field can be filled Incorrect or missing salutations will be identified and can be corrected 83 errar Do pon want to start the check Volume 30 818 Addresses Estimated duration lt 1 minute As soon as you have run the salutation check once the respective menu item will get a submenu where you can directly access the report ue If you do not want to use the salutation check for the current project in general uncheck this option by right clicking on the Salutation check item in the project overview area You will nevertheless be able to launch the salutation check This function is only for your information ile 4 4 1 Options In this dialog box you choose how the addresses which have been automatically changed or identified as incorrect shall be treated You can use the Default button at any time to undo your settings and restore the preset program options Set salutation male Herr also replace existing female Frau also replace existing else delete salutation Additional settings activate auto correctiorn activate user defined first name list do not write to incorrect not corrigible addresses hide automatically changed addresses Set salutation
194. continue Show wizard In the Show wizard section you can choose whether the Infopost Manager wizard shall be always visible available only when starting a new project or generally inactive This selection can be changed at any time User On the User tab you can change some individual settings for working with Infopost Manager Intenet Order management IT franking Data backup Login General Presettings AFM FRANKIT Other Projects List of most recently opened projects 20 Entries Environment H For personal use For lettershops Language i German Wizard lt application language English Reset message dialogs M Dialogs Cane Projects Specify in the Projects section how many of the projects recently processed shall be listed in the Project Reopen menu for direct access Environment The mode for personal use targets companies or individuals who want to manage and implement only their own projects The lettershop mode in contrast offers the possibility of implementing projects for customers and saving a variety of data about these customers in the integrated customer index section The menu Extras changes depending on the mode which is selected In personal use mode the first menu item is Sender Mailer while in lettershop mode it is Customers Running projects in lettershop mode imply that projects have to be assigned to customers stored in the
195. cription de Projects which have been closed on page 37 If you nevertheless want to make changes you have to release it for editing Projects which have been locked after the generation of a Pack amp Go file on page 38 Projects which have been paused during salutation check on page 83 Projects which have been paused during address check on page 103 Projects which have been paused during duplicate search on page 126 Projects which have been paused during Robinson check on page 127 Projects which have been paused during nixie check on page 130 Projects which have been paused during the manual transfer of project data to Deutsche Post s data exchange server on page 164 zE ow R E Y a de Folders are particularly useful for managing similar projects You can for instance create separate folders for various products seasons or events such as fairs and manage the respective projects within these folders Various buttons are available in the toolbar which make managing your projects more comfortable and help you to quickly locate a project These buttons call the following functions Using the buttons Back and Forward you can gradually navigate to already opened folders If you want to skip several folders in one step click the small arrows of the buttons You will immediately see a list of all recently visited folders Selecting one of them directly jumps to the respective folder 29 Button Function
196. current page 2 a e 114 14 ResponsepllsS 2 268 6b ee ee wee ee EEE esa ae a SS 11 4 15 Responseplus franking mark 2 e I AO Payment Dit sra o LLE ero ee HPO eR PER EERE A ee eS 11 5 1 Address management 11 5 2 Machine readable fonts ee 19 Spelleheck s wae webs Bes ew Reese ee eee See eee t e BR G4 11 5 4 Text length check a oa LEO HOCKCVS cae ew unk Coe ee we REE Ge ee we ee ee ee Ge 12 Mail merge Word 12 1 Settings in Infopost Manager aoao aa 12 2 Processing in Word an sae eee ORR RRR REEDS HEE RA Ee HER AH 13 Production guideline Lock ilo pOst 2 4 5 Se a we oe e Se See ee SES ee ee Ge ee ee et eee 13 1 1 Production of trays using the tray list 20 2 13 1 2 Production of pallets for Infopost 2 0 0 0 00000022 oe 13 2 Remaining items lt lt sas aaa RE Oe eo ee ew aS 14 Address export 14 1 Export addresses from Results menu 1 a a a 14 1 1 Specify output file 4 22465 6 eee eSB ES Ew oe Hee EE ER EE SEG 14 1 2 Specify format cx bb ka we ee ee wo hh hehe ee a e ee Idd Dtart CXpOll e644 o bee ew Gea ee bee epetG SSeS we a no a 14 2 Export addresses from address management e 14 2 1 Specify output file e e 0 14 2 2 DDEC lorma 624444 225s e AAA EOD 14D oe otro EXPO gave ee ake eee eee ee ee Ree eee e 15 Modules Loeb a E 15 1 1 Feature matrix 15 2 Internati
197. customer index Furthermore you can specify this customer e g as payer during setting the payment type properties Infopost Manager automatically accesses the sender respectively customer data and your personal data as mailer 223 Ee 8 11 3 Language In the Language area you can specify Infopost Manager s language for the graphical user interface Choose between German and English As soon as Infopost Manager restarts the selected language will be available in all menus commands dialog windows lists and the project statistics Additionally the wizard s language can be set to French Italian Spanish Danish Polish or Czech Dialogs Using this button you can reset e Message dialogs e Table views e Window positions und sizes to Infopost Manager default values Resetting message dialogs makes all windows which were closed in the past with the checked box do not show again to appear again as soon as they occur This option is particularly helpful if several users use one computer or if a well experienced Infopost Manager user has to be replaced by another less experienced user e g as a vacation replacement Presettings The settings made on the Presettings tab apply to all new projects Presettings for new projects Show Project properties dialog with new project F Retrieve production properties to new projects E Use routing district optimization for new
198. d 7 Visible The dialog window Edit columns shows all columns which are available in the project explorer s table and their chosen options You can define the column order and width via the fields Pos and Width The dropdown menu Alignment alters the justification left justified centered right justified Columns with text normally are better readable if the text is left justified while columns with numbers should better be right justified Deactivate the check box Visible if you want to hide a column The column settings will be automatically saved by Infopost Manager Column position and width can also be changed using the mouse Click a column header and keep the mouse button pressed Drag the column to its new position and drop it be releasing the mouse button If you navigate the mouse arrow to the right border of a column header it will change its appearance to Now left click the mouse keep the button pressed drag the column to the desired width and release the mouse button Context menu items right mouse button As soon as you have launched the project explorer you can activate additional functions via the right mouse button 32 o He Open a New folder Open upper folder M Cut Insert a Pase Re name Anonymization assistent Move to archive 2 Complete Release for processing Protect E Create Pack Go el Import Pack amp Go Order management Properties Op
199. d Select the desired field and change its Name in the Properties area 329 Rio If you are exporting a field more than once Infopost Manager ensures the uniqueness of the field descriptors to be exported Dependent on the export file format you can additionally specify the field type only with dbf or xls or the field width only with dbf or prn None of these settings needs to be changed you can also use the default settings If you export your data into a fixed field format dbf or prn two additional options will be available in this window Specity the fields and ther order to be used for exporting Define the teld names and if appropriate the held widths to be used for exporting List of fields to be exported Inhalt Address fields Firmal Address fields Firma Address fields Abtelung Additional address fields Attn Additional address fields Deliver Additional address fields Deliver Additional address fields Deliver Additional address fields Country Additional address fields Letter A dross Field E moon hl Descriptor FIR MAT FIRMA ABTEILUNG UHAENDEN USTADR USTPLZ USTORT LAND BRIEFANRED KLIBI BIRT Add Delete Check field widths Up Field properties of FIRMAT Index 1 Content Address helds Firma Mame FIR MAT Field type Alphanumerical T Width ed4 Load template Cancel lt Back News
200. d accept Thesaurus suggestions 99 Show log 217 Spell check 283 Spread by Nielsen regions 192 Spread by provinces 191 Standard variant 366 Status report 62 Step 1 211 Step 2 212 Step 3 212 Street address 72 Summary 213 Table configuration 417 Templates 331 Templates tab 251 Templates mail merge 251 Test print 262 Text file with fixed field width 419 Text file with variable field width 420 Text tab 285 287 Text rotated 286 Thesaurus editor 100 Transport Service tab 346 Tray label 320 Tray list 320 Tray target Bundle target list 173 Tray Bundle list 169 Trays 148 unwrapped items 365 Update address check 220 User administration 214 Variant lists 372 Variants tab 363 370 Vario 357 VarioPlus 357 VarioPlus International 357 Version history 387 View 87 104 275 308 Views 120 Water mark 258 Welcome 8 XML Export 422 XML file 422 ZIP search 218 427 428
201. d to Deutsche Post AG It contains categories of the posting as well as the order number assigned by Deutsche Post AG and its transfer status Overview Project Category Order no DPAG Transfer status Infopost Mational Fa eae T Synchronous 4 Transfer status Infopost National 4435228 The order data at Deutsche Post are up to date Last change Deutsche Post 21 01 2014 09 44 56 Last change IPM 21 01 2014 09 44 56 In the Transfer status area you can see whether the project requires another data exchange This may be the case if relevant data has been altered Details tab This tab shows all relevant data of the order e g your order number or that of Deutsche Post You may select a specific category from the drop down menu 167 Overview Details Category Infopost National Order no DP46 J 7435220 Status PLA DM Type ES Final Mo Date delivery 05 02 2014 12 00 00 Description Neues Projekt Label Customer number EKF Order number customer 0123456789 140121400000013 5 7 5 Open in AM portal This menu item starts your web browser and opens the current project on the respective page of the data exchange portal AM portal 168 Ee 6 Results menu Contents G1 Tray Bundle list ss ses sa ads rss as a OS uw oe owes 169 6 2 Tray target Bundle target list o 173 Gu Palet se eras AAA 174 64 Pallet target list os roses HESS EE OY a we
202. d yourself can be changed afterwards by using the Change button Machine readable fo The application haz identified the following fonts as machine readable 2 Antique Olive 10 Foint Antique Olive 11 Point 3 Antique Olive 12 Point Anal Narrow 11 Point Anal Narrow 12 Point 2 Anal 8 Paint 2 Anal 8 Point bold 2 Anal 9 Paint 2 Anal 9 Point bold 2 Anal 10 Point 2 Anal 10 Point bold View Change Delete all fonts only installed fonts O only system fonts 5 only user fonts You can specify the font size with an accuracy of half points Please note that depending on your screen resolution the differences may be barely perceptible In case of doubt you should check the result with a test print View Use this filter to restrict the selection of the displayed fonts View 3 all fonts E only installed fonts only system fonts E only user forts 308 11 5 3 All fonts Both font types those provided by Infopost Manager and those you added by yourself are shown in this view Fonts not installed on your system are marked with a red cross Only system fonts In this view all fonts which are known to be machine readable are listed Only user fonts This option restricts the selection to those fonts which you personally installed and which you declared being machine readable These are identified with a small figure Only installed fonts In this view you will see only those fonts whi
203. dali Fulteret male Gero Schnutigen male H Lobi Holtman AEC Diuck GmbH dJoref Eemhad Bute Albal Jurgenhake mate Lukescomate Filthans Eurestst Management Kamen Verlag PEAK Wierketolf GmbH Geog Jost male E Ealhoit Y 2 2 a g a 3 a a al unkorn Y y y Y y y y Y y Yi y y Address 1 of 27936 Complemented Gender complemented Salutation complemented Navigation buttons anm You can use the arrow buttons to change between the different data records or to move directly to the first or last data record wf OF Quits the salutation check and saves the automatic or manual changes for the current project Ad dresses for which the Write to address option is not marked are deactivated in the current project and are therefore not written to This marking can be undone in the address management using the Write to address option Cancel Leaves the results view of the salutation check without retrieving automatic or manual changes to the address file Pause Saves the current project and freezes the working status of the salutation check At any time pro gressing the salutation check can be resumed by re opening the project In the meantime no other changes may be carried out to this project 86 View The data records listed as a result of the salutation check may be displayed in two different ways using the View button l as a table View el Machname Diane ma
204. db Table Adresse la b f x Ti OK Cancel Record Fields Aese 1 m conan Address ire 1 ll IDEAL Werk C E Jungeblodt GmbH Co Eskia Karl Miller GmbH Co Merge GmbH Ees GmbH amp Co ELGA Ejektro und Gasapperatebau GmbH Fite Verlag ret Haye EL MED Dr Ing Merge GmbH ELSEN HEMER GMBH Schuhfabrik van Eben GmbH Eling GmbH Elgin Allgemeine Elelciroindustriebau G ELU Elelcino Linian GmbH A le A a khi m m i L E Baf oe ee e e No suggezton ET H Load tempkte Save teampbte as ddrescreda 2 Darbai Address lire 2 Hern Philipo Sdreder Elektrotedhn Fabriken Eekrokedriahe Fabric Harn Henrich Hemma Harn Peter Eauach Frau Ruth Marea ben Ry ove eer aati Hern Robert Fidler KLTSCHEES LITHOS Hern Witihelmn Binger Hern Arnold schmal Geselochaft f r Strahlungsbechnk Hern Jah Oigadhlager elextrotechresche Fabric Hern Hang PURT n PL e e Field 2 of 7 Ea County codes Options Adreserede 3 sf oanig Address line 3 50553 Lippstadt Henn Peber Bausch Henn Artur Monch Meecbecketr 45 Postfach 1306 Holestr 1 Haus der Techrik Henn Adam Opel Postfach 10021115 Henn lar tr Labele Postfach 900323 Postfach 1147 Henn Carl Boddenberg FaldW Cee ers Address ime 4 Postfach w ddrescrede 4 contame Address ire 5 68743 Waghausel Fredrich Ebert Str 80 44 60167 Manner 47303 Krefeld 66363 Sankt Ingbert 45127 Essen Fatschescer Sir 17A 42557 Heligenhaus Hag
205. definable character that marks the first respectively the last item of a variant produced for a pallet So these fields mark a pallet change for the currently produced variant You can use these fields to export pallet changes to the end of the previous or to the beginning of the next one during the address export Creation date Change date and current date In the category Mail merge you can access three fields for dates Creation date Change date and current date With the button change settings you can easily configure each date Choose between the short or long system format or define your desired format on your own Date format System format short CO System format long C user defined format dd hah yyy Preview 10 02 2014 Example The American date format for instance would be defined as follows mm dd yyyy 413 A 2 Preview and Print Preview Click the Preview button in order to view the table prior to printing Verify for example whether or not the fonts are still readable after having fit the table to the page size see below You can browse through the various pages by using the navigation arrows You will find more detailed information on the options of this preview in chapter Print Preview on page 416 Print Clicking the Print button starts the print job Print options The Print options button opens the Print dialog Here you can define the settings for the print jo
206. description you selected for the variant as well as the internal variant number in square brackets 371 With this production list you can easily see the difference of the two multi flow methods For variant after variant the column Variant will be fix up to the change for pallet after pallet this behavior holds for the column Pallet Rie 15 3 4 2 Posting lists If you produced a VarioPlus mailshot you can print out the variant lists in addition to the other lists and forms These lists include the following forms e Mengen und Entgelte e Handlingliste e Palettenziele 15 3 4 3 Address export There are three additional fields for the export 1 Address fields Variant Vario Contains the value of the address field Variant Vario which was assigned during import on page 359 or which has been manually changed on page 360 later on 2 Mailshot Item Variant Contains the internal variant number which was assigned in the item properties on page 363 3 Mailshot Item Variant description Contains the description of the variant which you specified in the item properties on page 363 You can also export the addresses filtered by variants to one or to several files Save Addresses filtered into file s Filter HORAS N ALDA a Infopost National Tray Infopost National Tray targets Infopost National Pallets Infopost National Pallet targets coll i Ple
207. dit on page 67 Copy The selected address serves as source for an additional new address if you use the Copy menu item After you have changed particular fields and left the dialog box by clicking on OK a new address is available to you The original address is unchanged and still exists You can use all functions which are described above in the chapter Edit on page 67 Delete The selected address will be irrecoverably deleted from the database if you use the Delete menu item This cannot be undone If you are unsure whether or not you might still need the address it is better to use the Ignore address function which you can activate using the Edit menu item in the General tab Select all This command marks all displayed addresses as selected The result is the same as when typing the CTRL A hot key Selected addresses With this menu item you can change all selected addresses in one step 70 Rie Ee Click and hold the CTRL key in order to select several addresses You can mark complete address areas by clicking the first and the last address of this area and keeping the SHIFT key pressed All addresses can be selected by pressing the key combination CTRL A You can remove single addresses from the selection by clicking them once again while keeping the CTRL key pressed Write to Using this command you declare all selected addresses as available to be written to In case your selection includes one of those
208. dium Search intensity Level 5 high slower Control buttons wf OF Exits the duplicate search and accepts the selection made for the current project Addresses for which the Write to address option is not checked will be marked in the current project as inactive and will not be written to This marking can be undone in the address management by choosing Use address Cancel Exits the result view of the duplicate search without retrieving the automatic or manual changes to the address file Pause Stops editing the project and saves the current state of processing You can recommence work on the duplicate search as soon as the project is reopened In the meantime no changes can be made to this project Edit This button opens a dialog window where you can make changes to the selected record You will find more information on the options on the three tabs by following this link on page 67 Report The results of the duplicate search are stored in a report which will be shown via clicking the button Preview By clicking the other buttons you can print this report or export it as text file E Ss ll You will find more information on the additional options of the Report preview in the Print Preview on page 416 chapter 126 4 7 1 Report of duplicate search status 20 01 2014 Project Demo Professional Page 1 of 29 182 duplit ales exipling in tolali 73 dupicale groups Duplicate group 1 with 2 duplica
209. document will be scaled in lateral direction independent of the longitudinal direction thus distortions may occur 3 Scaled Enter a value for the proportional scaling factor of the document values greater than 100 magnify the document while values less than 100 demagnify it if parts of the document lay outside the overall document they will be truncated at the margins Other tab Decide which auxiliary lines should be printed onto your sheet You can choose between the marking for hole punching of the sheet and folding marks for folding the letter The functions on this tab are only available for the single sheet paper type 260 Background Othe Print ausiliary lines single sheets Hole mark Fold mark 11 1 10 Print Use this menu item to start printing the addresses on labels and envelopes or into a mail merge letter General tab General Extended Additional pages Printer Mame Microsoft SPS Document riker T Overview Document Envelopes DIN lang 30 818 addresses Printing 30 818 Envelopes Addresses All i Current address 5 Addresses Printers Here you see an overview of all printers being available to your computer Use the button Properties to edit the options for the selected printer Overview Here Infopost Manager informs you about the currently selected document and about how many addresses are to be printed Additionally the program calculates how many pages labels actu
210. done e First right click the text frame which contains the bundle number A contextual menu appears Choose the menu item Edit text e The Edit text dialog pops up Mark the variable Bundle number Afterwards choose a greater font size from the icon bar s drop down menu e If necessary drag the text frame to an appropriate size e Now add the field Weight via the Insert field button e Click the icon with the green tick in order to finish editing the text e You may add descriptive text by amending existing or creating new text frames which will have to be accordingly arranged e As soon as you are ready with all changes save the modified routing label From now on it will be automatically used as template for your routing labels 424 B Index About 242 Acceptance offices 218 Access files 49 action buttons 11 Action buttons for general changes 106 Add first name 90 Add Thesaurus entry 99 Additional pages tab 266 Address check 91 Address export 323 Address files and their assignments Examples 244 Address management 66 Address spread by cities 190 Address spread by countries 195 Address spread by routing regions 193 Address spread by routing zones 194 Address spread by ZIP 189 Address tab 281 289 304 Addresses menu 48 Adressdialog 134 Analysis menu 184 Anonymization 34 Arrange align toolbar 278 Auto Login 215 Automatic Login 215 Background tab 258 Blank forms 211 Brochures 242
211. ds are subdivided into the corresponding categories Infopost remaining items international items as well as unused items Within these categories all addresses are available in the sequence which is required by the postal regulations The export wizard offers a variety of options for exporting the addresses He will help you to select the correct options in each case you can use the buttons Next and Back to go one step forward or back in order to check or make corrections 323 Ho 14 1 1 First define which Addresses shall be exported and specify the file format and name Output format File format csv file csv a Esport file 0 Save Addresses in one file Extended settings Save Addresses per category in separate file Save Addresses filtered into hile s Filter Directory C Users nf Documents File name Addresses Explanation Mew Project Infopost National cs 19 627 Infopozt tems EO New Project Letter National csv O Remaining items New Project Unused teme co 51 Unused items Load template Of course you can immediately export your addresses without having to make any changes to the default settings Your addresses will be automatically sorted in correct order Also all address fields needed for dispatch are provided for each address You can also use the button Load template to load previously saved export options These templates for instance make it easier to export files for specif
212. duction complexity If you use the franking mark ZL which is possible from 4 000 effective items in combination with data exchange you will also be given an additional discount Discount Disco Postage cemy Deum Discount Bund ee Routing egin 5 055 a Try produccion lar Pale production PA Fo regions Extra Bare Frankicg mark 2L Total 254 17 a The project statistics show in detail the rebates percentage for each production type if applicable and the corresponding item quantity In addition to that the totals of the various rebates and the grand total which will be deducted from the charge are listed here Net charge This table shows the charge after deduction of the discounts At the same time Infopost Manager calculates the average costs per item Total postage Postage ahul di counls Frankenia j F z Diserat Tala whan value added Ias vaie adiad tas 1 284 Tom posae O ae ii calculalon a ar cu ndo i 7 i tli alta ese cicle haa Production The left table shows numbers of produced trays separated into the targets ZIP routing region and Germany while the right table shows the numbers of produced pallets separated into the targets routing region routing zone or Germany Production Tren a ers o pi e Miami y f i Pa H o E Te on i 1 Aragon 679 rauhing Done y 1 amean g arman i Total e679 Total Data exchange Deutsche Post The table shows whether or n
213. e click the button Enter the file name of the data source and the target directory in the subsequent dialog window By default the project directory is suggested The data source is always stored as semicolon separated text file The various field contents are enfolded in inverted commas Now select the category for creating and printing the mail merge documents Take special care not to select categories simultaneously which have to be posted separately e g Infopost and remaining items Prior to being able to edit and or print the Word document the fields which you want to use in your document as merge fields have to be selected Click the kat Selection button and the Choose data fields window pops up Choose data fields Explanation to focused field E Address fields Bee tral Irma C Fimaz C Strate C Hausnummer C Stra enzusatz C Postfach Ol FLZ Stra e O PLZ Postfach O FLZ Grobempfanger DO Ort Strae DO Or Postfach O Or Grofempf nger O Land C Anrede O Titel O Yomame O Nachname i cancel Here you define which fields e g those you explicitly imported with your address record shall 315 Rio be integrated in the document Short texts on the right hand side of the window offer additional information on each IPM data field Of course you can add additional fields to your data source afterwards Please note however that the complete
214. e which already contains default fields Adressdialog will have direct access to all exported fields For example you can predefine the content of fields to be processed in the Internet later on Create Adressdialog export fil Export settings Output file CAL ser Public Documents D ema Professional iad Besides the default fields such as Company Address Contact person you can export additional fields and thus initialize survey elds in the Internet already with preset values Default Helds Additional held Field Ho Field Add E Create description file Userstnf Documents D emo Professional First select the target directory and if appropriate another file name in field Output file Click the Add button in order to include additional fields If you want to delete fields from the selection mark them with the mouse and click the Remove button Clicking OK starts the export process Please note that Adressdialog has different upper limits for the field lengths For instance the field Companyl may contain maximum 100 characters If a field exceeds the designated maximum you will receive a warning You can now decide whether you want to truncate the problematical field accordingly or to cancel the process As soon as the process is finished you can call Adressdialog s Internet web page in order to upload the export file to the server 138 File C Users Public Documents Demo Professional iad
215. e Eee ek ee 357 lol Main Window REE 358 15 3 2 Addresses menu oaoa 359 19 3 3 Preparation meni s s s ss nas ceed a A RA 361 15 3 4 Results menu oaoa a a 371 154 Job SPLNE 6 444440 28 oe bd rs a A G a 372 15 4 1 Preparation menu 24 6 4 42a eb KER Cee REE da oa 373 154 2 Results DIC oe heehee Ae Se HOR EEE ERE EB OS ERG 377 Libor Extras MEL 4 4 6 6 lt 4 ne BERR GOSH RS GPRS ERE RE ERS SE SO 383 Infopost Manager s capabilities can be extended by activating several modules You can always see via the menu item Help About on the Modules tab which modules are already usable and which can be additionally activated Infopost Manager Components Hodule Yersion Address check 8 1 1 Build 37553 26 11 2013 16 35 Postal routing data address check 42013 of 04 09 2013 Dataftactore Postalcode Robinson check 8 1 1 Build 37553 26 11 2073 16 35 Robinson data not installed Salutation check 8 1 1 Build 37553 26 11 2013 16 35 Hise check 8 1 1 Build 37553 26 11 2073 16 35 SERA conversion 41 420 set of data as from 16 11 2013 valid until 02 03 201 Professional achyvated gt International optimization achyated gt Wario activated Job splitting actiwated gt IT franking not activated Change license Clicking the Change license button will close Infopost Manager and the licensing dialog window will appear 336 15 1 1 Lizenzierung Akti
216. e International optimization module is activated the national and international charges will be shown in a clear table By using the Vario module this table is extended by the respective variants as long as VarioPlus is used On new tabs you can define the franking type for international items or define the required variants Details can be found in chapters International optimization on page 341 and Vario on page 362 Dimensions This tab manages all the information on the format and weight of the items in the current project Infopost Manager offers several standard formats for the item dimensions in a dropdown menu If the dimensions of your item do not correspond to one of these formats they can also be entered manually Precise information is needed for length and width when specifying the thickness you can select one of the given ranges or your can enter it lt exactly gt The chosen selection is illustrated in the Preview area Dimensions T ype Franking Remaining item Wrapper format Format DL 220 110mm Preview Length 220 mm Length Width MOE mm gt E not machine ready O Portrait 8 Landscape Thickness weight 3 Coextensive Thickness Oto 5 mm weight d g D Wario zF Variants Product Format Postage With activated module Professional items can be declared as not machine ready You wi
217. e a tray is filled affix the printed tray label and place the tray onto the current pallet which is indicated in the tray list in column Pallet No information for the corresponding pallet Column Pallet target Marking illustrates the label fF aerea Ise 31 41 JR 40 RD 05 2 171 3A 13 ik n EE 3 171 3A 13 R H EE 4 171 TA 13 ik a DOG 3 0 A 13 ik a RD 03 E 170 aA 13 R 2 RD 05 7 170 TA 13 ik a RD 05 0 A 13 ik 4 E E 131 FT 15 kk H FD OG T 131 Z a5 ik 4 BE T En ET 15 RO 4 EE If you post trays on pallets you should print the pallet list Details such as weight and tray quantity per pallet can be derived from this list Pallet list Page 1 of 1 Status 17 12 2004 Protech Saar ence erre rear Pallet target Marking TTT MERO a TER 335 6 E 14 559 10 ae 390 Fi 11 et hee Fe af Dale i lize 725 15 550 E 2 426 5 221919 E 69 E 121323 In principle the maximum weight as well as the maximum stacking height allowed by Deutsche Post has to be taken into account during pallet production When specifying the production properties Infopost Manager ensures that these limits will not be exceeded In order to obtain discounts the respective minimum weights have to be met Infopost Manager distributes your items during optimization in an ideal way i e the fees will be as low as possible Should you have any questions please contact the Deutsche Post Hotline on 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part
218. e always sorted by ZIP in ascending order If possible immediately affix a printed tray label to each full tray When printing the addresses in mail merge on page 249 mode you can decide whether or not a special overview page shall be printed prior to each new tray which indicates the tray change and which contains additional information such as item quantity Tray list Infopest Page 1of7 Staus 4 01 2014 Proa gra Pope E i l l L L l i I i I L I L i L i I L i L 2 Pai bea Pi bd bd ee Pd ba Pd 320 13 1 1 Ee Production of trays using the tray list Case A All items in one tray target fit in one tray Tray Tray target Pallet Pallet target Wo Items Het kg Gross kg Type Marking No Type Marking Case B Not all the items in one tray target fit in one tray Trays 2 to 8 belong to the same tray target Label the trays with the same marking 42 which can be derived form the tray list and fill tray Produce trays 9 to 11 the same way As an alternative to the tray list you can also produce trays based on the printed tray labels coming from Infopost Manager If you check the options Print extra tray bundle information each tray label will contain its tray number as well as its item quantity 321 13 1 2 Production of pallets for Infopost The simplest way of producing pallets is to stack the trays onto the pallets as soon as all items are inserted Onc
219. e check You are provided information about the selected source file number of checked items and how many addresses have been sorted out by the selected match accuracy 186 Nixie check Date 10 07 2015 Durabon seconds Node source fila C 1Usersi Public Documents Deutsche Post AG Infopost Manager DatalExamples National dbf from 08 09 2006 14 16 26 Chec ked addresses 30 643 Similar addresses 169 Match accuracy Exact Rejected addresses 4 362 7 1 8 Dispatch properties Here the dispatch mode is shown If international addresses are included you can also see the selected transport services Dispatch properties Mode National and international Transport service International Country specific 7 1 9 Item properties The project statistics reflect the information you provided on the item Format weight thickness content and franking type are stated furthermore the item distribution to Infopost and remaining items and the respective charges and descriptions per category are given ltem properties Formal DL 220 x 110 mn Theke 0 to 5 me Weight i g coment Letter mail itan Franking Franking mark Ebina serace Pre iinadraza Farani DAF Desorption Stardaz Standardbriet Pomaga A AE da e Hi Eas CTA ale 14 7 1 10 Production properties All production information of the current project which you provided during preparation will be summarized here You will see e g the values for t
220. e check boxes of each field show which fields are already going to be exported Furthermore you can change the status of every field by continuously clicking the respective The possible check box status are Check box Result O Field will not be exported yet E Field will already be exported at least once Field will be exported if appropriate for a second or third time Some label printers require a so called control file for the print job which contains the information to be printed for every label This file can be easily created by Infopost Manager via the export If any field content should appear on the label more than once e g ZIP or bundle change chars just add the relevant field for another time Te li Use the additional address fields generated by Infopost Manager when processing your addresses in order to ensure that the results of the address check the duplicate search and optimization are also available during processing Additionally the delivery fields allow you to benefit from the normalization of the address fields in one column You no longer have to work with several fields for major recipient street and P O Box address and for the respective ZIPs e Data fields of category Additional address fields on page 400 e Data fields of the category Adressdialog fields on page 408 e Other special data fields on page 409 Field properties You can change the field descriptor for each export fiel
221. e countries 6 GesalhsAGurtel Fatrkations 8 3 10 11 12 13 14 Field structure leet Machi GmbH amp Co KG Scherer GmbH Entran Sensoren GmbH EDC Nomalen GmbH Co Kia EFEDA WERKE RUDOLF PLATTE GmbH amp Co EG Heveing GmbH amp Ca Autemann Sohne GmbH En Fea Coburnns Reset columns Engels Junkers EG E Four Pharma SAMY User defined Category Used addresses Mot usable addresses Mational addresses Intemational addresses ZIP range Routing region Routing zone Provinces Counties Magdebunger Str Rurgedarnn Biler Berg Schulweg Flachsland Kiesler Str Haikeeltelr Cisbstr Ostet Ostet Bein Umspannweik Muhlenwveg Datat Ralhauzales Fehmainstt herhan 17 KEATEGT Wadan Grid i Pa ER Y 13 678 Addresses Neo filter Import file A filter is activated by clicking on one of the options offered in the selection list By clicking on the button Filter you return to the view showing all addresses In the lower bar of the screen you can see which filter is currently selected 19 678 items 1 selected Filter used used addresses Unsorted Filter arguments Depending on the project type and the associated item categories several filter arguments are available User defined This filter method is especially useful for user defined fields by allowing to set filters on arbitrary fields User defined filter Filter Field Telefon F
222. e day to day work by automatizing reiterative tasks This speeds up the workflow and saves valuable time A plugin specially built for this letter shop provides the user with a new menu item New Public project When executed it will only open Customer index on page 201 for selecting the respective customer as sender Infopost Manager will then create a new project and find the customer s address file in a fixed server directory and import it All desired refinements of addresses on page 48 will be done Item and production properties will be set to the requested default settings The project will then be optimized and all production documents and routing labels will be deposited as PDF in the production directory of the letter shop s file server Posting lists will be printed forthwith Afterwards project data will be transferred to AM system At long last the address file will be compressed and given a new extension done to prevent it from being accidentally used another time Letter shop Public is done and has reduced most of the work to just a few minutes Installation Installation of a plugin is easy Just deposit the file or files you have received in the directory plugins This directory can normally be found in the program directory of Infopost Manager at the same stage as the application itself In case this directory does not exist just create it manually After restarting Infopost Manager you can use the new functio
223. e green arrows indicate the position where the column will be placed if the mouse button is released SEPA validation Infopost Manager can check the bank data you have entered in the edit dialog on page 204 Simple validations like checking minimum or maximum length of e g IBAN will always be done With this menu item you may also activate additional extended checks based on data of the German Central Bank 8 2 Sender Mailer You can make changes to your sender data in this dialog window The sender fields are used to manage address data and personal details where appropriate Being a personal user you will enter these data when you first launch Infopost Manager they will be used for all future projects and where appropriate in mail merge documents General Your address data are managed on the General tab In addition an information field is available for further details 208 Cusbomer Projects 5 Save and close E Close General Detaile Projects Company Address A Company 1 Muster AG Street busters 12 Comparyy 2 ZIP City 12355 Musterhausen Company 3 P O box Customer no ZIP Ciy Initial Major recipiert IP che Dept il Sector ol ind Sonstiges Country 8 2 2 Details On the Details tab you can manage additional data such as bank account the contact person your Post customer number Customer Projects Save and close Close General Details Projecte
224. e in the project statistics on page 184 and in the project overview in the sender data on page 210 or the customer management on page 201 Folder The Folder field shows the project location i e the sub folder where the project was stored 43 Ee You can use this information to navigate to your project in the project explorer on page 27 at any time Status This line contains information on the project s state of processing As long as a project has been released for editing this line remains empty otherwise the terms locked or completed are used A project can be completed in the project explorer on page 28 via the right mouse button menu or locked after a Pack amp Go file on page 37 has been created Duration Infopost Manager keeps a record of how long a project was opened in total You can see the total elapsed time in the general overview of the project at any point Created on This is where Infopost Manager stores the date and time when a project began Changed On This information notes when a project was last opened Delivery You can see here the delivery date which you specified in production properties on page 153 if you activated option Transfer order data to Deutsche Post on the next page In activated lettershop mode on page 223 two additional fields show the sender and the mailer The sender is the customer to whom the current project is assigned With the
225. e oboe ee ES Oe ee eee SS eee EM SHES 224 Clie Production ondas oboe tarada 226 SL O a oo wn E ee ee ee SY ee ne E ee es ee oe 226 MUE IMMEFOGE 4 64Gb 4 we oD AAA EERE DEERE 227 8 11 7 Order management os saab 4448 8S HRS EKER AA 231 edis Pata DacKUp oo 4 addres rean AAA A 232 8 11 9 Administrators sa saa maaar a Ar A 234 eA e n 244 eo kwh cana 239 8 11 11 Directories and file names o ooa a a a 0 000 eee eee ens 237 In this menu you can specify the sender Furthermore you can print out the various forms of Deutsche Post as plain forms i e without entries You will also find here a list of all acceptance offices which can be conveniently searched and you can access the ZIP search Above all you can specify a variety of options enabling you to adapt Infopost Manager to your requirements A very useful part of Infopost Manager Professional is the possibility to provide services for customers Depending on the chosen environment on page 223 personal use vs lettershop the first menu item will be called Sender Mailer on page 208 or Customer on the following page 200 o If your license allows for multiple users you will also have access to a user administration on page 214 On top of this you can start a Responseplus campaign here An assistant will guide you through all required steps 8 1 Customer index The customer index allows lettershops to manage their customer data and projects Hints regarding data s
226. e on the selected project s 3 7 Close You can use this menu item to close the project If you have set the operational mode on page 227 to Use working copies and if the current project was changed you will be asked whether or not you want to save these modifications Afterwards you can create a new project open another project or exit Infopost Manager 3 8 Save Save as These menu items enable you to save the recent changes of your project With Save your data will be saved using the current project name all old project data will be overwritten 40 With Save as you can save the current project with another project name 3 9 Divide into national international This menu item helps you to divide a project hat contains both national and international addresses into two projects These new projects will then contain only national or international addresses respectively Click the menu entry to start the dividing process Cancel After the splitting the original project will be locked on page 37 for further processing You can continue your work in the new projects You find them by the name of the original project together with the suffices national and international respectively Project Internationale Kampagne was divided into the following projects and locked for further processing Internationale Kampagne national Internationale Kampagne international Do you want to open p
227. e proposed gender The Ignore button ignores this name it will be no longer shown during this run Ignore all not only ignores this but all unknown first names which will be identified during this run 3 Via the functionality of manually editing the user defined first name list on the current page Edit first name list Using this menu item you can manually edit the user defined first name list by deleting changing or adding entries 90 User defined entries Gender The buttons Add and Edit open the Define gender dialog Hame Hozianna Gender E male female 5 ambiguous Options Add normalized name Cane Here you can enter resp change the first name and specify the gender Please mind that first names which are contained in the user defined first name list have priority over the system internal first name list If you e g add Horst as new first name and set the gender to female all addresses with this name would be addressed as Sehr geehrte Frau xyz Option Add normalized name adds another name to the list in addition to the first name Umlauts and e g accents will be removed The normalization result can be seen below this option 4 5 Address check The address check verifies and edits your addresses automatically using Deutsche Post AG official data Obsolete non existent or wrongly assigned ZIPs are replaced where possible and the spelling of cities and streets is
228. e sorted out Please note that only those ZlPs are offered which are contained in your project He Details on how to use the selection methods can be found here on page 419 Routing region This filter shows only addresses with dedicated routing regions or routing region ranges y Filter Routing region selection Available routing regions ow election A region Addresses 20 2 a 21 31M 22 28 23 BQ 24 25 4 2h 14 af 20 29 20 Range 21 44 26 28 5 of 42 entres selected 2588 Addresses 1 O A A A OA noO 0O A e Note Mot usable addresses are sorted out Please note that only those routing regions are offered which are contained in your project Rio Details on how to use the selection methods can be found here on page 419 Routing zone This filter shows only addresses with dedicated routing zones or routing zone ranges 19 He a Filter Routing zone selectio Available routing zones Selection Routing zone Addresses 2 2 r29 11 213 2 324 1 890 1 522 Range 3 5 3 of 5 entries selected 15427 Addresses Note Mot usable addresses are sorted out Please note that only those routing zones are offered which are contained in your project Details on how to use the selection methods can be found here on page 419 Provinces With this filter you can list your addresses according to specified provinces or Nielsen regions y Filter Province selection Provinces
229. e that this is only possible with prior consultation of Deutsche Post 231 8 11 8 When manual data exchange is activated the option Allow manual editing of order number DPAG enables you to manually change the order number of your posting This may be of need for example due to connection problems In cases like this you can manually check for the correct order number on AM portal e g and set it locally in the project s properties on page 46 By activating option No data exchange you abandon the transfer resp the request of project data to from Deutsche Post Settings In this area you specify the data which are relevant for you being data producer such as e g your Post customer number Please note that the customer number entered here will be coded in the project data to be transferred It will be also used to clearly assign projects on Deutsche Post s data exchange server to you In field User and password the recently used authentication data will be shown if you have checked option Save password on page 163 The password is garbled for confidentiality purposes Using the Reset button you will delete these data Thus you will be prompted again to enter user and password if you contact Deutsche Post s data exchange server next time Data Backup On this tab you can predefine all settings regarding data backup Options General User Presettings AFMPFRANKIT Other Internet Order managem
230. e user name is not case sensitive In the field network login specify the Windows user name of the respective user to allow for automatic login on the previous page If you are part of a domain it is for security reasons recommended to use fully qualified user names These user names have the form nameOdomain for example testuserOcompany com If you use a simple user name without domain in the example this would be testuser the domain will not be taken into account for the login e 8 6 2 User rights Every user is assigned to a user group The group decides on which privileges this user will have within his installation of Infopost Manager The following user groups are defined e Administrator e Main user e User e Guest 215 The following table shows the rights for each user group Action Administrator Main User Guest user Order management Request order x x Create order x X x Refresh order x x x Cancel order x x Projects Create project x x Open project x X x r Save project as x x Project explorer Open x x x x Delete project x x Rename project x x Copy cut paste project x x Protect project from processing x x Release project for processing x x Bind project to installation x x Release project for other installations x x Archive restore project x Anonymize project x x Pack amp Go Create x x Import x x Addresses Import x X x Export x xX xX Address management x x
231. e will be printed over those frames located underneath m La da La E Align Infopost Manager s mail merge module offers convenient tools to position frames to each other and to jointly align them You can select or deselect a frame either in the object inspector by clicking on it or by clicking on it directly within the mail merge module s main screen 212 Rie 11 2 10 11 2 11 Ee Two or more frames are selected jointly by clicking while simultaneously pressing the Shift key if several frames have been selected any specific frame can be deselected in the same way i e clicking on it while simultaneously holding down the Shift key Mutually align frames You can obtain the desired alignment by right clicking on a selected frame the right mouse key in the object inspector on page 275 or by using the Align menu The first selected frame serves as reference for all other selected frames i e the first frame will not be moved If two or more frames are selected simultaneously they will be also moved jointly using the mouse The menu items Same vertical distance and Same horizontal distance normalize the distances between three or more selected position frames Tou e 3 a4 42 amp of Reposition out of range frames You can use this button to move back into the document those frames which have been erroneously moved outside the printable area while positioning or changing the paper format Afterwards you
232. eadily defined by placing all address lines on top of each other For this you can use a text field on page 282 together with its option Insert field on page 283 The option Remove empty lines resulting from empty fields will probably be appropriate Please note that some services like PREMIUMADRESS require detailed address information and will therefore not be available in this import mode Import via ADO Explanation ADO means ActiveX Data Objects i e different data objects such as e g a SQL database can be chosen as import source ADO Connection 5 Open existing UDL file a Build new ADO connection Back Hent gt Using option Build new ADO connection and clicking the Next button you will see the Windows dialog where you can choose and configure the desired ADP connection o 4 2 4 4 2 5 Wahlen Sie die Daten aus zu denen Sie eine Verbindung herstellen mochten OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Native Client Alternatively you can skip this dialog by choosing option Open existing UDL file Explanation UDL means Universal Data Link A UDL file contains beside the description of the A
233. ecurity data protection We emphasize that data protection and data security play a central role in Infopost Manager Therefore bank account details in the customer index will only be stored encrypted In addition to the general address information it is possible to save information concerning the contact person contact data bank account and postal data Customer Card no for each customer It is possible to select the customer by using the navigation arrow or by clicking the name In the status bar at the lower edge of the window you will see the total number of customers which have been created Data Edit Projecte Extras a a 3 7 xl ale Cu e Comparyl Compary2 Compan Steet le Z City street e Salutation Title First Last Bauer Kirch GmbH Am Handwerkerzentium 25 52156 Monschau Hem Stefan Kinch 12345 Muster Al Musberstr 12 12355 Musterhauzen Herr Max Mustermann 2 customers Sort table By single clicking a column header you sort the table by this column Another click on the header alters the order from ascending to descending or vice versa The sort criterion is always shown in the lower status bar of the window see also Extended mode on page 207 Finding addresses You can search for a specific customer by typing in the first letters in the lower left corner of the window Often it is sufficient to enter a few letters since Infopost Manager will move directly to the entry closest to the i
234. elds resp columns are shown Importing Access files If your database is protected by a password you can enter it in this dialog window Please specify the password of database Adressen mdb Open table MS Access database LA lUsers PublicDocuments Deutsche Post AG4 nfopost Managers D atas E Open table from database OK Cancel 53 4 1 2 Automatic analysis As soon as Infopost Manager has opened the selected address file you will be given a table view of all fields available in this file ul x whl 7 w Lay OF Cancel Pea Amad Feii Load mpho Greep a Dariya Opio Fmaj lt Fral hallo Paba Pi IPotacl Da made canina and ares camila feed ra grisa amiei Compargl Carga Sil al rami DP PP Oe Cepo 1 arm Hehi Gib i Lo E _ Halaladae Hucwarta Fisher 12 Pila H 2 SPECTAD Arde Ircieantr GimbH Magdeburg ir J H 3 He und Gobel Arratia ad Sager Foungaedaran 5 Eb tegen Gabh u Co FG Haha Baler Berg 3 Pale 5 Soacha E HA E Guo e fiidar ud Verso Flacholord 22 at E T pl Machi Dri i Ca Eb Kate Sn 500 2 E Sap Eb Haksi 75 75 Al Cita TA eos TD EDC Rindan Eb Dig dd Ona TE pr 1 EFEDOWwEFFE RUDOLF PLATTE Gro t Co kb Ml red ab Cia TE dd Te Aleta Eb lo hahiukas iaj Paradis Ber liar ed 13 diana re Gael Ca Mr 1 1 TIH 1 Enga Gita A 15 Ji EE Fish sse 50 75 TE Faris Pra GARW Farar 32 17 LOAEST Verlag Gabi Co EG Gulenbeagung Ta TO Oidertsapar hisia ciar Gaited Ciara EL 15 Cider piris vekmi Cubanas
235. els on other systems You can also export the tray and bundle routing labels as PDF files via the dropdown menu You can also edit the routing labels to a certain extent in order to adjust them to your needs Modifications can be saved and used for future prints Thus two new options are available in the dropdown menu which can be reached via the button Routing labels Tray label Format Tray label Fallet label Preview Printing PDF Edit Pallet label Default Retrieve to new projects Reset default Edit Choose the Edit menu item if you want to launch the label editor on page 422 and make some changes Reset Default If you have altered your routing labels with the editor it will be automatically used as template for future prints You can recall the certified default template by executing this command 179 Ee Preview In this dialog you can receive an impression how the tray resp bundle labels would look like if they are printed 4 Infepait lanage Tray le tl Dela Document Edi Were Insert Estres lata DFe 00 wsi jli CE 5 E Tray b DE O O i aghi pa dd Perks i eae d a giai ot 0189 QA Raiuig label iaf 339 3 Objects 2 Objects imahe Generally the functions in the icon bar are identical to those from other Infopost Manager modules You can print both the current and all routing labels or export them as PDF file you will be able to zoom in and out and
236. ems Possibility to skip the postage optimization Print tray labels for Infobrief minor improvements address check Distribution list identifier also for ZIP bundles additional optimizations some bug fixes What was new in version 6 4 from 20 07 2007 Spell check in mail merge Salutation check only with module Professional Nixie check only with module Professional Panel print Inkjet export Spread by provinces only with module Professional Spread by Nielsen regions only with module Professional cascaded address filters Decomposition duplicate groups by date Support Sigel labels a lot of detail improvements and error corrections What was new in version 6 3 2 from 12 03 2007 some bug fixes e g for partial posting cosmetic repairs of the GUI minor corrections of the online help files What was new in version 6 3 1 from 01 12 2006 Support table of fees 2007 Support new products Letters international at kilo rates only with module International Optimization VarioPlus only with module Vario Vario Mailing International only with modules International Optimization and Vario new posting lists Integration product brochures some optimizations further bug fixes What was new in version 6 3 from 29 09 2006 Working with project copies 393 Check against the Robinson list only with module Professional improved address management improved duplicate search improved address check
237. en Horoscopes lucky numbers and esotericism Lotteries lottosweapstakes eto Fashion and accessories E Coins stamps collective articles Food potations E Telecommunications cell phones Internet computer Tourism travel offers etc O Newspapers Magazine subscription Settings Search method Quick Default Intensive In the Settings area you define the method for the check You can use the preset default method or choose between a quick check and a more intensive but slower one To begin with the check click the Start button Results After the check is completed you will see statistics that display the number of checked addresses Furthermore you can see the respective number of exact akin similar or likely equal addresses You can then define the degree of conformity that decides which addresses will be sorted out prior to optimization 128 Robinson check Select ad Statistics Total addresses Ignored addresses International addresses Checked addresses Select addresses Hits Exact Akin Similar Likely Do not write to i Write to Likely To specify this use the slider in the Select addresses area Each vertical line on the scale matches one of the options mentioned above In the lower right corner you can directly see how many addresses would not be written to with the chosen option After having confirmed your settings by clicki
238. en This menu item opens the selected project New folder Use this menu item to create a new folder in the current level of the folder hierarchy Cut Use this menu item for moving selected projects or folders within the folder hierarchy After having cut the selection navigate to the target folder and choose the menu item Paste Selection If you want to select several consecutive objects click on the first item and then on the last one and simultaneously keep the Shift key pressed Several single objects can be selected by clicking on them while keeping the Ctrl key pressed Moving via drag n drop is even faster Left Click the selected projects and folders keep the mouse button pressed drag the selection to its target folder and drop it by releasing the mouse button Copy You can use this menu item to duplicate a project within a folder or to copy it into another folder within project explorer This function is useful for instance if a new mailshot is very similar to a project which has already been processed with Infopost Manager e g only dimensions or item weight are different All other settings as well as all addresses are automatically available from the copied project 33 Paste This menu item is only available if a project was previously selected and copied You can insert copied projects either into the same folder or into any other folder Delete An existing project is finally and completely deleted from
239. en to By clicking this icon the respective address will not be written to Addresses with this icon are marked not be written to as soon as the salutation check is finished By clicking this icon the respective address will be written to without any changes 87 Rie lt Addresses with a green tick comply with the postal regulations and have been automatically or manually corrected resp changed Addresses with a green tick and a yellow question and exclamation mark are correct and have been manually corrected resp changed Addresses with a yellow question and exclamation mark are incorrect but Infopost Manager has found a suggestion which can be selected Addresses with a red bar are incorrect and Infopost Manager cannot make any suggestion If you right click you will open a context sensitive menu whose options refer to the currently marked data record wf OK W Cancel Pause gt Edit il Statistics o Options View aaa os Anrede Titel Nachname Geschlecht Fema Heri Daune male Ertian Sersoren GmbH Hen Lennartz male Scheider Packlix GmbH save as genderless male Aachena Maschmenbau Hem save as male hann Aachena blisch und Knetmas Save as female Aachenet Printer und Schoko Hellenthal amp Cie Spiegel anul Rug Add first name bo user list Meu GmbH Heir Swap first last name Ger Edit Strg B abemoden Angebka Bark Gmb H Write bo address Strg 4 KEM Ereutzenbeck Ernes Giza Original Strg 0 4B
240. enauer Str 41 60443 Frankfurt am Main 75397 Uedem Poatfach 102120 Fr hliche Morgensonne 15 19 44667 Bochum Herm Eduard Kaufmann Porze Str 70 LF ee ih m l Ingest 13 SLOTEN record 197 of 4579 66793 Saarpeelbngen 65203 Wiesbaden 69011 Heidelberg 44143 Dortmund In this image you can see how address line 4 and address line 5 differ from line to line The resulting address blocks of addresses 766 and 767 would be looking like this Address 766 IDEAL Werk C E Jungeblodt GmbH Co Herrn Philipp Schneider 59553 Lippstadt Address 767 Elektror Karl W Miller GmbH amp Co Eletrotechn Fabriken Herrn Peter Bausch Postfach 68743 Wahhausel 64 Rio Ee 4 2 3 Select the first address line and call the command From field x assign address lines 1 to x in the field assignment menu Typically address fields are consecutive and thus can be quickly assigned resp do not have to be assigned one after the other During the import Infopost Manager reads the address lines and stores the found ZIP in the respective ZIP field street P O box major recipient The address lines are kept untouched After the import Infopost Manager behaves like you would have imported from file only ZIP on page 63 Please note that just as in Import from file only ZIP on page 63 the address block on page 280 of mail merge will not be available However because of the label format an address block is r
241. ender or enter a deviant ZIP The area Output corresponds to the same area found in the settings of Premiumadress on page 405 Data fields of the category Adressdialog fields With the field Adressdialog code resp Adressdialog user name and Adressdialog password you insert those data which each addressee needs to log in at Adressdialog on page 134 408 a Choose data fields LJ Helen region Explanation to focused held C County name Contains the complete PURL incl report and the defined domain name O 150 code if the PURL has been activated O Address source Otherwise the field is empty O Address usable O Address ignored E Adressdialog fields Adresedialog Code Adressdialog password Complete PLIRL C Mailshot a O Item DO Humber C Postage C Weight O Category DO Categor begin C Category end O Lio Change settings FT I info Cancel Other special data fields Other fields from other categories e g product names from the last order coming from the address file can be inserted within the continuous text and are inserted for each address accordingly Filling field on the current page Combination field on this page Condition field on page 411 Subfield on page 411 Begin and End on page 412 Distribution list identifier on page 412 Relative pallet begin and end on page 413 Creation date Change date and current date on page 413 Filling
242. ent IT franking Data backup Login Backup file Backup directory CAU ser Public Documents 6 Specify file name Assign file name automatically Other E Password Overarite existing file Automatic backup Activate automatic data backup 1 Backup file Here you can specify the name of the backup file and to which directory it is to be saved To do so enter the path to its location in the field backup directory Ideally this location should be placed on another computer a separate hard disk or on an external storage Furthermore the option specify file name enables you to preset a fixed name for your backup file Alternatively you may use a dynamically generated name that is different for every backup Activate the option assign file name automatically and Infopost Manager will create a zip file which is named after the following pattern ipmbck Year Month Day Hour Minute Second zip 232 8 11 8 1 Please beware that if you use a fixed file name your old backup will be overwritten with every new backup If you want to archive different states of your data directory you should therefore either move or rename the file after the backup is done or use an automatically generated name Other If you want to prevent your backup file from being accessed without your permission you may protect it with a password using the option protect with password Enter and confirm t
243. equired this optimization becomes invalid and another production method has to be chosen For variant clean production you have to get a permission of the Deutsche Post AG first Furthermore there is no optimization for routing regions available and the production of pallets is inevitable To get a discount your pallets have to reach a weight of 100 kilo at least The variant clean production is mandatory if only some but not all Variants should be produced without wrapping on page 364 Tray Bundle production Produce trays and bundles This enables you to produce as well bundles as trays at the same time if you variant clean production is activated It allows to produce a specific variant only as tray another variant as bundle As a consequence in the Variants tab the option Set production properties per variant is set per default You can set a specific variant to tray or bundle production in this tab Production properties Variants Tray production properties Set production properties per variant Description Max Wariant 1 6 to 10 100g 4 Yanant 4 2 to 10 100g 4 Yanant B 3 to 10 100g 4 Yanant C 4 to 10 100g 4 Edit ane 1 General Man tems per tray Items half full OK Cace J 369 Variants tab Here you can specify the basic procedure for the production of your VarioPlus mailshot Furthermore you have the opportunity to specify different settings for the production of b
244. er AG Musterhausen 123456789 ERP 123456769 O Deviant address ZIP City 5 Do not show reply address IP of reply address to code into matriz code Font Font E Arial 9 Point Muster AG 12345 Musterhausen Using one of the options Use address of sender or Deviant address you can specify your or any other address as the reply address Choose Do not show reply address in order to suppress the print of the reply address However in order to build the data matrix code you still have to specify a ZIP This option can be of use if you are going to print on pre printed forms which already contain the reply address Tie Responseplus tab On this tab sheet you can specify all settings for the data matrix code 305 eo Edit properties Form Format Reply Standard Contractual partner Sender Bauer Kirch GmbH Monschau Post cus 5033443561 Mailer Bauer Kirch GmbH Monschau Post cus 5033443561 Payer Bauer Kirch GmbH Monschau Post cus 5033443561 other Customer order number Customer order number Item ID number consecutively start no Value from field User specific data fixed value 5 Value from field Settings Contractual partner Here you can specify the Post customer number of the contractual partner for your Responseplus campaign Customer order number Here you can specify a unique identifier for your Responseplus campaign This orde
245. er from the index If there are still projects allocated to this customer they have to be deleted before the customer address record can be removed If you would like to delete a customer but want to archive his projects you can do this by creating a Pack amp Go file on page 38 General tab You can use the General tab to manage the customer s address data In addition an information field is available which can be used for further information 203 ile Customer Projects 5 Save and close Close General Detaile Projects Company A Company 1 Muster AG Comparw 2 Company 3 Customer no Initial Dept Sector of ind Sonstiges Address a Streel Musterar 12 ZIP City 12355 Musterhausen P O box ZIP City Pajor recipiert IP che Country Field names highlighted in bold like for example Companyl are mandatory fields i e they must be filled The options available on this tab are also available to you when you create a new customer Details tab Further customer data such as bank account details or the Post customer number can be managed on the Details tab Infopost Mana El Cusbomer Projects 2 Save and close Close Eee Details Froecte Contact person e Salutaborr Her i Tithe Last name Mustenmarnn Fist mame blaw Position Bank detads ii IBAN DE37700500000000024362 BIC BYLADE MM b Bank busterbank AG ec
246. er you want to have the product information Infopost and the mandatory Deutsche Post inserted within the franking mark or you want to print these information separately in the address field as short franking mark The results of your settings are always displayed in the Preview area The third and surely the most often used option is loading a proprietary graphic as replacement for a stamp You can select an image in bitmap BMP or JPEG JPG format via clicking the Load motif button Now you can derive the image s dimensions from the fields Height and Width These can be also entered manually e g in order to scale the graphic Please note that the image to be displayed may not fall below resp exceed minimum and maximum values If so red exclamation marks behind the value show this conflict and closing the dialog is impossible If option Keep side ratio is activated Infopost Manager makes sure that the image will not be distorted by scaling both directions always with the same factor In the National International area you specify whether or not the franking mark should be the same for national and international items The default is Choose automatically i e for each item category 288 o 11 4 5 Ho an optimized franking mark will be printed It s understood that you can also choose one common franking mark by activating the respective option Infopost Manager offers for the various printers different Qualitie
247. erent In the Addresses column the potential duplicate number is listed the Marked column gives information on how many of these addresses are actually to be written to In the Duplicate markings edited column all data records are marked whose status was changed during duplicate search either manually or by using a selection button valid for all entries LR Y The Duplicate group viewed in detail column clarifies which of the groups have already been opened without changes necessarily having been made P el The Indicates ambiguous markings column is marked if one of the selection buttons Mark address with most data or Mark by date field was activated previously but Infopost Manager was unable to make a clear decision These groups must be processed manually if only one or only selected addresses are to be written to Uy A The Match accuracy column shows how well discarded addresses match kept ones Smaller values 123 Ho Rie may indicate pseudo duplicates If one of the listed groups is selected it can be opened by clicking on the button Group overview Now the contained duplicates can be edited You can use the same button to change from this view back to the view showing the duplicate groups Selection button for all duplicate groups Icon Explanation Use this button to automatically mark only this address record for writing to with the most data sil Prioritize your addres
248. ess export Thus no additional conversions have to be made if you process your data with other applications Output format File format Settings Formatted text spaces separated prr dBASE ML file dbf MS Excel worksheet xls MS Excel 007 worksheet xlsx M5 Access database mdb MS Access 2007 Data base accdb HL file ml Inkjet printer fixed number of lines tet e Text file with fixed field width on page 419 e Text file with variable field width on page 420 e MS Access database on page 420 e Inkjet printers on page 421 e XML file on page 422 334 Export file Esport file File name CAL zer Public Documents ew Project Addresses cev f The file name and the directory path to which the addresses are to be exported are shown in this area If you want to store the file into another directory or if you want to rename it click the button 14 2 2 Specify format on page 327 14 2 3 Start export on page 331 335 15 Modules Contents 15 1 Professional sy orion ea AA Ewe ewe 337 15 1 1 Feature Matrix so dee amp tw 6 4 a daa 337 15 2 International optimization 6 2 2 e e e e ee ee ee ee 339 15 2 1 Addresses menu 1 1 a 340 1022 Preparation TENU p s oko dn ss sanar EE ERS Se ee PERS 341 15 2 3 Results menu 2442462644463 48 F be eee ed de hE eH ERLE Se 351 1524 as t rpa aa ae eak a p aa aea a a ee a 307 L VAIO 2 ee eee RAE RR EERE Ee
249. et 06 02 14 Muster 4G 2 1 riant 06 02 14 Bauer Kirch GmbH 172 iant A 2 ae 4 Muster AG 2 2 1 iant A 2 Lar 1 Please refer to the pallet target list on page 176 paragraph to get further information about the table fields Posting lists If you produce a job splitting you have to use specific posting lists for their delivery at Deutsche Post AG Beside others you have to present a check list job splitting 381 Print postal forms Forme Required forme Infopost ie Check list job splitting oof Job 1 Bauer Kirch GmbH of Posting 11 05 02 14 oof Posting lists oon ffl Warant list of Pallet notification cof Posting 1 2 06 02 14 hi Posting lists el Variant list of Pallet notification cof Job 2 Muster AG of Posting 2 1 06 02 14 A Posting lists After having ct Variant list ef Pallet notification ofl Posting 242 07 02 14 of Posting lists seil Warant list uf Pallet notification Phone number for inquires 49 123 4567 89 Sender Specify date Pallets will be picked up All postings lists you print here are marked with an additional J as designation 15 4 2 6 Address export After defining a job splitting you can filter for specific jobs and save them during the address export 382 a Export wizard Step 1 of 3 Specify output fle O SEN First define which Addresses shall be exported and specify the file format and name Output f
250. etters even without possessing a duplex printer During the first print process only the odd pages are printed in reverse order on page 263 Afterwards the printed pages have to be put back in the paper tray of the printer once again Mind the correct orientation of the pages In the subsequent printing process only the even pages are printed now in correct normal order Print preferably Print preferably O fast 8 accurate Decide whether you want to print your document as quickly as possible or to approximate the print out to the view on your screen likely to take longer The option fast may cause changes in the line and page breaks depending on your printer If this happens you may need to select the option accurate Please note that the visualization of truncated texts on page 277 as well as the text length check on page 312 only works with activated option accurate 265 Ee Ee Additional pages tab General Options Extended Additional pages Paper source Overview pages Summary page at the beginning of every print job E Summary page at the end of every print job Setup pages Number setup pages at the beginning of every print job Number setup pages at the end of every print job Overview pages In this part you determine whether and when you would like to get summary pages and when specific separating pages should be printed Summary pages are especially useful when
251. ew posting lists International Support VarioPlus International Discontinuation EDS posting data record Discontinuation Address clearing online minor bug fixes What was new in version 7 4 1 from 15 06 2011 new GT amp C and posting lists International Substitution table for gender Mail merge multi page backgrounds PDF Support datamatrix code Support QR code Datamatrix codes on posting lists and pallet label several program optimizations and error corrections What was new in version 7 4 from 24 02 2011 Support DHL Infopost former Infopost Schwer only with module Professional numerous minor bug fixes What was new in version 7 3 from 17 12 2010 new GT amp C and posting lists International new posting lists Infopost Infobrief National new posting list Frankierservice Extra items for Infopost Koop customers Premiumadress Support additional roles e g payer new variants Hybrid and Retoure Extra as of 14 02 2011 Price and product list v23 various program optimizations further error corrections What was new in version 7 2 from 20 09 2010 Mail merge Usability documents PDF JPG etc as watermarks 390 Visualization overfull text frames Support barcode type EAN128 Export mail merge documents as PDF files Address management highly extended filtering capabilities manual insertion new fields Vario only with module Vario Performance optimizatio
252. f a print job using the buttons and Using the zoom button the view of the statistics and lists can be magnified or made smaller by a right or left click right click to zoom out left click to zoom in Furthermore you may span an area to be magnified by holding the left mouse button pressed Additionally you can change the page view 1 to view two pages Z or several pages 416 You can use the Customize button to hide the results of certain Infopost Manager steps from the project statistics Select sections General Address import Address editing h Adressdialag Dispatch properties WY ltem properties Production properties Payment method properties Optimization results Partial postings Order management Cira Printing statistics and lists is started using the Print button or the printer icon As an alternative to printing you can also export the pages to a PDF file You only have to use the PDF button or to click the PDF icon Y If you click the Close button the Print Preview mode will quit A 5 Table configuration Tray target Pallet Pallet target Type aba o Type Label ern E vot ETE RR Optimize column width 1 Germany 0 3 RR ZU 2 RZ 2 RR 20 2 RZ 2 RR 21 2 RZ 2 RR 22 2 RZ 2 RR 22 2 RZ 2 RR 22 2 RZ 2 RR 22 RZ 2 RR 23 2 RZ 2 You can change the column layout or optimize the column width by right clicking the column header and selecting the desired me
253. field Filling fields can be used to insert user defined text elements at a location of your choice Using them enables you for example to implement your own separators into a text Combination field Combination fields are a very potent instrument of the Infopost Manager They combine the contents of many data fields into one single field When editing the settings of this field a new dialog opens where you can define the properties of the field All settings are automatically stored and can be reused 409 Define combination field Fields Field Address fields Title 5pace Address fields First name Add separator 5pace Address fields Last name Add space Delete Down Options F Automatically remove spaces Remove enclosing separators for empy felda Preview M Schall Cancel You can add data fields to a combination field by simply clicking Add field and choosing the field you want Use the buttons Add space and Add separator to insert a space or a separator behind the last selected field Nearly every text or symbol can be used as a separator Some characters are not available as separators due to internal program restrictions An example for a symbol like that is the pipe Ee Length 1 When you add a separator to a combination field the dialog Constants format appears where the elements of your separator are defined The Length field shows the number of used u
254. field Variant Vario will already be filled Within the address management you can chose a new assignment for each address To this purpose the window Edit address will now also include the two fields Variant and is _ Edit address General Compariy A Company 1 Kaiser Nachfolger GmbH amp Co EG Company 2 Metallgiebere Maschinenbau Company 3 Dept Customer ng Address Street Ho Suppl Rathausstr ZIP City 20095 Hamburg P O box AIP City Major recipient AIP city Ignore address Variant 4 ls To activate these fields and thus make them changeable the field contents in the field Variant must already have been assigned to the desired variants within the tem properties on page 362 Enter the desired internal key in the field Variant for which you can also use new values New or unknown values will then be assigned to the standard variant until another variant will be defined for these values within the item properties Infopost Manager will automatically fill the field is based on the assignments of the field contents to the variants in the item properties on page 362 Additionally you can also choose the desired variant assignment directly via the dropdown menu of the field is 360 Warlant Variant B Varnant C Furthermore the address management s filtering methods now offer the additional item Variants Yarantz Selection Description Field cont
255. file type The text import wizard detected that pour addresses are available in format Fixed field IF this should be wrong please choose a format which better describes pour data As soon as all entries are correct click on Next Select the data type best describing your addresses 0 Separator helds are separated by characters such as a semicolon or tab Fixed width fields are ordered in columns which may be sub divided by spaces Start import in line 1 Sourcefile C Line 1 contains field descriptor Address preview File S 4projects picassodoc D emodateienty As E xamplessF ruibling tat O0000000100Banhnhofstr 42 661115aarbriick 00000000200Bahnhofstr 50 66111 5aarbruck OOO000003S00Bannhotstr 52 661115aarbrick O0000000400Bahnhoftstr 54 661115aarbrucki o0000000500Bshnhofstr 54 661115aarbricks OOO00000600Bahnhotstr 54 661115aarbrick OOOoOdOO0TOOReahnhofstr 82 661115aarbrick 00000000s800Bahnhofstr 62 661115aarbrick OOO00000S00Rahnhotstr 6l e61115aarbricki Te tt6lliSaarbr ick _ E Fran am Sw ON No pw we a Activate the option Line contains field name if this applies to your source file ol Rie The settings defined in the text file wizard for importing ASCII files can be saved to a template at the end of the import procedure in other words after the field allocation and reused when importing again Infopost Manager will automatically propose the adequate template for homogeneous files
256. for your information 158 Mo Desenplion Tray Pallets Grosz kg You can define the first partial posting by using the Add button General tab Here you can redefine the delivery values which you specified in the production properties on page 153 for each partial posting 159 A Define posting 1 General Date Date 14 01 2015 Time 12 00 Delivery use global delivery place Pick up Musterstr 12 12355 Musterhausen Pallets being picked up by Deutsche Post Pallets posted at a Deutsche Post acceptance office Muster AG Musterstr 12355 Musterhausen Pallet storage retrieval on 11 02 2015 Description Automatic Posting 14 01 15 1 Date Here you can set delivery date and time for the handover of this partial posting to the Deutsche Post AG The data can differ from the data you have defined in the production properties on page 153 before Delivery The delivery place respective the acceptance office can be set here individually or independently of the various partial postings Choose the option use global delivery place to determine that you will post the items at the delivery place you have already defined in the production properties on page 153 The option Pallets being picked up by Deutsche Post AG destines the pallets to be picked up at the producing supplier by the Deutsche Post AG at the specified point of time Use the option Pallets posted at Deutsche
257. fulfilled respectively you can define the visible text You may enter a free text or use the value of any field To do so click the plus button on the right Subfield Using subfields you can transfer dedicated field parts to a new field in order to remove e g pre or suffixes 411 Data field Address fields Company Change settings Settings Starting position w Width C End position Characters Preview Field content Spahn KG Section Spahn In area Data field select the field to be segmented in the dialog window which opens if you click the La button If the selected data field can be configured via separate options you can modify these via the Change settings button The area Settings is vital Here you have to enter the Starting position and the End position of the field content part which will be transferred to the subfield As an alternative to the absolute end position you can also define it relatively by the number of Characters which will be included in the subfield starting from the starting position The Preview area visualizes the results of your settings via a now afterwards illustration Begin and End If you print your documents with addressers or enveloping machines there are two special fields Begin and End available for each of the categories Batch Tray and Pallet series You can use these fields for controlling your printers directly
258. further identical words from misspelling using the Change all menu command You will no longer be prompted to correct this word Finally you can start a batch job which checks and if appropriate corrects all words in one run by HE clicking the Y button Details can be found in chapter Spell check on page 309 Insert field This option is available for all position frames with editable text text field rotated text address block signature and sender s instruction 203 F Choose data fields E Explanation to focused field c E Address fields Fiat of the adress fie Ira C Fimaz C Strate C Hausnummer C Stra enzusatz C Postfach C FLZ Strate O PLZ Postfach DO PL Grobemptanger DO Ort Strate O Or Postfach O Ort Grohempfanger DO Land C Anrede O Titel C Yomame DO Nachname rn Cancel _ You can use this option to include further fields into the document e g fields you explicitly imported with your address record Short texts on the right hand side of the mask offer additional information on each IPM data field Using this feature you are able to include names of persons pets or specific products into a text which is identical in all other respects In the following some interesting data fields from selected categories will be presented to you e Additional address fields on page 400 e Adressdialog fields on page 408 e Other spe
259. g that vary from the Edit variant on page 364 dialog In the field Prefix you can assign a prefix to the designations of the variants in your list In the Numeration area you can choose between kinds of numeration for the designation of your variants You can either assign a Consecutive number for each variant or take over the content of the variant field from your address files using the option Field content 366 Use the command Add from clipboard if you like to create a large list of variants in one step This import only works if each variant is defined in one line Each line has to contain the following values separated by tabs Variant description thickness in 1 10 mm weight in g unwrapped field content and postage of remaining items in cents Variants whose fields unwrapped are not empty and do not contain F 0 or N are defined as unwrapped o 15 3 3 2 Production properties Similar to the item properties on page 362 there is now a new tab Variants General tab The Vario module supplements this tab with further options for the production method Please note that these settings only apply to national items Production properties pania Production method Single flow method 5 Multi flow method with pallet consolidation Variant after variant pallet spanning Pallet after pallet variant spanning Hybrid type simultaneously producible pallets Minimize retoolngz O Variant clean productio
260. g correct will be ignored in this mode 2 normal The normal search intensity extends the search for sound suggestions by checking the complete ZIP range of a city Thus addresses can be corrected by plausible street names in other ZIP areas of the same city eventually even of cities with identical names such as Frankfurt am Main and Oder 3 high If this mode has been chosen Infopost Manager considers the largest possible set of sound ad 95 He dresses for automatic correction or suggests proportionally more addresses for manual correction With high search intensity less addresses will be automatically corrected but forwarded to the manual correction However theses additional efforts normally cause a superior quality Rating tolerance This slide control informs Infopost Manager how to judge whether or not two addresses are identical Carefully change the position of the slide control because the tolerance has direct impact on the automatic correction capability of Infopost Manager Possibly incorrect addresses will be putatively corrected if the rating tolerance has been set to similar If the tolerance is exact the address check only corrects few addresses automatically and offers you more addresses for manual correction Thesaurus The Thesaurus is some kind of a look up table for the address check which can only contain postal correct addresses By using this valuable tool you can e g transfer a street wh
261. g produc tion It groups all pallets to the same targets of type routing zone routing region or German Preview oy Print Print options Export cally Pallet target Quantity Laba Met fkg rar fkg Tray ra from to Palets 127 lof 163 208 209 250 251 283 AA ki i Ri miet 1 3627 2403 Ml erties From the table you can derive e the pallet target Type RZ RR or Germany e the resulting Marking for the pallet label e the respective Net and Gross weight and e the Number of Pallets Trays or Bundles and Items for the pallet target In the lower status bar you can read the total number of pallet targets which was calculated during the optimization based on the given information on the various preparation menu items 176 If you defined Partial postings on page 158 you can filter the table accordingly Each partial posting can be selected via a dropdown menu which is located in the menu bar In addition to that you can also browse through the various partial posting lists via the arrow buttons Posting 05 02 14 1 aam 6 5 Individual Katalog dispatch When producing items as Individual Katalog dispatch in the Results menu specific production lists become available under the option Individual Katalog dispatch These lists are similar to the ones you know from Infopost items s Prewew 2 Print Pint ion Expat Close Tray Mo Adderses Mat kg Gros kg F i g5
262. garded as duplicates if this option is checked The same holds for companies however companies and individuals with similar address will not be shown as duplicates Make sure that this option will not be used if your address file contains high rises or industry parks where all companies have similar addresses Otherwise all records will be shown in one duplicate group This option will be automatically deactivated if you reduce search intensity Slider Match accuracy By using this slider you can define the degree which has to be met if two field contents shall be treated as similar and thus lead to a duplicate Especially last names or company names are often written incorrectly typos or similar The slider s default position middle normally is sufficient If you want to detect more similar spellings push the slider to the left If you receive a lot of pseudo duplicates push it to the right to close Slider Search intensity If the address database is relatively large 20 000 addresses and more or if the addresses are only spread over a few routing regions it is recommended to reduce the search intensity A lower intensity causes the duplicate search to mutually compare fewer addresses because fewer parameters will be taken into account Thus it is possible that there remain some duplicates undetected 118 Key field comparison tab Options of duplicate search Regular search Key field comparison
263. gin Visibility a On page s 5 From page on all pages 5 Invisible Dependent on field This option offers a number of creative possibilities Here you can insert either a rectangle or even single lines which can be creatively designed H l 2tlt3ojoigi igai lB Ji Faleg L Ek o m You can define the graphical appearance of your frame via the Colors and lines tab More detailed information can be found here on page 271 Lines Each of the four ambient frame lines can be individually set visible or invisible thickness as well as line type may be changed using the thickness and type options Color The color of the border can also be defined using this dialog Click on the Color button and select the desired color 297 11 4 9 t o fo Complete You can use this option to set the background color of a frame Activate the Color button and select the desired color Signature Use this frame to insert scanned signatures into a mail merge document Scanned signatures should be available in monochrome files in order to ensure optimum processing in mail merge printing and for being displayed in different colors Select signature As soon as you insert a signature frame into your mail merge document the following window pops up Select signature Available signatures Description Mas Mustermann You can now select a signature from the project spanning signature pool and a
264. ground it is recommended to activate option Print in best quality During printing the original background document will be used rather than the optimized one Please keep in mind that as a result considerably more data will be sent to the printer Please note that Infopost Manager categorically places 10 pixels on exactly one millimeter for images This corresponds to a resolution of 256 dpi This strict presettings are also applied for the original sizes of background images Thus convert the images prior to their usage with these values if you intend to use them e g as a fully surfaced water mark or scale it via the options in field Size Clicking the Delete button overrides the usage of a background document Position and size In this area you can move the background document horizontally and vertically on a static basis For instance use these settings to arrange the trim marks of the print PDF document the way that they are placed in the upper left corner and thus will not be shown in the complete document You define how you like to embed the original document via the Size field 1 Original size The document will be shown exactly as it is available if it is too small there will be empty areas if it is too big it will be truncated at the margins 2 Paper format The background document will be scaled exactly to the size of the mail merge document all margins will be flush this scaling is not proportional i e the background
265. grouped by routing regions Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check You see the number of addresses belonging to a specific routing region The geographic distribution within Germany is shown by the Map Tool on page 196 193 ie Fa Address spread by routing regions A o Preview ca Print Print options Export Close 24178 Unused 24 257 The spread by routing regions can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to h Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 1 7 Address spread by routing zones This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses grouped by routing zones Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check You see the number of addresses belonging to a specific routing zone The geographic distribution within Germany is shown by the Map Tool on page 196 194 pa a a Address spread by routi g
266. h leading zero the respective ZIPs of German addresses will automatically be expanded to the mandatory 5 places Export Details on the address export from the address management can be found here on page 333 Analysis This menu item offers the following statistical information on your processed addresses e Address spread by ZIP on page 189 e Address spread by cities on page 190 e Spread by provinces on page 191 e Spread by Nielsen regions on page 192 e Address spread by routing regions on page 193 e Address spread by routing zones on page 194 e Address spread by countries on page 195 e Map Tool on page 196 Filter This option makes it possible to create a list of addresses from the current database which matches the filter criteria You can use these filters to for instance switch between the categories Infopost and remaining items Filters can be selected via the arrow to the right of the button Dependent on the project status different filters are available thus for instance filtering for Infopost is only possible after postage optimization on page 154 has been done 16 Fo Te VE E anagenment Der 3 Profes K F l Address management Edit Find Fl a F C Options Frmaz Sbraba Metalgeberei Maschinenbau Ralhausstr kaier Nachfolge GmbH EL a Analysis 2 SPECTRO Analytical Instrum Mook und Gibel Tri 4 Wagner GmbH u Coa KG gl Country codes 5 Scheckel Updat
267. hapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 7 3 Address spread by cities This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses grouped by cities Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check You see the number of addresses belonging to a specific city The geographic distribution within Germany is shown by the Map Tool on page 196 190 ie SS F s Address spread by citi es Preview lt lt Print Print options Export Close 24178 Unused 24 257 e Province e Nielsen region e Quantity oe Lower Saxony 1 1 Lower Saxony 1 Schleswig Holstein 1 SchleswigHolstein 1 Schleswig Holstein 1 va Schleswig Holstein 1 Neuhof Oeverdiek Timm Schleswig Holstein 1 Eutin S sel Schleswig Holstein 1 Altenkrempe Neustadt in Schleswig Holstein 1 Gr mitz Morest SchleswigHolstein 1 Gohl Gremersdorf Olden Schleswig Holstein 1 Fehmarn SchleswigHolstein 1 Heiligenhafen Schleswig Holstein 1 Grofienbrode Schleswig Holstein 1 Bad Segeberg Fahrenkru Schleswig Holstein 1 al dE
268. he Pallet net weight in the respective field The default value 22 kg holds for Euro pallets In the field Maximal pallet gross weight you can predefine the maximum weight of your pallets including all trays bundles Using this option your pallets will never outweigh the value you set here If you have for example a pallet rack of limited carrying capacity this option enables you to produce only pallets that can be carried by your rack Production properties for trays This area is only visible if you produce trays on page 148 Otherwise you will see here the production properties for bundles You can specify here the maximal tray number per pallet Ensure that the pallets gross weight does not exceed 700 kg respectively 600 kg for stackable pallets If appropriate adapt the defaults for Trays per layer Production properties for bundles This area is only visible if you produce bundles on page 150 Otherwise you will see here the production properties for trays You can specify here the maximal bundle number per pallet Ensure that the pallets gross weight does not exceed 700 kg Number of pallets Checking the option Minimize postage higher production complexity urges Infopost Manager to pro duce as much as possible routing region respectively routing zone pallets Thus you have to produce more pallets and production complexity increases 152 5 3 1 5 When using the option Minimize product
269. he main dictionary and select the user dictionary The later holds those correct words which are not contained in the main dictionary Main dictionary English GB r User dictionary Bees JE With Infopost Manager the main dictionaries for the languages German and English are installed If you should require main dictionaries for other languages please contact the hotline of Deutsche Post on 49 180 5 334460 14 ct per minute or part thereof from a German landline or a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network You are also able to define more than one user dictionary e g one for each language or one for topics with dedicated technical terms In order to do so click the button User dictionary Benutzer Delete You can create a new dictionary via clicking the die New button Afterwards this new dictionary can be selected You are also able to Edit the various entries of the currently selected user dictionary by clicking the respective button 310 Added words Benutzer adu Auto Corrections Words added to your custom dictionary will be considered correct when checking spelling Add this ward Add Musterhausen Delete Mustermann This dialog shows you all words which you added to the user dictionary in the course of time Using the buttons Add and Delete you directly affect this list For instance you can delete or correct words which you added wrongly
270. he optimum font size for applying your sender s instruction is between the versal heights 1 5 mm and 2 0 mm Address export If the international postage optimization has been executed Infopost Manager Professional is able to export the international address data for the respective categories Infopost International Letters International at kilo rates and Letters International 355 a Export wizard Step 1 of 3 Specify output file First define which Addresses shall be exported and specify the file format and name Output format File format CSW file csv ka Settings Esport file 6 Save Addresses in one file Extended settings Save Addresses per category in separate file Save Addresses filtered into file s Type ooost Natonal Tray Filter Directory C Users nf Documents File name Addresses Explanation Mew Project Infopost National cew 0 438 Infopozt tems O New Project Letter National csw Remaining items New Project Infopost International caw J Infopost International items EO New Project Letter International cz Remaining items International O New Project Letters International at kilo Letters International at kilo rates New Project Unused items ce Unused items Load template Y The addresses can be filtered within the different categories by dedicated trays bundles tray bundle targets pallets and pallet targets Even sorting by the various filter values combined with storage in sep
271. he options offered by this tab are also available to you when you create a new customer 205 8 1 3 Projects You can use the New Project button or menu item to create a new project for the selected customer The dialog windows Save project as on page 16 pops up Project overview You can use the menu item Project overview to get an overview of all projects managed for the selected customer with information on the project name the folder in which it was stored and the project status Furthermore you can see the creation the last change date and the total editing time The About column contains the information which were specified in the project properties on page 42 dialog window in the About field Diesenption Anredentbelprituna Adressaendening Anechtenubenaururg Anschitternubesprururig Demo DHL Infopaost Demo DHL Infopast Demo Intemational Demo Intemational Demo Standard Demo Standard Demo Standard Demo Standard Demo Wario Demo Wario Dubletter Dubletten Neues Projekt New Project Voragenprojekt 8 1 4 Extras You can use the Mailer Set customer as mailer menu item to globally specify a mailer for all projects This mailer s data will be printed on the posting lists of all further projects usually the information of the lettershop The mailer data cannot be deleted until a new mailer has been specified Data Edit Projects Custo Companyl Cr E5 Columns Extended mode If you select
272. he password in the respective text fields In case you have chosen a fixed name in the section Backup file for every backup a windows will appear in which you will have to decide whether an existing file should be overwritten If you want to skip this query and always overwrite the old file you can activate the option overwrite existing file automatic backup Besides starting a backup manually you can tell Infopost Manager to start a backup at a certain interval To do so activate the option activate automatic data backup and specify the number of days after which a backup is to be done Recovery Please note that at recovering all changes made on files in the meantime will be lost In case you have saved your data using the backup function of Infopost Manager you can recover your settings in the following way e At first ensure that Infopost Manager has been properly closed e Find the data directory of Infopost Manager You have specified it at installation Its de fault location for Windows XP is C Documents and SettingsAll UsersDokumenteDeutsche Post AGInfopost Managerdata For Windows 7 it is C UsersPublicDocumentsDeutsche Post AGInfopost Managerdata e The zip file which has been created at backup contains a directory data as well Extract it to the exact location of your data directory Overwrite the files of your data directory with those of the backup file 233 8 11 9 Administrator o Tie Gener
273. he security level shall be the more characters will have to be used for the creation of the codes You may also add a fixed prefix This can be useful to add new addresses to an existing Adressdialog project Even if a number of codes of this project has been transferred to the server already a prefix can ensure that all newly generated codes will differ from the old ones With activated option Use only the following character classes you can define the characters which will be contained in the code in favor of the code s readability but in disfavor of the code security e Capital letters A to Z will be used e Small letters a to z will be used e Digits O to 9 will be used e Hide similar characters disables confusable characters such as small L and digit 1 or capital O and digit 0 from code creation Thus the danger of a code being misinterpreted will be reduced Choose option Use user defined character class if you want to determine the characters to be used for the code creation For that purpose you have to enter at least nine different characters The more characters you assign to the character class the less characters are used for the code creation with sustained security Using this option manually mind that confusable characters e g capital S and digit 5 will not be used This will minimize the risk of a code being faulty entered by the user If you choose option Use Code from database field you can define the spe
274. hesaurus entry by clicking the arrow icon of the OK button and choosing the menu item OK and save in Thesaurus to address M dress type OK and save in Thesaurus af Box r recipient All addresses in the address check s result list which could be corrected by applying this new Thesaurus entry will be assigned a Thesaurus suggestion or will be directly corrected depending on the settings given Clicking the OK button accepts the change only once as soon as a similar incorrect address occurs it still will be shown as being incorrect Now you can decide again whether or not the change justifies a Thesaurus entry Saving a new entry in the Thesaurus will affect all projects i e current and also future project will benefit from a large Thesaurus likewise and the number of postal incorrect addresses will thus be smartly reduced Show and accept Thesaurus suggestions Thesaurus suggestions will only be shown if option on page 96 Use for automatic correction was unchecked Otherwise any incorrect address with a corresponding Thesaurus entry would be auto matically corrected A Thesaurus suggestion only differs from a normal address check suggestion by having the cor rectness probability set to 100 since the entry has been manually and knowingly stored at least once Additionally and in order to offer a better visual impression any Thesaurus suggestion will be highlighted by a blue band with the embedded text
275. higher performance better results Support Thesaurus Import improved analysis PDF export klickTel interface News Update checks Export Field types can be specified if appropriate Excel 5 and Excel 97 format Mail merge new format postcard incl template Support printer pools optimized ZIP search Changing license information possible various minor improvements several bug fixes What was new in version 5 2 from 21 11 2002 Support tables of fees for 2002 and 2003 new posting lists 2003 396 e Localization in German and English e Import Merging various data sources e Export Field attn more configurable improved Excel Export e Mail merge Searching addresses possible e Adaptation sender s instruction to the current regularities e improved handling Non German addresses e various smaller optimizations e some bug fixes What was new in version 5 1 1 Update available only in German e Export new fields bundle and tray number and number of mailings in bundle tray e Mail Merge multipage letters possible copy and paste of text blocks and position frames possible new feature rotated text turn formatted texts incl data fields with arbitrary angles navigate and edit in mail merge edit mode using hot keys Bundle and tray numbers can be printed scaleable franking mark Overview page before each batch can be prin
276. ic field contents such as the customer number Free text can be added by simply typing it in If you want to insert database fields locate the cursor at the place where the field contents shall be pasted and press the button for selecting the desired database field Please mind that the info line starts and ends with an This character may also be used as separator between different fields Invalid addresses Addresses may become invalid for Premiumadress e g if field values for the product variant coming from the address management are greater than 5 or if the alphanumeric string for the user specific data is longer than 16 characters If so the Premiumadress impression is shown in red Muster AG Musterstr 12 12355 Musterhausen Pp Deutsche Po ss INFOPOST STF Siepmann und Teutscher G Herrn Karl Seeger Hauptstr 43 2 446 Selsingen Mail merge documents containing invalid Premiumadress impressions cannot be printed Therefore Infopost Manager automatically verifies and logs all existing address fields prior to printing Print As soon as you start printing a Premiumadress mail merge document you will receive a notification about the Premiumadress settings right after the Print on page 261 dialog window 293 e 11 4 6 Premiumadress Printi 19 Settings Product variant 1 Basis Contractual partner Muster AG Musterhausen 123456709 ERP 23333 Premiumadress ID 1 User epectic data
277. ic further processing on a regular basis The use of the specific template lt import structure gt ensures that the export files where possible have the structure of the original file which you used for import The previous settings are overwritten as soon as you load a template You can save the current settings in a new template on page 331 in the last step of the export dialog Specify output file In the first step you define the file format and the target file s for the current export Output format Infopost Manager provides a variety of file formats for address export Thus no additional conversions have to be made if you will process your data with other applications Output format File format Settings Formatted text spaces separated pri dBASE ILIY file db MS Excel worksheet xls MS Excel 2007 worksheet xlsx MS Access database mdb MS Access 2007 Data base accdb HL file ml Inkjet printer fed number of lines tet e Text file with fixed field width on page 419 e Text file with variable field width on page 420 e MS Access database on page 420 324 e Inkjet printers on page 421 e XML file on page 422 Export files Save addresses in one file Export file Save Addresses in one file Extended settings 5 Save Addresses per category in separate file 5 Save Addresses filtered into hle s Filter Directory C Users Public Documents m
278. ican E ASHTEAD SURREY KT21 2D 66 Alumni Office ANDOVER HANTS SP10 ING 66 718 entra BERN 645 Tumczyk Salau 100 Salzgitter 65 Kapproth Gleichen 100 Verlag Ha Rosdorf BEY klapproih Gottingen 73 15 Mille C Langerhagen 6 Kapproth Langwedel B55 Klapproth Verden Aller 83 18 Trinkfruch R desheim 100 v OK X Cancel Li Pause 2 0 ye hm be la or Bi Pa BI BI Pat Pad Pad PI M B e B Ra PJ din e a A AJ i Re hb FE e Pi a a A tn ta HH he Group overview Duplicate group 7 of 73 182 duplicates in total 2 edited groups Do not write to 2 addresses In this view all duplicate groups are listed one below the other without showing the dedicated du plicates The columns Common company name with individual addresses Common name and Common city list the information which are identical or very similar for all addresses within the duplicate group The corresponding content of the first address from the respective duplicate group is shown If the corresponding text is completely written this means that precisely this text is similar in all addresses If the corresponding text is written in brackets this means that the duplicates were recognized due to phonetic similarity e g Smiths Cosmetics and Smythes Cosmetics A word ending with is similar for all addresses in the duplicate group up to the last shown character Only the endings or continuations are diff
279. ick Clicks are always dependent on the selected step during the project You can use Quick Clicks to call the appropriate program functions Quick Clicks hai Import addresses Item Production Dispatch Project properties Close project 2 4 Recent projects Recent projects Demo Mailings Demo Professional Demo Mailings Demo International Search project demo a Demo DHL Infopost Demo International Demo Professional Demo Standard Demo Vario Here you can jump to recently opened projects Furthermore you can search for projects and open them directly 13 2 5 Result area J f Qh ree Lem Escena projects a Admiro y i DA o 3 2 hid Fej Tagh R hai i q we 7 e Letter mail item Franking mark Postage stamp Remaining item Premiumadress GOGREEN Die Aig sta Por Oe ans hari beeen pe eed F rmal fo Ticker E WL de Die Hilos sata Por Da indeed les etre DA sp id de Fag OL 130 1 1150 ren Ca LTS Cee eel da Pandang mark This results in the dlowing values Prog lion Haberal Petcare tay Te khamatan i Li z Fari irl I pH ee b oe Hii Cao et wanardi Vong A Voted E ariar Conia Pinker Irenas am ri J dA Lefer mil en Frames ried Portas then Aeris ber Papeete dati GOGAREA Prk Leger Fs ciedad fee Cel det oe Gel gh egin 0 1540 10 30 1 au This area displays the result
280. ield salutation contains Frau 4 4 3 If option activate auto correction on the preceding page is disabled addresses will not be automati cally corrected Infopost Manager shows the number of addresses in the Automatically corrigible line which could have been auto corrected but which have to be manually processed now For Incorrect addresses Infopost Manager was not able to identify the gender This can occur if the first name is unknown or if it does not match the specified gender Results The salutation check results show those addresses for which errors or deficiencies were discovered They appear as soon as the statistics window has been closed by clicking on OK Infopost Manager lists all data records depending on the settings given in options on page 84 This address selection can also be changed later The Options button provides a selection menu on the View tab where every address type can be activated and deactivated wf OK X Cancel i Pause gt Edit C Statisties Options le Ds Amede View ia a Lf Nachname Geschlecht Femal Ertan Sermonen GmbH Schroder Packin GmbH Daume male dosel Carl Aug Lennaels male Bauer male Aechene Maschmenbeu Hemr Hanish Schremann malo Aachena Misch und Enetmas Aachenet Printer und Schoko Hellerithal amp Cie Spiegel anul Neu GmbH aba moden Angebka Bark Gmb REM Krevizenbeck Engineenn Dieter Beraues male Heinrich Repo male Ru
281. ields in the search e Only key field comparison If you selected this mode you exclusively restrict the search to the chosen key fields The settings in the Regular search are disabled The key field comparison will be executed as pure collation i e without fuzzy logic The proper settings will be defined on the respective tabs In the Import files area you can decide whether you want to create duplicate groups from all addresses or only if the potential duplicates come from different import files For the latter activate the correspondent option This area is only enabled if more than one address file has been imported Regular search tab Options of duplicate search Search mode Regular search Settings Consider contact person with companies E Ignore addresses without contact person A Ignore contact persons without first name E Find retail offices in same city A Consider field Company 3 E Compare company and name fields A Consider first name with home addresses E Show similar address as duplicate Match accuracy Search intensity I low faster Consider contact person with companies I l high slower If you have two contact persons for one company in your database both records will be recognized as duplicates You can avoid this by activating this option Now the field Contact person will also be taken into a
282. ier Default doc umeni Project nama kiaw Propet Desorption haw Propet Prot durar minutes ragib on OP OF 2015 103641 Ey b Lhanged on 20 07 2014 1036 50 Ey jb Opi mized on About Admririnior 42 ie General tab Project name new Project Description About Folder Project root directory Shatus Pry duration O minutes Created on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Changed on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Sender Muster AG Wusterhausen 123456789 Mailer Muster AG Wusterhausen 112145689 Deler unknowre Cira Description In addition to the project name which also serves as the project file name you can specify e g an abbreviation or other information for each project In this field you can also use special characters and or umlauts The description of a project is always given in lists and statistics for example the Tray list on page 169 and the Palette list on page 174 or in the project statistics on page 184 so that it is always possible to assign the results to a project About Further information on the project can be given here For instance you can indicate more details to the mailshot campaign or to the customer if you are processing the project for another department or as lettershop on page 223 You can also manage information regarding the mailshot content the address file or other particular ities of a project The text you enter in the About field will also be availabl
283. ignments 55 Confirm File C Users Public Documents Deutsche Post AG infopost Manager Data Examples National dbf with the same field strcuture was already imported today at 10 48 Do you want to adopt the assignments from this import e e e Assigning fields on the current page e Automatic field assignment on page 58 e Deactivating whole lines on page 58 e Address preview on page 58 e Address record preview on page 59 e Fields on page 60 e Templates on page 60 e Country codes on page 61 e Options on page 73 e Further functions on page 61 e Address import Status report on page 62 Assigning fields Content assignment The content assignment dialog window opens by double clicking the column header assignment field or via the contextual menu item Edit field right mouse click cat assignment Firmal Content Current assignment Company 1 suggestion by field analysis Company1 Import Import field 5 Import without assignment Leave preceding blanks Leave succeeding blanks 5 Choose assignment Company 1 Accept suggestion of the field analysis Change name of unassigned fields In the Content area the assignment currently given and the suggestions from the automatic content analysis are displayed 56 fo In the Import area you can activate various options for assigning each field Use the option Import field to decide whether a field shall be imp
284. in this project which will be shown in this list However legally binding will only be the account you will receive from Deutsche Post AG With button Customize at the top bar you can select which project steps will be contained in the project statistics The settings you make here will be saved persistently for the project More detailed information on the additional options available in this preview are part of chapter Print Preview on page 416 184 7 1 1 General This block shows the project name the description the text of the Info field q v Project properties on page 42 and further information on the current project properties Project statistics Page 1 of 3 Project New Project Status 21 01 2014 General Project name New Project Desorption information Proyect duration i Hour 37 minutes Created on 21 01 3014 09 49 30 Changed on 31 01 2014 11 48 47 Optimized on 21 01 2014 11 48 41 Mail merge Sender Muster AG Musterstr 12 12355 Musterhausen EKP add Wailer Muster AS Musterstr 12 12355 Musterhausen EXP zada 7 1 2 Address import This table briefly summarizes all results after importing addresses It shows both the source files from which the addresses were taken and detailed information on how many addresses have been imported how they are spread across Germany and foreign countries and the respective quota of postally correct addresses The number of addresses not imported is also sta
285. indow envelope s window For long DIN envelopes you will see the coding areas set by Deutsche Post which in some cases may not be filled at all or only with specific content Use this menu item to show and hide these positioning aids 210 11 3 5 11 3 6 Mmiiztzisiais Gtr p eto iwini ini 14 Mrisitiz7iea1risi41arzr1 g Visualize truncated text If this option is activated frames with spilled text in vertical or horizontal direction will be shown with red background to gt Alt OF ts 2 Aa x CEPEDA th 3 a fa fi e Sh ae Pe Bee Be ee Oe O AS 50 Jahre Muster AG Additionally Infopost Manager dots the text frame s margins where the spill happens Texts can only be truncated on the right resp left margin if option Line break is deactivated in the text frame properties The visualization of truncated texts only works with activated option accurate in the document s print options on page 265 Refresh view Choose this menu item or press the F5 key if you want to refresh the screen 211 11 3 7 This might become necessary if artifacts are visible or other applications affect the display of the mail merge document Toolbars Use this menu item to individually show and hide toolbars MUA Insert Extras y gt Object inspector sl o a Show field descriptor Y Show margins EFE TET Visualize areas Visualize
286. ine CR LF OD 08 New line CRLF 0D 04 Options Alignment Automatically determine lines Top C Lines 105 C Centered C Bottom Remove empty lines resulting from empty fields i Specify field names in first address record In area Options you declare the number of lines and determine if e g empty lines shall be deleted and the subsequent lines be directly attached to the last line If the option Automatically determine 421 Ee Te lines is checked exactly the same number of lines will be exported as you have selected fields in step 2 on page 327 Please mind that maximal x fields can be selected for export if you have chosen option Lines x Especially the addressblock s number of lines will be taken into account like it is defined in its properties You can also Specify the field names in the first record here In the Orientation section you can choose between top bottom and centered Occurring blank lines will be automatically exported at the respective positions A 11 XML file The probably most abstract export format is XML Extensible Markup Language Select XML file xml via the dropdown menu in order to export addresses into this format Output format File format Settings By clicking the button Settings you can among others control the format of the created XML file and thus adapt it to the requirements of the post processing applications Define the name of the ma
287. ing lists 45 Rio 3 13 1 Changes to this selection are made in the Extras menu Production tab on page 226 Here you can delete existing franking machines or add new ones Other As soon as you create a mail merge document for a project it is shown here as default document for the current project You can also assign another existing mail merge document ipd ipv to the project by clicking the button Order management This dialog is only visible after clicking the button Details in the corresponding tab of the project properties on page 44 Here you get an overview as well as details about the items that were transferred during the data exchange Overview tab Overview Project Category Order no DPAG Date delier Infopost ational unagsigned gt 30 08 2013 12 00 00 Here you will get an overview in table form about the transaction transferred to Deutsche Post AG In the Category row the category of the transferred items is presented to you for example whether the items are Infopost National The Deutsche Post AG automatically assigns an order number to every posting category Theses numbers are displayed in the Order no DPAG row The delivery date is also shown for every category in the corresponding row Date delivery 46 fo Ho Module Job splitting If you have defined partial postings on page 158 separate sub groups are created within the projects for these partial pos
288. ion and Altern attn you will be able to overrule the automatically generated Form of address for letters resp Attn field e g Lieber Piet instead of Sehr geehrter Herr Baus q v Data fields of category Additional address fields on page 400 Do not use punctuation marks at the end of the salutation These will be specified in the field properties dialog window during which appears right after inserting this field into a mail merge document With Infopost Manager you can also write to individuals via their company address or e g to sub tenants without own letterbox Click the c o address check box and the address block will be auto matically adapted in mail merge Normal Address c o address WECO Pyrotechnische Fabrik GmbH Herr Conrad Appel Herr Conrad Appel c o WECO Pyrotechnische Fabrik GmbH BogenstraBe 54 56 BogenstraBe 54 56 53783 Eitorf 53783 Eitorf Via the buttons for e mail 5 and Internet eA you can directly link to an e mail application or an Internet browser 69 Other fields tab Here you can see all additional fields available in the current address record These can be changed by double clicking them General Details Field name Field content Mitarbeiterzahl E Gr ndungsjahr 1992 Umsatz 2 530 000 Canes Insert By using the Insert menu item or the Insert key you can create a new address Additional functions are available which are described above in the chapter E
289. ion complexity no production rebates you are aware of loosing rebates which might have been granted for optimized pallet production This might be useful for instance if the transportation costs for an increased pallet number exceeds the granted rebates With this option checked trays or bundles will be distributed on as fewer pallets as possible The last option Produce pallets dependent on production rebates directly affects the number of pallets to be produced Based on the stock and transportation costs you can easily determine the costs for an additional pallet Enter this value as rebate threshold Infopost Manager only produces new routing region respectively routing zone pallets if the resulting postage discounts are higher than the production costs You will find detailed information on the postal regulations regarding pallet production through the product brochures which can be read via the Help Brochures on page 242 menu item and from a Deutsche Post AG Direct Marketing Center Delivery This tab is only visible if option Transfer order data to Deutsche Post on page 45 is activated in the project properties Delivery Date Date 06 02 2014 Time 12 00 Delivery Pick up Posting Acceptance office GrASt 01 3 02 01063 Dresden Specify here when and whether you want to post the items of your project by yourself or you want them to be picked up For the former click the but
290. is product Otherwise an error message will appear when closing the dialog If you want to send a variant without wrapping activate the corresponding option Unwrapped items Unwrapped items can only be posted as Infopost or Individual Katalog dispatch Thus the category remaining items does not apply in such mailshots If all variants should be send unitarily with or without wrapping they can be produced in single flow or multi flow method However if some variants should be dispatched with varying wrappings it is mandatory that they are produced variant clean on page 368 Hint for unwrapped items If you want to send less than 4 000 unwrapped items you should test various settings Basically the following applies The more widely spread your addresses are across Germany the more likely it is that additional extra items and a low minimum number of items per bundle is profitable making it feasible to send as many items as possible as unwrapped items Infopost Manager calculates how you can use extra items in order to send as many items as possible as unwrapped items The key can be set in the field field content With it you define which addresses will finally belong to this variant by quoting the content of the address field Variant Vario With the dropdown menu you can easily choose between the given field contents 305 Fo Ee fo A H 7754 E H 8335 C 3569 The number following the sign represent
291. items with identical variants choose option Fixed value and select one of the variants 0 to 7 in the drop down menu Product variant Fixed value O Value from field Retoure Report Hybrid Retoure Extra D N E Dd Pi ol e You can also post the items within a mailshot with different variants Using Infopost Manager you can define each item s variant with the content of any field from the address management Choose the option Value from field Possible values are O to 7 Field value 1 represents the product variant Basis 2 Plus etc Click the button The dialog window Choose data 291 fields opens and you can determine the field for the product variant definition Example You categorized all your addresses in A B and C customers A high turnover customers B medium turnover customers and C low turnover customers You want to write to each of these customer categories using another product variant Create a separate field in your address database and assign all A customers the value 3 Focus B customers receive the value 2 for Plus and C customers 1 for Basis Incorporate this field into Infopost Manager during address import and select it as product variant on the Premiumadress tab in mail merge Contractual partner Here you see the sender data on page 208 which are automatically inserted in the matrix code later on Please note that you can decide here
292. ith a watermark Reference sample 11 2 Edit You can use the menu item Reset to undo the last changes copy or move position frames on page 279 or texts into the clipboard as well as to change object properties Furthermore various position frames can be arranged and aligned to one another Undo You can use this menu item to undo the last changes of your mail merge document Cut This menu item moves one or various selected position frames or texts into the clipboard If you insert its contents at a new location via the menu item Paste on the following page the original objects are automatically deleted 268 11 2 3 11 2 4 11 2 5 Ho Copy With this menu item you can copy one or various selected position frames or texts into the clipboard By inserting its contents at a new location via the menu item Paste on the current page you are positioning additional copies of the original objects Paste By choosing this menu item you insert the contents of the clipboard at the selected position Edit You can only use this menu item for position frames which contain changeable texts This option is not available for graphic frames barcode frames empty frames and franking frames In the menu the selected object type will then be positioned before the command Edit e g Edit address block The particular options of this menu item are explained more detailed in menu item nsert Edit text on page 282
293. itting is composed of the items belonging to particular pallet targets If you activate the option Show available entries only you will see only those targets which have not yet been assigned to another job Tick the targets which you would like to send simultaneously in a partial posting 376 Ye o 15 4 2 15 4 2 1 Please note that the first partial posting of every supplier must total at least 4 000 items If more than one job is assigned to supplier these jobs will be handled as partial postings If one routing zone pallet is part of a job all pallets within this routing zone even routing region pallets e g have to be delivered within the same day This is mandatory for all jobs in your mailshot In the summary table you will be able to see in each case the status of the current job of the postings which have already been defined and of the items which have not been assigned yet as well as the totals and the average values With each tick this summary changes The dialog Manage job splitting partial postings lists all jobs defined so far in a well arranged table You use the dropdown box Sorting to sort the list by supplier or by delivery date No Desenplion Date Conbent y Pallets Grose kc Posting 05 02 14 1 05 02 2014 R22 3 Posting 06 02 14 2 06 02 2014 RASO 31 Posting 07 02 14 3 0 0244 HR of 39 Az 6 Posting 08 02 14 4 8 02 414 R lt 45 You can now define more jobs and change or delete exis
294. ject overview Its upper part will provide you with useful information on the addresses You will see the percentage of German and international addresses and how many of the German addresses are used or not used The numbers are always adjusted to reflect the current status of the project If for instance you deactivate or delete individual addresses via the address management menu item or during the address check or the duplicate search the numbers in this status report will change accordingly The lower part lists the file name and the file type together with the address quantity after the import a Wpfopost Manager Professional Demo Professonal Project Address Preparation Remis Anas Extras Hop al 25 BB oy SD 33 3 30 816 used addresses i i 1 993 international addresses Status y Percent Gemany Liso 0353 Linnused Zz 0 00 Se Total 03 53 iatemational Le 003 gaT EET aE 0 Total aT brand bota TOO Address source Fik T pa Ee hs J MS Excel wks heel Cese dee Do aires Deal l MS Excel workers TuUe Lida Do eet Del 14 GEASS 18 Pe Me b dmrmistram 62 Rio Ho 4 2 1 A second status report appears at the end of the address check this can be viewed again in the project overview on the main screen under the Address check item You will then be able to see the status of the address data after the address check 4 2 Import Besides the normal file import a
295. l customers who are not private end users part of the public authorities federation provinces or communes small business owners who are not charged with any value added tax Projects tab On the Projects tab you are given information on the projects assigned to the customer Sub folders where the projects are saved this field is left empty if you saved projects in the root directory Projekte the project status and the creation and last change dates are listed The last column contains the information on the project created in the Project properties dialog Cusbomer Projects Save and close Ye Close General Details Projects Marne Desenplorn Status Lieated ori Changed ori Tine Anredenubenpruhung Adressaendemung paused sel 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 1 mn Anschiftentberpeifuna Anschiflentberpifuna paused ad 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 Omn Demo DHL Infopos Demo DAL Infopost Demo alias 0611 43 1311 2013 1h14 mn Demo Intemabioral Demo Intemational Demo Mallings 06 11 2013 20 01 2014 1h 34 mn Demo Standard Demo Standard Demo Madings 06 11 2013 13112013 1hl4mm Demo Standard Demo Standard Demo tl alng 06 11 4813 21 01 2014 6 hdi mnm Dema Yano Demo Yano Demotialngs DE 11 2013 13 11 2013 1h14 mn Dubletteri Dubletter 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 D mi Neues Proekt 21 01 2014 21 01 2014 3h 1 miri Mew Project 21 01 2014 21 01 2014 2h57 me Volagenprojek 17 01 2014 17 01 2014 Umm T
296. l be registered Specify whether you would like to anonymize the logging and how many days the report of user activities should be saved 234 8 11 10 Telemetry Support further development of Infopost Manager and approve that anonymized data about its usage will regularly be transferred to Deutsche Post You can withdraw the approval at any time Data transfer Data transfer Transfer telemetrical data Show transferred data Activate option Transfer telemetrical data to transfer anonymized data about what features of Infopost Manager you use to Deutsche Post With button Show pending data you can see the data that will be transferred soon 235 a Telemetrical data o The following data will be transferred to Deutsche Post in order to improve the product System information Product Infopost Manager Version 8 3 0 42336 License ID A98 972 9F9 86 System ID B9OAB7C9 1504 4450 A440 A95CD2C4F34F Number starts 1 Duration 18 ms FIP version 06 2015 PPL version 32 Network installation No Operating system Windows 7 Service Pack 1 Version 6 1 Build 7601 64 bit Edition Resolution 3840 x 1080 px Memory 8189 MB Start of data recording 06 07 2015 11 27 10 Projects System ID B90AB7C9 1504 4450 A440 A95CD2C4F34F Project ID 55F4796F 8605 4103 BF 72 0BA8D689B6B3 Was internal mail merge used Yes Used import formats xls Time of data capture 06 07 2015 12 33 50 Number Infopost 19 678
297. l see the fields coming from Infopost Manager like normal merge fields in your Word docu ment See Ace ed e Aireses rusatrheider_A nschrittenbilocke Se A el a ee SSorshge Abesnder Ort den 06 06 20087 T 1 lt Becrett 1 sadressiusabcfelder Briefanrede Text 7 1 Mit freundichen ruben T Muster AG ie yl pala 317 Click the button in order to switch the preview mode from field type to field content view and vice versa Apis Cer Faba A iiti ape qj Agsrmranry Hern Friedr 1161807 ij D nische Sir 3 51 7 24109 Kier 7 1 1 Monster den O8 06 20054 rt Preund lichen orate nf T Muter ACT T For additional information and explanations please refer to the respective mail merge chapter of the Microsoft Word user s manual or to advanced literature 318 fo 13 Production guideline Contents al LODO 2 as ga ee Aa A e 319 13 1 1 Production of trays using the tray list 321 13 1 2 Production of pallets for Infopost 322 15 2 Remaining items 6 446 rs sis sas Ew ee ee ww Oe He Oe 322 Infopost Manager distributes your addresses to two categories Infopost and remaining items Letter mail item Further possible categories are International and Other unwrapped items or Infopost Kreativ which cannot be sent as Infopost After printing the addresses you must consis
298. le Lennartz male Bauer Schnermann Bemaues Repo Filleiei Schnutigen Lobl a amp w m N de oe Ro a Holman l Bute Jurgenhake mate Jost i ho LP Doa e gt o o 14 E akhott unknown picelclmlelglelclele le le lela Address 1 of 27936 Complemented Gender complemented Salutation complemented 2 as an address block like on a label wf OK X Cancel ll Pause 2 Edit i Statistics 0 Options Et View aaa ada Address Mo 7 Record 10 h 2 al Herr Rudolf Futterer w Meu GmbH Friedhofatr 5 55887 Sankt Julian Address No 8 Record 11 Herr Gero Schniittgen aba moden Angelika Bark GmbH amp Co KG Tutersburg 37 H Loibl KEM Kreutsenbeck Engineering GmbH Postfach 150110 415230 Vebert i mel Address of 27936 Complemented Gender complemented Salutation complemented i lew Y Geschlecht Femall Entran Seroren GmbH Schroder Packhx GmbH Aechener klaschmenbeu Heme Aachena Misch und Ereman Aachena Printer und Schoko Hellerithal amp Cie Spiegel anul Neu GmbH abermoden Angelika Bark Gmb KEM Ereutzenbeck Engineant ABC Omuck GmbH Albel Lukessowalz Fithaus Furth Management Kanen Verlag PEAK Werkstolf GmbH Each address is also accompanied by an icon which provides information on the address status Icon Explanation Addresses with this icon will be used in the further course of your project and will thus be writt
299. lected it on the Projects tab 210 New project The New project menu item can be used without first marking an existing project on the Projects tab You can use this option to start working on a new project Delete project You can use the Delete project menu item to remove the marked project from Infopost Manager In the chapter Project management on page 34 you find information on how projects can be archived Properties You can use the Properties menu item to view the properties of a selected project which is managed via the project explorer s menu item Properties on page 42 Rename You can use the Rename menu item to give a project a new name 8 3 Blank forms You can use this menu to view and print forms independent on the current project These are only blank forms and do not contain any information of the current project 9 4 Responseplus assistant Here you can start a Responseplus campaign Step 1 Responseplus assistant Step lof3 Form Referral Campaign end Reply Item format Format Form Responseplus Referral allows for using your customers for acquisition Your customers will recommend your products to their family and friends With Responseplus Reply you can create a classic response element as postcard or reply letter If you choose this option you will have to specify a reply address Item format Specify the format of your Responseplus items here 211 flo
300. let has been produced Hybrid type Simultaneously producible pallets This production method combines the advantages of both multi flow methods mentioned above Based on the number of simultaneously producible pallets all items are at first produced variant after variant in one pallet unit by the optimization However all items become consolidated on their specified pallets Afterwards the next pallet unit is processed which reminds of the pallet after pallet production This way on the one hand you doesn t have to struggle with the problem of insufficient pallet sites when producing variant after variant On the other hand the number of retoolings is reduced like in the pallet after pallet production If you set the number of simultaneously producible pallets to one Infopost Manager produces the same way as pallet after pallet In contrast if you choose a greater number of pallets they are produced more similar to the variant after variant method If you activate the option Minimize retoolings the complexity of the calculations increases so that the results of the optimization are nearly incomprehensible 308 ie Tie Variant clean production without pallet consolidation When producing variant clean only complete pallets of one variant are produced If some trays can t be produced on such pallets you are only allowed to consolidate them in exactly one Germany pallet per variant If more than one of these Germany pallet is r
301. lga F ps led F a H el gt del wis weap ol 150 ii J0 z 0d Clicking the Details button opens a separate window which clearly shows the variants single rates Ma Product 15 3 1 Main window Format If you imported on page 49 your addresses from various sources you can easily assign variants to these files without launching the address management on page 66 start filtering and then performing the variant assignment on the filtered addresses Just go to the main window to the Addresses area 358 15 3 2 15 3 2 1 POT e Proterional Mirar Proje Presi Adder Pepsakon Harir Aree bdar Pal Lai 7 2 Bho A gt 7 5 gq Sa ue sh hearer i Abirami B 7 437 used addresses 1 539 international additis Sin y Pearce Eolo Gaary a Une pii iJ H Lined 4074 LHS a a Talal aiT E i 5 a Deer eral pl O Lid 1550 12464 E Lira Eis 17M E Tais E 16 55 Sided Doral TATO MA t gt a Adina rouca Chubck Clerics 1 Pi 1ypa Ad ici ips i MES TE Cer Pus cua estate Par Aid riopori Flare y Loa WS Excal 141 ama 4591 1 ea y AORTA Cia Puso ida Par Airis ree Y z Tanl i CTE AY E as hier Psi scree Par Adricporilaraa Y a ERASE 111 04 tis te 4 279 Lar G Sunes Fin Cezcrpbor Qeantt Pace Yen 2005 iiti yky F Varn 4 LH 1541 Vangnt E 2508 1835 f 4 Vata E Lii 1613 Vraned asi HH iari propis gt m Arki rari Lace 0 Each address source additionally possesses a button This c
302. ll be available Details can be found in chapter International optimization on page 355 Save addresses filtered into file s By using this option s dropdown menu you can filter your export data by the following types Save Addresses filtered into Ale s Filter Infopost National Tray targets Infopost National Pallets Infopost National Pallet targets Infopost National anants Modules International optimization and Vario With activated modules International optimization and or Vario additional filter criteria will be available Details can be found in chapters International optimization on page 355 and Vario on page 372 If you have selected a type click the button Filter in order to define dedicated pallets pallet targets Partial posting etc as filter values for export Pleaze select the trays ection Tray Addresses Mo 1 FB No 2 55 Mo 3 59 Ho 4 60 Ho 5 Be Mo 6 53 Mo 7 El Mo 8 49 Ho 9 45 Mo 10 Fd hl 11 ES Range 1 3 5 7 39 47 2 469 of 472 entries selected 7 23839 Addresses 3380808008887 You can define the bundles trays pallets etc to be exported by activating the respective check box Details on the effective usage of the selection methods can be found here on page 419 The filtered addresses will be exported in one file If you want to store the addresses per filter value into a separate file you have to activate the check box Save in separate files Thus you can for inst
303. ll need this option e g if you like to post standard items which do not meet the requirements for automation In those cases the items will be treated as Kompakt items which have less restrictions The weight of the items must be defined between 1 and 2 000 g You will see in the lower status bar of the current window that the charge is adjusted immediately when a weight change is made It is vital to state the precise weight accurately by 1 g in order to guarantee the correct calculation of the minimum charge 143 Please note that the item weight can vary by up to 5 due to printing dyes adhesives paper clips air humidity etc With items weighing more than 20 g this could cause a change in both the charge and the product Standard Kompakt GroB or Maxi if you have any doubts regarding the weight let your acceptance office confirm it Supplementary changes to the item properties will mandatorily mean that postage must be optimized again Therefore you should rather not change these settings once you have printed the addresses forms and lists or exported your address data from Infopost Manager because the address sorting and thus the total postage charge may change even due to a slight change in the database or in the item properties This would mean that you would have to print and export the addresses forms and lists again 5 2 2 Type Dimensions Type Franking Remaining item Content gt
304. ln Lyoner Passage 14 50765 K ln 71 Consider field Company 3 The duplicate search takes also permutations of the fields Company 1 and Company 2 into account as illustrated in the following example Company 1 Company 2 form stil Mobelfabriken KG Fritz Lehmenkuhl Fritz Lehmenk hl form stil Mobelfabriken KG Using this option the field Company 3 will also be considered Please note that search performance will decrease Company 1 Company 2 Company 3 form stil Mobelfabriken KG Fritz Lehmenk hl Fritz Lehmenkuhl form stil Mobelfabriken KG Compare company and name fields It often occurs that company and name fields are e g swapped or that a sole trader is collected as company and as individual Company 1 Company 2 Firstname Lastname Peter G ndels Rechtsanwalt Peter G ndels 117 o This option will help you detecting those cases Infopost Manager will compare all permutations Consider first name with home addresses By default only last name and address are taken into account by the search i e every household will only be written to once First Last name Street ZIP City name Heike Kurz Eupener Str 19 52066 Aachen Peter Kurz Eupener Str 19 52066 Aachen If you activated this option every family member will be considered and will not be detected as duplicate Show similar address as duplicate If two individuals possess the same address i e live in the same building they will be re
305. long as they are located in the forefront columns In column You should use this default option if you know exactly the column in which the search item is resp has to be located The database is scanned only once In the selection box you can specify the column name for the search all field designators of the database are offered there Options Match case This option is deactivated per default Thus the search text can be found in any address independent of the case For instance searching the text kaiser will find all addresses containing e g Kaiser kaiser or KAISER while with this option activated only addresses containing kaiser would have been found Only search in complete fields Use this option if the address has to match the complete search text exactly For instance searching the text Kaiser will not find the address Kaiser GmbH Goto Using this menu item you can go to specific documents within a mailshot or to different pages of a document Goto item By choosing this menu item you can go to specific documents or to documents of particular batches or pallets In any case the specified document or the first document of the specified batch or pallet will be displayed Goto ltem Tray Tray target Pallet Pallet target You also will be directed to the Goto item dialog if you double click on the respective area in the status bar lim 321 6 41 P
306. lso multiple the activated Professional module offer you additional import capabilities Please mind that the different import types may not be mutually combined However importing files with the same import type still is possible Import from file only ZIP In principle importing only ZIP works like an ordinary import on page 49 Infopost Manager ensures for the latter that the addresses will be postally correct imported und possibly separates the content of one field to several fields Now you only have to define the field which contains the ZIP because this will be the only information which is required by the optimization on page 154 All other fields will be ignored resp imported as user defined fields The established field analysis on page 54 normally offers reasonable suggestions Since all information besides the ZIP will be imported as user defined fields the look and feel of the address management on page 66 dramatically changes Other fields Field name Field content Firmal SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH Firma Stralie Magdeburger Str 3 Posttach PLZ Strahe 20457 PLZ Postfach Ort Strahe Hamburg Ort Fosttach Anrede Herr Titel Vorname Hermann Nachname Kemper Variante A E Ignore address Especially you will be no longer able to edit the field contents In addition to that Infopost Manager s various address quality improving capabilities such as duplicate se
307. ly marked data record 105 AP OF amp Cancel La Lu e al Ea di EJ bay L ll 2 Krusemeyer i Pause 2 Edit 7 Statistics C gt Options ail o Firmal Fecken 4rfel GmbH amp Co 1 Feschauf Matratzenfabrik Walter Tusch fi Glass Egelin Whbeto Ste Glunz Aktier F ee Stg B Hellenthal 3 Origmal Strg Hoechst Ak Hulskens amp Options 2 foral GmbH Show source Knoth Goto Strg G Eh Find 5h MAKARA GmbH 1 Meuwsen 2 Porte S hne GmbH View 3 alo Viierk Ruhr chemie iGeshaccerel Pharmazeutische Fabrik Buch und Kunstdruckerei Strabe Withensten Paramente Gunz Dorf Snuchs leg Kieswerk A Sahnhofst Lindgesfek St Joser Dberbilker mL Y Wartburgs F Address No 1356 of 1386 Postally incorrect Suggestions avaiable Do not write to address Unsorted By selecting Write to you can change the status of the marked address record if this option is checked the address will be written to if you uncheck this option the recycle bin icon appears and this address will not be used You can select Edit to open the Edit address on page 67 dialog window You can select Original to view the original version of the data record as it was imported You can select Options to open the Options window on page 111 The menu item Fields can only be activated in the address block view it allows you to include additional fields on page 120 whe
308. m of 2 million addresses in the project It is possible that it will work with more addresses as well However this is subject to the individual conditions of both the address data and the available system resources 4 6 1 Options You can adjust the duplicate search with the help of the options and thus receive even better results You can use the Default button at any time to undo your settings and restore the preset program options Search mode tab Options of duplicate searc Search mode Regular search Key field comparison Settings Regular search S Regular search with key field cormparison 5 Only key field comparison Import files Create duplicate groups from all import files G only from different import files You have to determine on this tab in the Settings area which of the three search modes shall be used e Regular search Here the similarity of the fields Company 1 Company 2 the address fields 115 Ee incl country und Name field are checked Dedicated fields can be incorporated via the options in the regular search on this page area e Regular search with key field comparison You can add more fields via the key field settings on page 119 Select those fields which clearly identify the record like e g the Customer no or ID fields Thus you can also include e g the department or postal irrelevant f
309. mproved e Handling of combination ZIPs optimized street AND P O Box ZIP in one field e minor bugs fixed 399 A Anhang A 1 Data fields In the following some interesting datafields from selected categories will be presented to you Data fields of category Additional address fields The additional address fields are of certain interest for the correspondence because you can easily create as well addresses as salutations e ID on this page e Address block on the current page e Attn on the following page e First name and last name on page 402 e Letter salutation on page 402 e Salutation and title on page 404 e Title and name on page 404 e Contact person on page 406 e Street and No on page 404 e Delivery address on page 404 e Delivery ZIP on page 404 e Delivery city on page 404 e Delivery ZIP and city on page 404 e Country name on page 404 e ISO Code on page 405 e Import source on page 405 e Address usable on page 405 e Address ignored on page 405 e Premiumadress on page 405 e 2D barcode on page 406 e Responseplus on page 407 ID This field contains the consecutive address number and is set by Infopost Manager during import Using this number you will be able to clearly identify every address 400 Address block With the address block you insert into your document all fields necessary for an address Adapt your field with the button Change se
310. multilateral PDF documents Each page of the PDF document will be assigned to the corresponding page of the mail merge document as background If the mail merge document consists of more pages than the PDF document no backgrounds will be used on the last pages and vice versa Only the first pages of large PDF documents will be used as backgrounds if the mail merge document has less pages You will get an impression how the background looks like in Preview area To the right of this area the file name will be shown and for PDF documents also some additional information which are stored in the file If you click the button the defined document will be reloaded from the specified path Thus you make sure that modifications to the water mark e g new letter head are always up to date Use the arrow keys fm and to navigate from page to page in a multilateral PDF document Determine in the left area whether you want to use the background document Only for positioning purposes or you intend to Print it also The first case for instance makes sense if you want to print your mail merge document on offset printed pages which already contain the water mark e g stationery 259 Rio Ric Rie Ro For speed purposes Infopost Manager optimizes PDF documents to the screen resolution This may lead to loss of print relevant information or a lower print resolution If you intend to print the complete document including the PDF back
311. n without pallet consolidation TrayBurndle production Produce trays 5 Produce bundles Produce trays and bundles only with variant clean production M Produce pallets IP Produce partial posting compliant Routing district optimization ZIP of ace office For the production of VarioPlus mailshots Infopost Manager supports the three production methods single flow multi flow and variant clean Single flow method If this production method is used all items independent of the assigned variant will be posted sorted by ZIPs i e one tray resp bundle may possibly contain different variants This method presupposes a logistically very good production process or a very powerful controllable 367 Tie o die Te tucker With this method you ensure that you receive maximal production rebates as in contrast to the multi flow method normally more ZIP bundles can be produced Additionally Germany pallets can be produced as well reducing the production efforts Multi flow method with pallet consolidation This production method is less restrictive than the single flow method Tray resp bundles have to be sorted by ZIPs as well but in that case not variant spanning but only variant clean A bundle resp tray will thus always contain only one variant This leads to an increase in the number of tray resp bundle targets and thus in most cases to a reduced number of rebated units but at the same time reduces
312. n displaying the addresses When choosing Show source the source file of the current address will be displayed In the table view it will be shown in the status bar at the lower window border while the address block view will be extended by an additional line Using the menu item Goto you can navigate to a dedicated address number or you can start the address search by choosing Find Depending on the settings made in options on page 92 the displayed addresses will be marked differently Addresses which you have opened for editing on the next page are marked with a magnifier P icon In address block view the original data record number coming from the source file is displayed in the line above the address Thus you can relocate the address in question in your source file In table view you can get this number by right clicking and choosing the Original menu item All imported fields from the source file are displayed including the data record number Action buttons for general changes Simultaneous changes to all addresses displayed here can be made with these buttons Icon Explanation e Checks the Write to address option for all automatically or manually changed addresses Checks the Write to address option for all displayed addresses regardless of which errors were found during address check 106 io a The Write to address option is unchecked for all addresses shown regardless of whether or not errors were f
313. n for mailshots with lots of variants Export by variant Import addresses with ZIPs in differing fields only with module Professional Label editor only with module Professional configurable panel print several detail improvements additional bug fixes What was new in version 7 1 2 from 20 05 2010 Value added tax compatibility Replacement posting data record EDS by order management Replacement sender s instruction by Premiumadress new export format MS Access customer specific settings for payer and payment method Auto update Price and product list v23 minor bug fixes What was new in version 7 1 1 from 17 12 2009 Support table of fees 2010 new forms and posting lists new field type subfield some detail improvements and error corrections What was new in version 7 1 from 24 11 2009 Import Postage optimization based on ZIPs Ability to configure the Nixie check Assignment variants to import files Specification item thickness in millimeter proprietary font incl coding for Premiumadress data matrix code improved handling for the generation of posting and production lists for partial postings Support none machine ready items 391 e Revision tray maximum weight to 10 kg e further bug fixes and application enhancements What was new in version 7 0 4 from 13 08 2009 e further bug fixes in the address check modules e additional error corrections What was new in version 7 0 3 from 26 02 2009 e min
314. n of the fields Title and Name Dr Klaus Zumwinkel e g Contact person This field is only filled with content as long as the field Last name is filled too In those cases salutation title and first name are prefixed Street and No In the data field Street and No street names and street numbers will be given within one field Delivery address The field delivery address includes the parts of the address preferred by the Post Street P O Box or major recipient Delivery ZIP Delivery city Delivery ZIP and city Insert with this fields the ZIP code city or the combination of both preferred by the Post Street P O Box or major recipient 404 Country name You can specify whether a country name should be given in German English or French and whether it should be in capital letters or not ISO Code This field contains the ISO Code of the country which is standardized worldwide For instance Germany s ISO code is 276 Import source Export the name of the source file for the particular address Address usable Using this field you will export the information whether or not an address is usable If not the reason is given why it is not usable e g ZIP not existing Address ignored Using this field you will export the information whether or not an address is ignored If so the reason is given why it is ignored e g duplicate search Premiumadress Insert this field if you
315. n principle there are three different status The first notification and a project modification which makes a new transfer of the project data necessary In both cases the reason for the transfer will be shown The third status alternative is the simple case that the project status is up to date meaning that no data have to be transferred Clicking the Next button starts the real transfer Complete posting Data transter One moment please User musterO 1 Password ee88e8 Save password The entered values can be permanently stored by activating option Save password Any time you can reset these values in the application options on page 232 Normally the successful transfer of the project data to the data exchange server is acknowledged with a respective message 163 Status of executed actions amp The data have been successfully transterred Statue to clipboard In case of an error the reason for the failure will be shown Status of executed actions x The order has not been accepted by Deutschen Post The following errors are stated in the response data In einen Wersandplanelntrag wurde das iel 05304 durch den Postleitzahl Ersatz 999949 ersetzt Code 518169 In einen Yersandolaneintrag wurde das Aiel 05162 durch den Postleitzahl Ersatz ed lfthere are any questions please contact the hotline of IT Customer Support BRIEF IT CSB at 49 6151 908 8000 Mo Fr Sarn 5prn Statue to clipboard A
316. n select different formats via the dropdown menu e alphanumerical All values will be coded exactly as you entered them resp as they come from the defined field e g character sequence 255 3 bytes will be stored ASCII coded in three bytes e numerical All values will be internally converted to binary format and respectively coded in the data matrix code e g character sequence 65535 5 bytes will be coded in two bytes e hexadecimal All values will be read in hexadecimal format internally converted to binary format and respec tively coded in the data matrix code e g character sequence OF 2 bytes will be coded in one byte if desired each character tuple can have a prefix 292 to An error will occur if none hexadecimal values are found The Premiumadress impression will become invalid on the current page e decimal All values will be read in decimal format internally converted to binary format and respectively coded in the data matrix code e g character sequence 128255 6 bytes will be coded in two byte if desired each character triple can have a prefix An error will occur if none decimal values are found or values off the range 0 255 The Premiumadress impression will become invalid on this page Info line In this area you can configure the definable optional info line which is located with the Premiumadress position frame above the address block You are able to combine free texts with dynam
317. n the right side in the result area e A step is written in italics Some steps are essential for a project to be completed For example this pertains to the steps that process the imported address data Those steps are written in italics and the arrow symbol will not become yellow when the step is ready to be executed Furthermore you can manually deactivate those steps using the wizard or during a project by right clicking on the respective step It can also be reactivated by right clicking Just as steps that cannot be executed a deactivated step will be displayed in light gray Despite of this setting those steps can be launched using the menu or the action buttons This illustration in the overview section is provided for information purposes only The status of a step which has already been executed may change For instance the optimization may become invalid if you change important information such as the thickness of an item afterwards Steps which have already been executed can certainly be restarted 12 if for instance you want to import other addresses However this is no longer possible in the project overview but only via the Quick Clicks the appropriate action button or menu item With the button you can hide or show some project steps for all projects Projects in which affected steps have been executed already will of course keep showing these steps 2 3 Quick Clicks The offered Qu
318. n version 8 2 1 from 08 09 2014 bug fixes for logging user activities on page 217 improved performance project explorer further error corrections and program optimizations What was new in version 8 2 from 04 06 2014 new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 optimized support Windows 7 settings production sequence small bundles on page 151 logging user activities on page 217 projects anonymization on page 34 archive on page 37 mail merge conditional visibility on page 270 position frames half font sizes free on page 282 and machine readable on page 308 international extended sorting on page 344 individual wrapping weight on page 344 several program optimizations and error corrections What was new in version 8 1 1 from 26 11 13 new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 National new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 International new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 DHL Infopost support SEPA on page 208 support Responseplus Reply on page 304 and Referral on page 211 jump list in start menu and taskbar further program optimizations various error corrections What was new in version 8 1 from 10 07 2013 new GT amp C and posting lists on page 180 DHL Infopost remaining items on page 146 separate franking type individual postage per item 388 Import Export improved handling templates import on page 60 and export on page 331
319. nager has constructed lt may e g happen that an unexpected indiscernible field displaces all following fields As soon as the first of these uniform files has been analyzed by Infopost Manager and the field assignment have been manually adjusted where necessary you should save the current assignment status using the button Save template as Thus you will be able to use this assignment scheme for subsequent files with the same structure Simply enter a name and some descriptive information on this template During the next address import the appropriate templates for the source file will be offered automatically You can also load templates using the button Load template The settings coming from a loaded template are always preferred to those from the automatic field analysis Country codes The information contained here allows you to clearly assign various abbreviations or codes to a country This is useful for files where the country name is not stored but some other identifiers such as the license plate number or the ISO code These abbreviations and codes are already integrated into Infopost Manager and can be used to determine the actual country name for instance in mail merges or when exporting the addresses In mail merge Infopost Manager prints the country names in the postally correct way i e as a whole word in capitals in the last line of the address block If you export on page 323 the addresses you can also export this w
320. nalities of your plugin Deinstallation In order to uninstall the plugin manually delete the file or files from the directory plugins of Infopost Manager If the directory happens to be empty after you have deleted the files of your plugin you may as well delete it However there is no functional necessity to do so An empty directory will not inhibit Infopost Manager After restarting Infopost Managers the functionalities of the plugin will be gone Expense The costs for creating a plugin highly depend on its complexity and cannot be stated generally However they will be much higher than the purchasing price of a software It is insofar advisable to do a rough ROI return on invest calculation to figure out if and when such an investment will pay off You will find that it usually does pretty soon Example e A plugin costs 2 000 EUR e It grants an economy of time of about 10 min per project e About three projects are processed per day 385 e One working hour is calculated as 60 EUR This will save 30 EUR per day and thus 150 EUR per week At a constant number of projects per day the investment will amortize after about 13 weeks resp one quarter already Contact If you are interested in a plugin supported solution of your problem or an optimization of your processes via plugin please contact the hotline on page It will canalize your request and establish contact with the manufacturer of the software
321. ndatory root element as well as the spanning tags for each address If you use indention you can achieve visual formatting which improves the readability of the XML file Settings Root element Data element address Idention EA Remove empty fields Activate check box Remove empty fields in order to avoid opening and closing tags for empty fields Thus you can sometimes substantially reduce the size of the resulting XML file Continuation Specify output file on page 324 A 12 Routing label editor The routing label editor is only available with activated module Professional on page 177 You can use the routing label editor to easily and comfortably edit tray bundle and pallet labels The composition of the routing label editor should be well known because it is based on Infopost Manager s mail merge module Therefore only particularities will be handled here The description of similar resp identical features can be found here on page 249 422 Rio E Intopost Manager Palettenieitzettel lt Standard gt Gist Winx El E Palettenleitrettel O IS Z O A O a 7 5 E 10 TI 8 E W TFI ee B BIH Z Z H J lda dJa l Loa La a Lad i id Hy 12 la 16 240 27 kg 1B 1 IT Letzettel 1 won The basic structure and content of the routing labels are predefined by Deutschen Post However modifications are allowed in dedicated areas The
322. ndent on the colors contained in the graphic you can specify the respective color becoming transparent 2 After having chosen option Change colors you can replace any color in the graphic with an arbitrary color If signatures are available monochromely you can for instance easily replace black with blue and every signature will be printed in blue You can directly see the results in the preview area Edit properties Advanced signature frame settings can be specified via its properties Right click the frame and choose the item Edit signature properties from the context menu 299 Edit properties Transparency and color Transparent color Change color Replace with Signatures Default signature Mas Mustermann Name line O Use variable signatures Data field Transparency and color In this area you can specify the transparent color as well as the color to be replaced for all used signatures regardless from the settings made in the signature pool Refer to Edit signature on page 298 for closer information Signatures In this area you can define variable signatures i e different signatures will be used dependent on a specific field value Example You are creating a mail merge document that will be signed by either Max Mustermamn or Monika Musterfrau depending on the receiver s gender In field Default signature you specify the signature from the pool which will be used if none of the conditions
323. nformation provided The search will always explore the column to which the table is sorted 0403 04 Imparc Werbeagentur GmbH Karlplatz 21 40713 o 05 03 Industrewerbung Seelmann GmbH Herberts Katemberg 47 421713 0408 01 Muster AG Friedelstr 2 010523 Niising GmbH Borkstr 5 49163 Find Mus Company Compary Compa 201 8 1 1 Data Import You can use the menu item Import to import customer data from external applications Here existing customers can be automatically deleted This doesn t hold for customers or mailers who were already used for processing at least one project Infopost Manager can import data in the following formats e Access e Excel e dBase e fixed text e variable text LUirganimeren Neuer drer de Deutsche Pon AG Mame e Deutsche Post Eirlic de Deutsche Post Einlic dk Dialog Manager J Je Dialog Manager Pr de Infopost Manager dk Deta de Dicts d DecForms di DocTmpl p Documents de Examples de ExpTmpl de Forms di irp i mgl de Logins Dateiname All files Cb ee a p a T Adressen Labelformataccdb Th Adressen mit Paspwortuls fE Adressenals FE International xh TU Mationaldbf Regional Otinen ve Abbrechen J Export You can use the menu item Export to export the customer data for external processing For reasons of data protection sensible data in the customer index is stored encrypted However all data fields will be exported as clear text
324. ng the OK button the results will be shown in the Results window Jf OK X Cancel i Pause 77 View Ty 218 g Mame Gage F Steinmann KG Sten amp Co Steinmann KG awid lager Bachmann Burkle KG Bachmann B o mls lo len me w m m Birkle KG Sten amp Co Steinmann KG 16 Wayand GmbH wid AJAS GmbH Hit Lof 62 a A A 2 a a o A A a a E i Stein 8 00 Becker GmbH amp Co Becher GmbH amp Co Street 0 box Lengenhaus 40 42 Herrensdoer 101 Langenhaus 40 42 Hernenadesr 101 Adalbertsir 11 15 Mainzer Sir 60 Aschaffenbunger Str 45 Stemingweg E Postfach 1244 Sheinlingweg 6 Adalbertstr 11 15 Postfach 1244 Langenhaus 40 42 Hemenacker 101 Mainzer Sir 60 Westerwaldsir 78 90 Group overview O ea wger Str 49 ARAS 62 hits in total ZIP City 42369 Wuppertal 44867 Bochum 42369 Wuppertal 44867 Bochum 51103 Kiln 55743 Idar Obersten 63073 Offenbach 63857 VWaldaschaff 67202 Frankenthal 63857 Waldaschaff 51103 K in 67202 Frankenthal 42369 Wuppertal 44867 Bochum 55743 dar Oberztemn 55743 Idar Oberstein 53773 Hennef Write to 62 addresses Do mot write to 0 addresses The detected Match accuracy degree will be shown in a separate column In principle the presentation of the results is similar to the duplicate search on page 120 The main difference is that there are no duplicate groups bu
325. nits If you subsequently want to delete fields from a combination field select this field and click Delete or press the Del key In some cases data fields may need separate settings which you can define while adding them from the field list to the combination field or subsequently by using the button Settings The field order in a combinations field can be changed by clicking the buttons Up and Down or by simply using Drag n Drop 410 Due to empty fields some spaces or separators can become superfluous So you can suppress them by enabling the options Automatically remove spaces and Remove enclosing separators for empty fields However these options are only available if spaces respectively enclosing separators actually exist in a combination field An up to date result preview of your settings is displayed in the Preview field Condition field Condition fields allow for printed text to be dependent on a field value Define condition field Address fields PLZ Stralie Numerical Interpret empty fields as Value if condition is fulfilled Value Address fields PLZ Strabe Aachen Value if condition is not fulfilled Value Address fields PLZ Strahe In area Condition select the field on whose value the printed text should depend on You can formulate the condition in various ways according to the field format In areas Value if condition is fulfilled and Value if condition is not
326. ntent Max Mustermann would be the signatory For any signature various conditions can be defined by adding it several times to the condition area and by assigning every time another field value Barcode Use this option to add a barcode to your mail merge document Edit properties Barcode Content Fixed value O Value from data field Formatting Format EAN 13 g Example Rotation Degrees Print as clear text ab 0 000000 000000 ETE Content The inserted barcode can have either a unique fixed value for all addresses e g an internal number of the mailshot or it can be defined in a sophisticated way use the button next to the value from data field for filling in data from your address file which will be different for each record e g the item number for easily collecting the responses using a barcode scanner Via the AddOn option you can issue an additional ancillary barcode for some special barcode types which can be scanned by barcode scanners in one go The AddOn may only contain numbers and can be either precisely 2 or precisely 5 digits wide Formatting You can specify the format and the rotation of the barcode in the Formatting area Furthermore you can also print the content of the barcode as plain text The activated option Security ensures that the barcode consists only of integer multiples of one printed dot in order to guarantee the highest possible compatibility to scanners Infini
327. nter would approximate the favored module size by alternating underrunnings resp overrunnings This would lead to blurred or fluttering edges Thus calculate the width of a printer dot by taking the printer resolution into account e g 300 dpi Now find a multiple of this value which is required by your target scanner for correctly detecting the modules Finally enter this calculated factor in the Module size field You can see an example of the resulting 2D barcodes based on your settings in the Preview area The 2D barcode will be previewed and printed hatched in red if the coding of the text is not possible e g due to bad characters or a version resp dimension value which has been set too small in order to code all characters Format Preview YEISON 3 Module size ES Version required 4 New page behind current page This menu item inserts a new empty page behind the current page within you document New page before current page This menu item inserts a new empty page before the current page within you document Responseplus This position frame inserts the response address as well as the data matrix code for Responseplus into your mail merge document ob mL a Muster AG Musterstr 12 12355 Musterhausen Address tab On the Address tab you can specify how to print the reply address 304 Edit properties General Responseplus Reply address Use address of sender Must
328. nu item All changes will also be considered for printing the lists and are valid for all projects 417 o Ee In dialog window Column overview for table view the columns can be shown or hidden by activating the respective entry s check box in the column Visible Using the buttons Show all and Hide all you can de select all fields with one mouse click but at least one column has to be visible These functions can be useful if you want to show or hide only a few columns o Column overview for table view Visible Field name Tray Post No Tray Mo Tray Addresses Tray Net kg Tray Gross kg Trap Warant Tray target No Tray target T ppe Tray target Label Pallet Mo Pallet target Ho Pallet target Type Pallet target Label Oo J 7 OT Fe Lap EIRJO AEROBIC Ll st st oe bo Mi Co ll Ja Table font format Tahoma 8 dots Default Showal Hideal By pressing the F2 key or selecting the contextual menu item Change width you can define the exact width for the chosen column The column width can also be changed directly If you want a column to be narrower or wider navigate the mouse to the right border until the mouse arrow changes ID per 0 1 1 2 2 3 Now click the mouse button keep it pressed and drag the column to the desired width The optimal column width e an adjustment to the widest column entry can be set via the contextual menu of the table header
329. oGreen ae Image Frame Signature i Barcode E 2D barcode RM Responseplus Ra Responseplus franking mark R Payment hint E New page after current page New page before current page Select specific position frames for creating and designing a mail merge document Click on the desired frame the window Edit properties on page 269 for this frame is opened Address block Use this frame to insert and position the address data and address lines into the current document STIP Siepmann und Teutscher GmbH gt Herrn Karl Seeger Hauptstr 43 2 446 Selsingen O O O O O By right clicking on Edit text it is possible to include additional fields to the address block You will find more information on this functionality in the Text Add field on page 283 menu item Infopost Manager provides automatically generated delivery fields for the address block which are put together out of the imported fields These delivery fields contain verified address data coming from the address check module Thus it is no longer necessary to handle multiple address fields for street P O Box and major recipient addresses In mail merge you have to work with these delivery fields because otherwise the sorting of the addresses 280 within the Infopost category and the postage optimization may become invalid Address tab The dialog box Properties is automatically opened at the tab Address when inser
330. ob splitting module provides extended production lists routing labels as well as posting lists for every single job Details can be found in chapters International optimization on page 351 Vario on page 361 and Job splitting on page 372 6 1 Tray Bundle list The tray resp bundle list is created by Infopost Manager as an internal utility for preparing the posting of Infopost items It is not required for posting the mailshot This list helps to ensure the correct item spread across trays or bundles the so called production of the current project You will find more information on this in the Production guidelines on page 319 chapter Remaining items do neither have to be sorted nor put into trays and are treated like normal letters 169 He The tray resp bundle list can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in chapters Preview und Print on page 414 resp Export on page 415 Change the column width by navigating the mouse to the right column border until the mouse arrow changes to Now drag the column to the desired width By right clicking the column header you can change the Column layout and Optimize column width q v Configure table on page 417 Depending on your decision to produce trays or bundles you will find here either the tray list or the Tray target Gross kg Type 34 Germany 3 5 Germany 3 0 AR 40 AR 4 8 AR 4 8 AR 458
331. obligation in any case the current rales tariffs and biasa are valid E my PA Natonal Wote gl Total postage 3 694 09 EUR net Deacon MLE EUR Pend Posla Farrar dara Midas Total Caton Tray produc ios Pallet producti Extra fen Tolal pribi FL m n oP R zona neg ur La 145 ELE 044 ELA Due to the malished siza posting is only possible at a larger accaplance office 1 673 iniemational addresses were sored 04 The optimization results are shown in the posting list on page 180 and the project statistics on page 184 Haj Nata pika La Tae iki LIEUR 1774711 EUR Lr PI ELA Disia EE HEIR 1247 EUR 10 53 EUR 1054 05 EVR 201 48 EUR 415297 EUR wud optimization Ee Ee 9 31 Optimization may be run several times for instance in order to test various combinations of item and production properties If however you have taken further steps using the result of optimization e g in mail merge or printing or exporting the addresses you should never make changes which would require re optimization Otherwise all print outs addresses forms and lists would have to be done again Module International optimization With activated module International optimization the international charges will be shown on separate tabs Details can be found in chapter International optimization on page 348 5 5 Payment method properties Deutsche Post AG offers a variety of ways
332. odes menu item opens the Country codes on page 61 dialog window which you can use to manage the abbreviations used in the current project for stating the country Update countries You can use the Update countries menu item to compare all the address records contained in the current project with the existing templates from the Country codes dialog and where appropriate to enter the correct information in the Country field This can be helpful especially when the current project contains a country abbreviation which has not yet been used In this case add the new abbreviation to the appropriate template using Country codes You will find more information on this by following this link on page 61 and then clicking on Update countries The newly inserted abbreviation is automatically replaced by the correct country description Field structure This command also offers information on the field structure and the structure of the address file for the current project In addition to the number and content of the fields information is provided on the maximum field length of all address records 82 He i g Field structure wf OF X Cancel Preview a Print Print options Export Newfield Clear fields 2 Firma 3 Firmas 4 Strate 5 Hausnummer 6 Posttach T PLZ Stra e 8 PLZ Fosttach 9 PLZ Grobempt nger 10 Ort Strate 11 Ort Postfach 12 Ort Grobemplanger 13 Land 14 Anrede 15 Titel 16 Vomame
333. oducing more bundles e g additional labor stock or transportation costs until a dedicated item number is reached you can enter here the required values The item numbers for RR and ZIP bundles can be chosen mutually different if desired or you can decide not to produce ZIP bundles at all Either way the chosen option means that you are aware of loosing rebates unless a bundle can be filled with the defined item quantity Order The option Optimize production sequence for small bundles enabled you to let the bundle production be dependent on the respective sizes Because smaller bundles have to be tightened up with less force to avoid folding this option helps you to reduce the times you have to change the settings of your strapping machine Simply produce small bundles first and set up your strapping machine for normal bundles afterward In the text field Maximum quantity per small bundle specify how many items a bundle can contain to still be treated as small bundle With the drop down box Production sequence you can specify whether you would like to have those bundles lying below or on top and whether you would like to produce them pallet spanning per pallet per pallet target or per variant Consequently the order of the produced bundles will be adjusted see bundle list on page 169 By default small bundles will be ordered Ascending by ZIP However you can also specify that the set of small bundles should be ordered as
334. oduction Multi flow method V Production Pallets x Production Single flow method V Production Trays and bundles x x Production Variant clean V Project explorer x x Project statistics x x Robinson check x Routing label editor Xx Routing labels x x Salutation check x Save lists as texts clipboard x x Spreads Nielsen regions provinces x Spreads ZIPs cities routing regions routing zones countries x x Tray Bundle list x x Tray Bundle target list pallet list and pallet target list x User administration x VarioPlus V VarioPlus International V I0 Wizard Czech Danish English French German Italian Polish Spanish x x ZIP search xX x x regular feature IO module International optimization J module Job splitting V module Vario 15 2 International optimization By using this module international items will be included into the optimization process Normally i e without activated module these items will be sorted out This module requires an activated module Professional on page 337 Right after this module is activated on page 336 new menu items and buttons will become available Thus the new functionalities are seamlessly integrated into Infopost Manager You can directly jump to the necessary settings and the results e g production lists 339 15 2 1 15 2 1 1 Overview General Addresses Salutation check Address check Duplicate search Robinson check Nixie check Adressdialog
335. oduction complexity lets Infopost Manager produce as much as possible routing region respectively ZIP trays for Grof and Max items Thus you need more trays and production complexity increases Option Minimize production complexity no production rebates produces only so called Germany trays All items in these trays are sorted by ZIPs Routing region or zone trays will not be produced and thus no production rebates can be granted With this option you will produce as less as possible trays and production complexity is minimal The last option Produce trays dependent on number of items directly affects the number of trays to be produced If the granted rebates do not amortize the production efforts which have to be spent for producing 149 more trays e g additional labor stock or transportation costs until a dedicated item number is reached you can enter here the required values The item numbers for RR and ZIP trays can be chosen mutually different if desired or you can decide not to produce ZIP trays at all Either way the chosen option means that you are aware of loosing rebates unless a tray can be filled with the defined item quantity 5 3 1 3 Bundles If you have selected bundle production on the tab General the tab Bundles appears instead of the tab Trays Ensure during production that all bundles are closely tied and that all address blocks are similarly arranged Loose cording may result in bundles falling apart
336. on EJ City Address Bayrizche Sir 8 Bergener Amg 10 B antzer Kreckwitzer Str 11 Cottbus Uststr 5 Leipzig Poststr 26 Hoherithuinn An der Spitze 1 Gera Jacob Morand Str 5 Alfred Neel Str 1 Winklhoferstr 11 Posting volu ID un mited Gr451 01 3 02 un mited Gr S5 01 301 un mited GrASt02 301 un mited Gr45t 03 301 unlimited GrAst 4 3 01 GrASt 06 3 01 GrAst O 3 01 Gr 5t 08 3 01 Gr 5t 09 301 Dresden Ottendorf Oknilla Reinsdorf Chemnitz es Note Up to 5 000 items max total 100 kg or 10 trays are accepted by every retal office or postal agency If the local situation is suitable up to 10 000 items can be posted in some retail offices Posting Infopost and Katalog items vath ranking mark ZL as well as slipless postings are only possible at major acceptance offices 8 9 ZIP search In the ZIP Search menu item you will find a convenient search tool for ZIPs city and street names If you know for instance the street and the city name the ZIP will be provided automatically 218 Address Street Mo Am Handwerkerzentrum EP City Monschau P O Box AP City Major recipient AP City Clear input 1 found Street ZIF gt 52156 Am Handwerkerzentrum If you only know e g the first letter of the street or simply do not want to type in more all suitable matches will be shown You can also leave out the ZIP with this example It will be automatically assigned too
337. on Szelcm Tracks Previews Y 3606 4 02 x 1 87 W 07 3 91 x 2 30 Y 3610 8 89 x 2 30 W 3611 8 89 x 3 57 W 3612 10 16 x 3 57 3614 11 43 4 94 3615 8 89 x 3 57 W 3617 10 16 x 4 84 W 3618 13 97 x 9 92 pa co O Edit paper format The Add and Properties buttons open another dialog box where a new format can be created or an existing format can be edited Enter a name and a description for the new format and if appropriate add the manufacturer name for this format 256 Edit paper format Endless labe Explanations Description Producer Zweckform Hame Description Dimensions Width De E Lett margin Height ar Top mari labels per line Horizontal pitch Labels per column Vertical pitch Alignment A Portrait Landscape The name of the manufacturer can be used as a filter criterion when looking for a format Now set the dimensions and orientation of the new format The values left and top margin as well as the horizontal and vertical pitch are important for defining the exact position of the label on these endless sheets These values are visualized on the Explanations tab Edit paper format Endless label General labels per vertical column pitch j Especially with endless labels it is extremely important to define the values as precisely as possible ideally down to 1 10 mm e g 3 78 cm to ensure the correct positioning of the texts during prin
338. onal optimization 15 2 1 Addresses meda 15 2 2 Preparation MED s s ae Gee Rw eee SESS ee ew we ee RK ow Oe SG 15 2 3 Results menu 2 a a 124 Petes MCU seco 265646 Oe Rane e eee ee ee rrenean lolis MAMA WiINdOW lt lt renint heh awe he FORRES AA 15 3 2 Addresses menu e oh Dw Ree A AAA ee BRS 10 003 Preparation MEN s ea AA KE E 15 3 4 Results menu 5 co hee eee ede eee EEE a EE ee Ee 154 JOO SPN sas 6 eke new ee ea bow Aaa A 15 4 1 Preparation menu 1 154 2 Results Men 222 44 648646662 eRe be we eee OEE KRESS 15 4 3 Extras MENU 2 lt 66 634465448 668 SHEERS ERO EEE ESE SG 16 Demo version 17 Plugins 18 Version history A Anhang Pike Dataelds o escote errors Arda AZ Preview and Print se s a aos 4 846445 errors Wied POs a4a kee wads bbb ee tees ech hoe eeenebewewantdeigpar Avd Print Preview 4 as 8 es amp owe ee daedductae ean RA A 5 Table configuration 6 6 lt lt 52466440 ee cee kee RS EGE REG Ea E EY GS A 6 Filter Selection 2 0 a A T Text file with fixed field width a a a a A 8 Text file with variable field width e A J MS Access database lt 3 se lt 2 8s bee See SHE HERS RE RE Ew ew A 10 Inkjet printers 246 4 55 ow bbb oe RR REE ER ESSE EDS ERR OE RRS ES Pe Ves se eee oe ae ee Ee o ee eee eee eae ee e E A 12 Routing label editor B Index 1 Welcome Infopost Manager is the ideal solution for p
339. opost Manager font The example text is rotated by the defined Rotation angle on the current page The text properties font size and color can be changed using the Edit text on page 282 button in the right mouse button menu Rotation With this the option Rotation angle you can define an arbitrary angle The given text will be rotated according to this angle An example is shown in the area Standard font on the current page Distance The options are the same as for non rotated text Please refer to Distance on page 285 for closer information Empty lines The options are the same as for non rotated text Please refer to Empty lines on the previous page for closer information 287 11 44 Franking mark Edit properties Franking mark MEEN National International Franking mark with franking wave Choose automatically MW Product specification Ein Service der Deutschen Post International franking mark Particular motif as supplement width 33m guaity Height 2 45 cm O High Cd National franking mark Keep aspect ratio Medium E Short franking mark Preview IMFOPOST Eli Service der Deutschen Mysi Infopost Manager supports direct printing of the franking mark e g onto an envelope On the Franking mark tab you can define its appearance In the View area you decide whether you want to print the complete franking wave or only the short franking mark In the former case you specify wheth
340. opriate they can be manually changed or by using one of Infopost Manager s suggestions 93 Mark address for writing to This option eases the subsequent manual processing of the found addresses Activate this option if you want to write to most of the changed addresses thus you only have to deactivate on page 72 those single addresses which you do not want to write to Unify spelling for StraBe in addresses In case the spelling for the street names differs within your address data you can choose this option to automatically unify that spelling In the drop down menu you can specify which spelling of Stra e you prefer Spelling Unify spelling for Strae in addresses Preferred spelling for Stra e Written out Aachener Stra e or S dstrale Only apply to automatically corrected addresses By activating the option Only apply to automatically corrected addresses you make sure that only addresses that have been changed anyway e g due to an automatically corrected ZIP will be unified Thus you reduce the number of automatic corrections and with that also reduce the duration of the address check especially when checking large data Settings tab Edit Settings Extended Postal routing data Check Only check used addresses Automatically ignore incorrect address types Always append city name with offical supplement E Check names of major recipients Automatically co
341. options e Address management improved search functions Column structure can be changed and saved e new print option optimized speed WYSIWYG quality in mail merge e Letter labels Option optimized print order Optional output label numbers e new Minimize quantity of pallets option e Pack lists pallet lists etc sorted on printing e Import export template list can be sorted e Address check better handling through improved keyboard support additional fields can be shown as in search for duplicate entries improved suggestion generation 398 What was new in version 5 0 3 from 10 10 2001 e greatly expanded export function Field structure can now be defined sequence designation width Export definition can be stored as a template Export is also possible from address administration with dBase and ASCII files with fixed field length you can have the best width of fields identified e Import functionality expanded Option for a user defined decision as to when an address is classified on import as unusable Treatment of incorrect or unusable addresses has been improved Settings for ASCII files can be saved in templates e expanded project administration copy paste e Mail merge expanded JPG images e Duplicate search improved e more minor bugs fixed performance improved What was new in version 5 0 2 from 16 07 2001 e Address analysis on import i
342. options Delete reports of address check etc Delete original import file s A The following files will be irreversibly deleted adressen xls Delete export file s A The following files that contain address data will be irreversibly deleted C Users blDocuments Demo Professional Infopost National csv E Archive project Beyond address data you can choose to delete further documents If you activate the option Archive project the anonymized project will be moved into the project archive on the next page 36 Ee Summary P Anonymize project summary Anonymization level 1 Masking of all name fields and all user defined fields Options All reports of address check salutation check and duplicate search will be deleted Before you execute the anonymization process all relevant information will be summarized for you Move to archive This function will move an project into the project archive An archived project can no longer be edited and will not appear in the hit list on page 30 You can return an archived project into the normal project structure at any time The archive serves to improve clarity and performance within the project explorer Complete Projects which have been completely processed can be finished with this function Thus future accidental changes to this project can be avoided Release for editing Projects which are closed or have been locked after the generation of a Pack
343. or correction The specified ZIP is not permitted for street addresses ZP type of 64649 P O Box Do you want to correct your input You can use the Ignore address option on the General tab to deactivate individual address records These addresses can also be checked by the address check if the respective option on page 94 has been selected They are however not available for the duplicate search The decision whether or not an address is to be ignored can be changed at any time either in this dialog window or via mouse clicking the line number at the left border of the table 5 2 If you change the status of only one address after you have executed the postage optimization it becomes an invalid optimization and must be relaunched This also applies to editing postally relevant fields to adding new addresses and to deleting existing ones 68 Module Vario With activated module Vario you can define variants in this dialog Details can be found in chapter Vario on page 360 Details tab The data on this tab refer to the contact person or an individual and their contact data such as E Mail or phone number General Details Other fields Contact person E Salutation Gender unknown First name b Name prefix Last name Schall Hame suffix Positions Altern salutation Altern attr co address Fl Contact Ep Phone Mobile Fax E mail Internet Cane Using the fields Altern salutat
344. or corrections in the address check module e some detail improvements What was new in version 7 0 2 from 07 01 2009 e Support table of fees 2009 e new posting lists e some detail improvements and error corrections What was new in version 7 0 from 02 10 2008 e Module Job splitting Dividing a mailshot for different producers e Support individual Katalog dispatch only with module Professional e Selection dispatch products admitted for optimization only with module Professional e Variant clean production with differing production parameters only with module Vario e predefined number of available pallet sites in multi flow method only with module Vario e new position frame transport service in mail merge only with module International optimiza tion e Notification Infobrief items via order management e Export new fields relative begin and end of pallet new field type combination field e additional optimizations and corrections What was new in version 6 5 1 from 16 05 2008 e improved interface to Dialog Manager e minor corrections in the postage optimization module What was new in version 6 5 from 11 04 2008 e Support order management e Interface to Dialog Manager version 4 0 or higher e new forms and posting lists e new franking mark franking wave e Check against the reference file of Deutsche Post Direkt GmbH Address clearing online e Premiumadress 392 Memos also for none info it
345. or new projects in the confirmation dialog If you do so field assignments will start from the very beginning but you can intentionally reactivate the automatic field assignment at any time Deactivating whole lines You can deactivate the whole line by clicking on a line number on the left hand edge a red cross before the line number and the light gray font indicate that this complete address record will not be imported Another click or pressing the F8 key undoes this effect 3 krian FO Nit 2 2 ZAHL MHaiaiet 16 Foarar Pharma 5H Fehman 17 JAHE Mordaniad i 10 Oea Mobabrsd rafia Gubi O isbn E TH Moadatiad 14 Ustaa aborda Ouran Cb ZHI Moda pte Address preview Previewing addresses can be done by double clicking an address or via clicking the Preview button You will see the address elements which are part of the address sub divided into to street address P O Box address and major recipient address Whether an address is complete and postally correct is indicated in the title bar of each address block by the text usable or not usable respectively The expression lt empty gt means that there is no content for the field e g P O Box or Major recipient 58 Hie address in the current data record The expression lt not assigned gt indicates that no field has yet been assigned to this information You can use the navigation arrows in the upper part of the window to move through the various data records or
346. or which addresses are available in the current database deactivate the respective check box in order to show all countries and to define the transport service for countries which are not contained so far but for which you know that they will later on Postage optimization If you optimize your addresses in National and International on page 345 mode you will get up to four tabs in the results area Tab Overview shows the total number of all items national and international and their costs per category Additional the resulting total amounts will be calculated and presented 348 FE a leopard ial Pree Seder Prolemoral haw E Pesar eras J i 4 i E E sE z t oF oe ing ria pS nar ala d deme aa a a a a a O Dherr i JT Overview Alaior inber maiis Hotes 7 m aa i 3 Total postage 5 655 40 EUR net Dauni 60 63 EUR Calgary Cedeibly Lodi hu Biarn g brie Ce 4774 72 EUR lsrraro Garr D Loe EL Oplirizaci n O Eras D 0000 EUR iy Ducii 204 EUR reli maracas o Fania o HET Lira imag 1 436 141 11 ELA Letia ai ibms D LOSER Quick is tl Romano mors D 0000 EUR Edi deen D LER r Deccan Frais Y honored adora nara at rend moby 11 470 5 45543 EUR Mail Total poi ire Hal 5 55 40 EUR Calo added Lax 1 074 593 ELE E 06770393 EUR Riera projects pi al Adie r n All information on tab National are identical to the optimization results without activated module International o
347. ormat File format CSY file F csv Settings Export file 5 Save Addresses in one file Extended settings Save Addresses per category in separate file Save Addresses filtered into file s Type Infopost National Posh Save in four se wath A j Please select the postings Directoy C Users nf Documents Selection Postings Addresses l Ei 05 02 14 Bauer Kich GmbH 1 1 5 053 o 7 06 02 14 Muster AG 2 1 11 213 AS O PESA 06 02 14 Bauer Kich GmbH 1 2 1 890 07 02 14 Muster AG 2 2 1 522 TE MEE 4 of 4 entries selected 19678 Addresses 15 4 3 Extras menu 15 4 3 1 Infopost Manager Professional with activated Job splitting module offers you additional blank forms Blank forms As a matter of course all forms for functionalities which are only available with Job splitting module are offered in blank format 1 Check list job splitting 383 16 Demo version The demo version is comparable to the full version of Infopost Manager regarding the contained feature set but there are several restrictions usage limited to 30 days after installation maximum 5 addresses per category will be exported only the 20 foremost addresses will be shown during salutation check only the 20 foremost addresses will be shown during address check based on the small street directory only the statistics will be shown during address check based on the large
348. ormat Text Expression contains Sorting Field Firmal In area Filter you initially choose a field which shall be used for the filter criterion The format determines the operators to be provided i e each format comes with a different operator area E Interpret empty fields as 0 1 He o Depending on the format select an operator and the expression resp value resp range to be filtered The determination of the filter is especially important for numerical and date fields If the format for such fields has been defined as text you will not be able to use e g comparison or from to operators Option Consider case is only available for text filters Option Interpret empty fields as is available for numerical and date fields If it is activated you have to define in the respective field how empty fields shall be handled Otherwise those fields and thus those addresses may be filtered out Either specify a value within the filter s range if you would like to see the address or a value outside the filter results For the latter case the addresses would be filtered out but now knowingly In area Sorting you can define the order of the addresses to be displayed First choose the filed and specify analog to the filter the format text numerical date Finally determine the desired order ascending or descending Sorting the list 1 10 200 100 5 in text format brings a totally different result 1 10 100 200
349. orted for further use or whether it is not required for the coming project A field which will not be imported is marked with a red cross Titel x T Activating and deactivating of the option Import field can also be done via a keyboard shortcut Click into the respective column of an arbitrary record and press the F7 key Importing fields without assignment gives the respective field only a field name As the content is not of postal relevance there is no assignment required You can use the field later in the project for instance in mail merge or when distinguishing between duplicates Import Import field Import without assignment Leave preceding blanks E Leave succeeding blanks Choose assignment Company 1 0 Accept suggestion of the field analysis Additionally you can use the option Change name of unassigned fields to give a new field name This option is not available if you define an assignment Change name of unassigned fields New field name Original name A If Infopost Manager proposed assignment is missing or incorrect but you would still like to assign the field activate the Choose assignment option and select one of the default assignments from the list Import Import field 5 Import without assignment Leave preceding blanks Leave succeeding blanks Choose assignment Title 0 Accept suggestion of the fi Salutation title Gender Position Dept c o address Altern s
350. os giros a A Sw 49 Mk Import OpHoNns lt 86h e aras 51 4 1 2 Automatic analysis a a a a a a AA 54 IMpPOrG RALES 63 4 2 1 Import from file only ZIP e s so es papra 54 OME Se 63 4 2 2 Import from file Label format o 64 di 20 Import Ma ADO o ophsd arado bu be bid etude 65 4 2 4 Import via ADO only ZIP 2 2428 feed ae SESE SRA ra 66 4 2 5 Import via ADO Label format 66 Address Management 444 44 eae desa 66 4 3 1 Address management 67 dolo BO a asas asa 67 Add FUG ca aa ara aaa ass dass 73 Ao Mos 22 2 he the ee ae oe oe eee ot ee ee es Pee eS 73 Salutation check round daa 83 dal OMS lt 2 bene gd aateedweeaAGheeaet ase Saweatabeuea 84 Aide IAC ee ene eek ee eo eee A 85 AAO ROS o Sa ea A a A 86 Add Firstname list eii oY we ed ae eee wee ee eS 90 Address CHECK 2440448084 5 4 8 4 2 Oe Raed Re aOE A 91 Bok WOON oc ee budget aes oe A 92 AO ENGA 4 a2 aes ot eb wae aa BS PE ee So He SH 98 o 2 46 Ue tae boa hee bee eS Bee ES es oe eS Ye 101 dod Wests 2 446466 46 seb BERRA RE AAA 103 Duplicate Search es a resed 446446944494 848 Bee H KR Be aS 114 Abal OPH 424 654 eee oe eben A AAA 115 AG REUS onda ra ada A 119 FeODINSON CHECK a dd massa e a sa A amp 127 A A Installation Update lt lt 252 0er sra 085 127 Ar EKG arre 128 Ad RESUS aaa iaa od Oe ee eee ias 128 Nixie Check esse daa 130 Ala UDI o ase tke eh aa 131 AS INE
351. ose name changed over the years to its new name once All other addresses with the same old street name can then be automatically corrected although this information is not included in the postal routing data More details about how to use the Thesaurus can be found here on page 98 Thesaurus Activate Use for automatic correction The following options are available 1 Activate If this option is checked you inform the address check to consider the existing Thesaurus This holds for finding suggestions coming from the Thesaurus as well as for extending it during the manual address correction q v chapter Thesaurus on page 98 2 Use for automatic correction If the address check detects a Thesaurus entry for a specific address this entry will be taken for automatic correction No further checks of the address will be performed Entries By clicking on this button you are calling the Thesaurus editor on page 100 You can use it for activating and deleting single addresses e g by hiding incorrect entries which have been included by mistake Extended tab Normally Infopost Manager only automatically corrects addresses if he feels very certain that the correction really is correct But depending on the address file he might process the addresses too carefully On this new tab you can influence Infopost Manager s automatic correction behavior and let him automatically correct more results 96 o ded Postal ro
352. ost Manager By clicking on a document type you can activate the preview on the right side of the dialog window General Templates BA Preview al 4 a Z T 7 Vorlage DHL Infopost Vorlage DHL Infopost Vorlage DHL Infopost GoGreen GoGreen Vorausve ad a Vorlage DHL Infopost Viorlage DHL Vorlage Vorausvertugung Paketschein Endlozetiketter Select a symbol to view the De vie x al me a y im Vorlage Vorlage Postkarte Vorlage Senenbnet Etikettenbogen a Vorlage Umschlag Vorlage Werbeantwort Create new a Document Template Cancel For more information on the display of the document types on this tab refer to the View selection buttons on the preceding page Open Use this menu item to open a document which has already been created Reopen You will see the list of the most recently opened documents which you can directly open by selecting an item Close Closes the current document 251 11 1 5 Save The current document is saved to keep all changes you have made 11 1 6 Save as You can use this menu item to save the current document with another name 11 1 7 Edit format You will be directed to the Paper tab of the current document s properties Execute this command if you want to change the paper format of your document See Paper tab on page 254 for a detailed explanation Filter O System formats Producer User defined formats Format
353. ost Manager and where the fields salutation gender and first name are filled with absurd contents These presettings can be undone for every address separately during processing its incorrect salutation hide automatically changed addresses Automatically changed addresses will not be shown in the results dialog These addresses can be made visible by checking the respective option on page 89 Statistics This status contains detailed information on the course of the salutation check and its results Au tomatically changed addresses are either released directly for writing to or are displayed for manual correction The behavior depends on the options on the previous page which have been set before starting the salutation check g 85 0 of the salutations are correct 14 6 4 of the addresses have been automatically complemented Saui HEAT Print Damart 28 07 85 0 Aom complementa 4 40 14 6 Aom Comet bed Ta 03 Aum Combes 10 lanar ati it Comeciod tO Sum 100 0 e All addresses are deemed to be Correct where the field salutation is filled and matches the gender of the first name The Automatically complemented line contains information on how often Infopost Manager had to set the field salutation or gender based on the first name The Automatically corrected line shows the number of recipients where Infopost Manager had to adjust the salutation e g first name is male but f
354. ost important items of menus File and View by clicking the icons in the upper bar and can also make more details visible by zooming into sub areas 4 Prints the currently shown map region incl the various color shadings for the spread e B Displays the spread of all items of the current project by number within the chosen region The caption can be opened and closed via the caption icon or the View menu With this icon or the View menu you can specify which color should be used to display the spread 2 F Zooms into the view within the frame you select ul This tool is used to move the map Zooms out the view 3 Changes into the map s original total view a You can directly zoom into a region either routing region routing zone province Nielsen region or country which you can select in the next window 197 o Province Number B adentw uerttemberg 415 Bavaria 259 Bremen 645 Hamburg BD Hesse Lower Saxony Mecklenburg Wwestern Pomerania North Rhine Westphalia Rhineland Palatinate Saarland 44 Saxonp 4nHhalt Schleswig Holstein db Thuringia ag OK _ Caneel You can also zoom by clicking directly into the map Clicking and holding the left button will span a frame which marks the area to be zoomed in clicking right will zoom out by one level Extras In the Extras menu you can find further options for the map tool Show objects Rivers and seas Highways and inters
355. ot data have been exchanged on page 162 with the Deutsche Post server If yes the exact time and date is listed as well as the transferred numbers Data exchange Deutsche Post rar mumbar ol Ligutseche Fics 48184571 Fraser number of cusioma 000000414 OTRO at are Change on 20 08 2007 11 49 49 7 2 Address spread by ZIP This lists gives a compilation of the used addresses grouped by ZIPs Unused addresses might be e g manually ignored during duplicate search or in the address management or were classified as postally incorrect by the address check 189 e You see the number of addresses belonging to a specific ZIP The geographic distribution within Germany is shown by the Map Tool on page 196 a Address spread by gt Preview a Print Print options Export Close 24178 Unused 24 257 i le Province el Nielsen region e Quantity el 1 Hamburg Hamburg Stelle Lower Saxony Bargstedt Brest Harsefeld Lower Saxony Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Hamburg Norderstedt Sohleswig Holstein Norderstedt Schleswig Holstein Norderstedt Schleswig Holstein Norderstedt SchleswigHolstein Norderstedt Sohleswig Holstein Wedel SchleswigHolstein L beck Schleswig Holstein L beck SchleswigHolstein L beck SchleswigHolstein ho pa pa po 1 A A A A A pa A pp op 2 087 entries a The spread by ZIP can be printed or exported Further information on Preview Print options and Export can be found in c
356. ound during address check Edit The current address can be changed by pressing the Enter key or by clicking the Edit button The Edit address on page 67 dialog window will appear This dialog window can also be opened by the contextual menu item Edit right mouse click the shortcut CTRL B by double clicking an address data record or by clicking the icons tick question exclamation mark or bar This dialog window is arranged into three areas e the address field incl status information e suggestions offered by Infopost Manager for optimizing the address e the selection area Write to address Ignore address type SWEET Major reqnent q Status of Street address Postally incorrect Error descrip bon Mo such street name existing for ths ZIP Suggestions for Street address Street Bradkstr 1 ZIP 46117 Forsterbruchstr 1 46145 Address field incl status information In the edit mask the complete address is shown at the top left you may see here street P O Box as well as major recipient addresses e Address types which can be used are shown in bold if several useable address types are available the hierarchy is as follows major recipient address P O Box address street address e unusable address types shown in gray e incorrect information are shown in red e automatically or manually corrected information appear in blue e information missing from a data record are indicated
357. our mail merge document A MM abe gs PO PR E BS e N E RE The buttons of this toolbar repeat specific items of the Insert menu Page toolbar You can use this navigation bar to browse your document Furthermore you can insert new pages before or behind the current page or you can delete any active page The buttons of this toolbar repeat specific items of the Insert menu 11 4 Insert Using the menu item nsert you can insert new position frames or you can extend your current document by additional pages The position frames are the most important elements of mail merge documents All contents that you want to integrate into your document are inserted via position frames The contents of some of these position frames e g the address block or the text frame with data fields are taken from the address file as long as there are respective contents available for each field With an address block for instance Infopost Manager automatically hides redundant spaces caused by a lack of content in a specific address or even completely eliminates empty lines Furthermore data fields with varying content lengths are harmonically inserted into the continuous text thus avoiding fixed distances to the following word 219 11 4 1 Address block la Identcode pu Routing code abe Text Rotated text Y Franking mark 2 Transport service P Premiumadress Sender s instruction aoe G
358. ous items k Start no for franking mark ZL 1 Franking marks can be printed easily on the envelopes in mail merge mode 145 Remaining items cannot be balanced with franking mark but must be franked e g by machine or with a stamp If you want to use Premiumadress on page 289 in your mailshot activate the correspondent check box Infopost Manager now informs you if the Premiumadress relevant information are not completely available in mail merge or export You can activate the check box GOGREEN if you want to attend the environment programme of Deutsche Post Once activated Infopost Manager makes the corresponding position frame on page 294 available for mail merge Further details can be found on the gt Internet 5 2 4 Remaining item tab Dimensions Type Franking Remaining item Franking type 5 As per Infopost currently Franking mark Set individually Postage stamp Postage Set postage individually Product Format Postage Franking type In this area you can specify the franking type for remaining items This is especially useful when choosing a franking type for Infopost items that is not allowed for remaining items Postage Using option Set postage individually you can let Infopost Manager calculate the total postage with a specific individual postage per item for remaining items 5 3 Production properties
359. ow dispatch as Infopost International E Allow dispatch as remaining item Allow dispatch as Letters International at kilo rates Discount 0 A anca Normally there are two kinds of dispatch available The options Allow dispatch as Infopost and Allow dispatch as remaining item are enabled per default The option Allow extra items to reach higher bulk discounts is activated by default It causes Infopost Manager to calculate more items than are actually existing in case this will reduce the total postage due to a higher bulk discount Deactivate this option to prevent those pseudo items to be created This can be necessary if you want to process the data created by Infopost Manager externally and will thereby merge different address sets If you are Infopost Koop customer you can advice Infopost Manager to automatically pay extra items during optimization in order to reach 100 000 items if the mailshot volume should be too low Just activate the appropriate check box Infopost Manager automatically classifies the items into the categories Infopost and remaining items during postage optimization and always provides the optimal spread with the cheapest charges It is important that the items for these categories have to be produced separately and posted with a separate posting list for Infopost Remaining items are posted as normal lette
360. page 360 Filtered addresses This menu item can only be chosen if you have selected a filter on page 76 1 pie Similar to selected addresses you can set the status of the filtered addresses to Do not write to resp Write to delete them or perform multi changes If you use a command of this submenu selection will be ignored The chosen command will in any case affect all filtered addresses Module Vario By using the Vario module you will be able to quickly and comfortably assign consistent variants Details can be found in chapter Vario on page 360 Details This command provides information on the properties of each individual address Property Value Address no 1 Address usable Yes Ignore address No Address type used Street address ZIP used 20095 Country Name Germany Country ISO code 276 Address source C Users Public oc iments Deutsche Past AGMnfonast Manz bi 4 b Address number The address number refers to the position where the address is saved in the file Address useable This information corresponds to the result of the first check of the addresses during import and shows whether or not the address contains all fields required for dispatch in particular the ZIP and city Ignore address Yes means that the data record has been deactivated in the address check on page 91 the duplicate search on page 114 or in the dialog window of the address management on page 67 No
361. pective menu item will get a submenu where you can directly access the report Options You can adjust the nixie check with the help of the options and thus receive even better results Nixie check options search mode Regular search Key field comparison Settings gt Regular search with key field comparison 5 Onl key field comparison 131 Nixie check optio Regular search Key field comparison Settings E Ignore addresses without contact person E Consider field Company slower E Compare company and name fields slower E Consider first name with home addresses E Show similar address as duplicate Match accuracy Search intensity i I 1 similar low Faster high slower The settings are similar to those of the duplicate search on page 115 4 8 2 Results After the check is completed you will see statistics that display the number of checked addresses Furthermore you can see the respective number of exact akin similar or likely equal addresses You can then define the degree of conformity that decides which addresses will be sorted out prior to optimization Nixie check Select addresses Statistics Hits Total addresses Exact Ignored addresses Akin International addresses Similar Checked addresses Likely Select addresses Do not write to Write to To specify this use the slider in the Select addresses area Each vertical line on the scale m
362. plete document sets for your mailshot in one step This is especially useful if you work with partial postings on page 158 or job splittings on page 372 Production and posting document Documents Infopost National Documents b Production lists e Trap list Wl Tray target list 2 Pallet list Pallet target list Routing labels Tray label Pallet label Posting lists Output Directory CAU ser Public Documents File prefix New Project Other Phone number 49 123 4567 89 Select a posting from the dropdown menu for which you like to create a set of production and posting documents The different Documents can be defined on the correspondent area Option lt all postings gt creates all sets in one step Each set is stored in a separate ZIP archive In the Output you have to specify the directory for the storage of the created documents You can use the file prefix to head each ZIP archive file name with this string 6 9 Mail merge IPM on page 249 182 6 10 Mail merge Word on page 314 6 11 Address export on page 323 183 Analysis menu Contents Tele Project StatistliES saxea cow eR AAA 184 CAR gt ome oo Pe ee eek Cae eee t pee eee ds e 185 Adz Address IMPONE 185 las Balutation check poderes ra paa e 185 7 1 4 Address check a 185 7 1 5 Duplicate search e e 186 LLO Robinson check s ix s rss cesas dr rana A 186 Flete MIO
363. pplication has to be already installed on your computer which is capable of displaying PDF files e g Adobe Reader 9 6 About This menu item opens the About dialog window Infopost Manager s current version and components used as well as available and activated modules can be seen here 242 pesones BTEC Infopost Manager Professional License Muster GmbH Max Muster License ID 498 972 9F9 E 86 3 concurrent users v0 1 1 Build 37553 26 11 2013 16 35 Copyright E 002 2073 Deutsche Post AG Publisher Deutsche Post AG www deutschepost de dialogmarketing INFOPOS T Producer Bauer Kirch GmbH HARNA GER MANAGE w bauer kirch de co fo r a E EA Leistungssiegel Change license y You can change Infopost Manager s license information at any time Click the button Change license Lizenzierung Aktivierung Firma Benutzer Lizenznummer lt Keep existing license gt Demoversion Standard Demoversion Professional E Manuelle Aktivierung ber das Telefon and enter the new data together with a valid license key 243 Ye 10 Information on field assignment Contents 10 1 Address files and their assignments Examples 244 This Help chapter gives you detailed information on the various ways of assigning the fields of an address file in order to make address check duplicate search and postage optimization provide efficient results Infopo
364. printing endless labels They offer compact information about the whole print job such as number of labels and pages to be printed as well as the project name With a summary page at the beginning of a print job you will quickly gain an overview over the amount of labels to be used within a pile of label sheets Similar to the summary pages separating pages offer a short overview over the following items They can be issued before each tray bundle tray bundle target pallet or pallet target For example they contain the number and type ZIP RR or Germany with the identifier of the following production bundle as well as the number of the included items This overview can be very useful for the production With the tab paper source on this page you can specify the paper tray that should be used for the overview pages Setup pages As with the summary page you can here specify whether and when summary pages should be printed A setup page looks like a usual printout page except that no real addresses will be shown Instead of the field contents of the address database only the field names will be shown Furthermore all Yes No fields as for instance beginning of a bundle on this page will be set as TRUE Use setup pages to try out whether the label sheets or endless labels will be imprinted correctly and if necessary adjust the format on page 252 Setup pages can also be used to prepare the so called Cheshire machines as the sign fo
365. projects Retrieve dispatch properties to new projects Pl Retrieve payment method to new projects 224 Defaults for new projects If you activate the option Show Project properties dialog with new project the dialog field Project properties on page 42 will appear with each new project which will be created General Project name new Project Descriptors About Folder Project root director S hats Pry duration O minutes Created on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Changed on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Sender Muster 4G Wusterhausen 143456709 Mailer Muster AG Wusterhausen 23456789 Delivery unknowr Here you can specify additional details to the project such as description or about For all projects you can predefine the most important production properties on page 146 via op tion Retrieve production properties to new projects You can use the Settings button to specify the respective values You can use Routing district optimization in order to send even fewer items as Infopost For this at least 50 item targets have to be located within the routing district of the acceptance office where you will post them If you always post your items at the same acceptance office you should use routing district optimization as default If you want to use this option for all future projects you can specify this here globally and enter the ZIP of your acceptance office Use routing district
366. ptimization resp with optimization in Only National sort out international addresses on page 345 mode Please refer to chapter Postage optimization on page 154 if you want to know how the production rebates are calculated 000 FP a Detepaari A T T Pd sihana Papes Fara Ara Edar Falp ETRE EAT E Ciara Jri Hatonal Hobe E Total postage 3 694 09 EUR net Dscount OAI EUR Faas Poslapa or Ligas Canty hi Rarang dera 145 EUR J mnir g abogan 0 44 ELA 50508 Polal Optimization Gi is Cisco aihn rd Maii Tray produc ios R regs 53H A S i a ar a Pollet prodr iin meni IL eee i Extra hem Lee a Da Total Tolal poole Rann projecte gt mle Adri nition Tab International shows the optimization results for all international items Cveniew National Intemational Notes Ej Total postage 1 961 31 EUR net A Ca egory Oniry gr Trap och Gaati infoposl intorraloral Economy 0145 EUR FT interraboral Prony 0 48 EUR 1 232 Extra itam 045 EUR g Decoum Rerama Wem intermalignal 1145 EUR i Frankiarserdica Total LE Total postage Las Ya o hi Tae Dea 100 EUR 1774 71 EUR hia Pd CL E EET HEH EUR 11 30 ELA 10 53 EUR 1091 05 EUR MH H EUR 1154 47 EUR T o 00 0 par kg Weight Consta EDI EUR 28 700 kg ya 75 FEUR ETI EUR 12 200 kg LENE 6 EUR 8 00 EUR 145 EUR 555 300 Eg 1 501 11 EUR Mel 1251 311 EUR Vali added tax 17265 EVR CIs 2111 90 EUR
367. r cutting only with paper formats label sheet If this option is checked Infopost Manager distributes the addresses on the label sheets the way that the label stacks coming from a cut label sheet stack can be easily arranged by simply putting the various stacks in series Thus the correct order coming from the optimization is achieved This feature is also commonly known as Panel print If you activate option Lanes you can print your addresses on endless labels the way that the con secutive addresses are arranged within one label sheet lane This eases the vertical cutting process 263 fo Ee Align label at top left margin This option is only availabe for printing routing labels on page 177 By using this option you can reduce the number of necessary cuts after printing Items Specify here how many pages or labels per addresses shall be printed Printing position only with paper formats label sheet and endless label Choose here where the first free label is located in an endless label or label sheet The preview to the right of this option helps you to choose the correct label Print position le Extended tab General Options Evierded Additonal pages Paper source Print jobs E Separate print job per 1 S addresses Contirm print job individually Page area All Current page Pages From page all pages Print preferably O fast accurate Print jobs Print jobs
368. r format for the current document Margins Background tes Filter O System formats Producer User defined formats Format gt Preview Mame Description Size cm W DIN BE hoch 12 50 17 60 Y DIN BB quer 17 60 x 12 50 DIN C4 hoch 22 90 x 32 40 DIN C4 quer 32 40 x 22 90 DIN C5 hoch 16 20 x 22 90 DIN C5 quer 22 90 x 16 20 DIN CE quer 16 20 x 11 40 DIN C65 hoch 11 40 22 90 DIN C65 quer 22 90 11 40 3 E E 3 Y DIN CB hoch 11 40 x 16 20 3 E Filter Use the filter to restrict the selection of the available paper formats in order to find the desired format more quickly Papei Background Filter O System formats Producer Alb 0 User defined formats lt All gt Format Deutsche Post Preview Mame Sigel 3 DIN BE ht Zweckform a DIN BE quer BTR TED Y DIN C4 hoch 22 90 x 32 40 28 DIN C4 quer 32 40 x 22 90 4 DIN CS hoch 16 20 22 90 8 DIN CS quer 22 90 x 16 20 Y DIN CE hoch 11 40 x 16 20 of DIN CE quer 16 20 x 11 40 Ye DIN C6 5 hoch 11 40 x 22 90 DIN CE 5 quer 22 90 11 40 ETE Paper type You can use this filter to change the document type e endless labels e label sheets e letters e envelopes and e postcard are available Produced by Infopost Manager knows the paper formats offered by some manufacturers The filter Produced by restricts the formats available for selection to the products of one of these manufacturers The lt
369. r number is crucial for the response analysis Only if it is unique for every order a valid statistic can be compiled This will e g allow for calculating the number of responses that have actually been sent The order number can contain up to 15 characters Allowed are capital letters from A to Z and digits from 0 to 9 Item ID Each reply item must have a unique identification number Choose the option number consecutively in order to let Infopost Manager automatically set the IDs By specifying a start number you can ensure different campaigns will not use the same IDs You can also use item IDs you have imported already In order to do so choose the option Value from field 306 User specific data You can add customized data to the data of the response analysis If you want to group the data select the option Value from field You may for example use the field ZIP This would enable you to see how many replies have been sent from which city Please note that the content of the selected field will be coded into the data matrix code and hence only capital letters from A to Z and digits from 0 to 9 are allowed Please make sure that the field you want to use will contain only those characters for every item Rio 11 4 15 Responseplus franking mark Edit properties General Responseplus franking mark View Quality Franking mark with franking wave 5 High E Particular motif as supplement Medium Load motif
370. r the bundle change occurs in each label row Setup pages will always be printed from the tray that is used for the standard pages 266 Ho o 11 1 11 11 1 12 Paper source tab General Options Extended Additional pages Paper source Paper source O Default paper tray Manually select tray Cane Paper source Default paper tray With this option you can print the selected pages from the default paper tray of your printer Manually choose tray If you activate this option you can specify which trays should be used for the mail merge pages and which for the overview pages on the preceding page Mail merge pages are differentiated into first pages e g business letterheads and all further pages e g empty pages You can for example use this option for printing overviews on colored paper to get a visual separation of the individual lots With the option change tray you can specify for instance that different paper trays should alternately be used for printing out the trays A reasonable usage is e g printing the even tray numbers on paper in landscape format and the odd pages on paper in portrait format Thus you will receive a physical separation resp sorting of the various lots Print current address Use this option to print only the currently selected address for instance for a test print or for printing individual addresses once again Browse to the desired address in
371. r zu Muller The settings in the area Automatic creation refer to addresses with a personal contact person Here you can specify with which expression your salutation should begin for example the rather amicable salutation Liebe r or the polite Sehr geehrte r whether an r should be added to this expression for all male contact persons and which fields form the address data should be part of this line above the actual text Set a default as to what should be inserted in the letter salutation if an address by name is not possible Finally you can also specify which mark should end the letter salutation for example a comma or an exclamation mark The field settings are only valid if no letter salutation has been given in the address management o In the area Examples you can directly see the impact of your settings to a concrete letter salutation 403 Extended settings Field properties of atin Show only if salutation is Hern or Frau Pret Show fields in attn Salutation Title only with Prof and Dr First name Name prefix Last name Mame suffis Salutation Herr resp Herrn o Leave as is a Transform Herr to Herr C Transform Hern to Herr With default you can activate one of three stored profiles Salutation and title With this field you can combine salutation and title of a name Title and name This data field will display a combinatio
372. ras If you choose option Use project file all changes in your project will be directly saved and cannot be undone Furthermore you can choose to link the creation of working copy to the project size Activate option Ask if project size exceeds x MB and choose the desired size As soon as a project exceeds this size Infopost Manager will ask you whether or not a working copy shall be created With the creation of a working copy it might take slightly longer to open a project Printing If you activate the option Print application acronym instead of name the Infopost Manager only places the acronym IPM instead of the full program name on every printed form Internet On the tab Internet you can enter the setting for the automatic news and update check as well as for the general Internet access 221 m Data Directories and file names Telemetry General Internet Order management Automatic check Activate automatic news check Days between news check Last check 06 07 20015 Activate automatic update check Days between update check Last check 06 07 2015 Internet settings Configure how the application connects to the Internet E Confirm dial up Automatic check Using options Activate automatic news check resp Activate automatic update check you can select the desired check type News are information related to Infopost Manager such as product releases new postal regulations availability of updates etc
373. ray or bundle properties filling amounts tray resp bundle quantity per pallet or routing district optimization Production properties ryt Suze 1 small Haximal 192 itema half full at 807 Hinimizz postage Pallets Empty weight 4 00 Eg Haximal Y6 traya PALM 2S Papag 7 1 11 Payment method This information on how the charge of the current project is to be invoiced is taken from the data which you provided during preparation 187 Payment method properties Parer zender Huster AG 12355 Husterthausen EKP 2333333333 0401 Account no TEITH Bark Mustecbank AG BIC 30030000 Paien method Cesi EC card Prela deducir pemniiied Yes Prpa Caiena Sned of ibara zampa ar bs Infopent National 7 1 12 Adressdialog properties Here is shown whether you use Adressdialog If you do you can see what kind of codes were generated if any Adressdialog properties Adressdialog activated Codes assigned Login Via Code 7 1 13 Gross charge ie 7 1 14 The project statistics show the details on how the charge for the current project is composed The table shows the charges for the two categories Infopost and remaining items calculated based on the information per item the exact item quantity per category any extra items see below required in order to achieve the minimum quantity required for Infopost and the resulting costs An example will clarify the advantage of extra items A mailshot with
374. rd In case of an error the reason for the failure will be shown Status of executed actions x The order has not been accepted by Deutschen Post The following errors are stated in the response data In einen Wersandplanelntrag wurde das iel 05304 durch den Postleitzahl Ersatz 999949 ersetzt Code 518169 In einen Yersandolaneintrag wurde das Aiel 05162 durch den Postleitzahl Ersatz ed lfthere are any questions please contact the hotline of IT Customer Support BRIEF IT CSB at 49 6151 908 8000 Mo Fr Sarn 5prn Statue to clipboard As soon as you corrected the displayed error just start the data exchange once again Cancel order Call this submenu item if you intend to completely delete the already transferred project data from Deutsche Post s data exchange server Changing the sender necessitates for example the cancellation of an order If required you can created a new order any time by starting the data exchange once again Request status When you open a project which was created by an order on the data exchange server on page 26 of Deutsche Post its status will be requested That is to say Infopost Manager compares the local project data with those on the exchange server You can also initiate this process using this menu item The order status will be shown in a separate window as in Request details on page 22 166 Overview tab This tab shows a tabular overview over the process transferre
375. record Here the hierarchy is as follows major recipient address P O Box address street address The selection which has been made is displayed to the right of the address box If for instance you would nevertheless prefer to use the P O Box address although there is a correct street address this facility can be deactivated manually here You can use the button Original to view the originating address content Here you will also see the original error message 109 Ho Change If you make changes to your addresses after postage optimization it has to be executed once again Even apparently minor changes to your data such as another postcode may have a direct impact on the total postage for your items You should therefore never make such changes after printing the addresses forms and lists or after exporting your addresses since otherwise the whole print or export of the addresses would have to be repeated The Change button opens an dialog window in which manual changes to the current address can be made You will find more information on the options on each of the three tabs here on page 67 Every time you change a data record the current address is automatically checked and if possible the data record is released for writing to Report of address check All results and changes resulting from automatic and manual address editing are logged by Infopost Manager A report can be viewed at any time during
376. rectly access the report Installation Update If you start the Robinson check for the very first time Infopost Manager Professional prompts you to install the Robinson file which contains the Robinson list data Panini check Installation of Robinson list In order to use this feature you have to initially install a file which contains the Robinson list Additional information can be found in the Internet An order form in POF format can be found here Install Cancel 127 Ho e 4 7 2 4 7 3 Click on Install and choose the path for this file After the confirmation the file will be installed As the Robinson list is revised on a regular basis regularly you can also update the installed Robinson file Go to tab Update in the Robinson check window and press the Update button If you install the demo version of the Robinson list you will only see the Select addresses on the current page dialog Any viewing or adopting results will not be possible The demo Robinson list can be freely downloaded from the Internet at www infopost manager de Execution On tab settings specify against which of the given sector s you would like to check your address file Robinson check Choice criterion of mailshot E Automotive and accessories Bank institutes insurances O Books and music O Health articles dietary supplement cosmetic products E Household articles kitchen home gard
377. rectory C Addresses ProjecteProject name Export presettings Suggest last used export directoy across projects User defined configuration Create non existing directories without prompt Import presettings Here you can specify the directories your import sources will come from Activate option Suggest last used import directory across projects if you routinely import your ad dresses always from the same directory Option User defined configuration allows for extended settings With button you can preset a fixed directory for all projects Button allows for building the directory dynamically using various project properties 237 ja Select data field gt A a m 2 Explanation to focused field Project Contains the project name Project description Project directory Sender Mailer Payer Post customer number sender Post customer number mailer Post customer number payer System Date Time User name Complete user name Windows user name Select the properties the import directory will usually depend on Example Suppose you save your import files in C Addresses Within that directory you plan a sub directory for each of your projects with the name of the project To import addresses for a new project with name Mailing from the directory C AddressesMailing enter C Addresses into the text field Directory Then open the selection dialog with button and select
378. red forms w Infopost fv Posting lists Variant list Pallet notification Phone number for inquires 49 123 4567 69 Sender r E Specify date 21 01 2014 Pallets will be picked up Phone number The phone number for inquiries to be entered here is mandatory It will be printed on the different posting lists at dedicated places Date option Specify date 05 02 2014 Pallets will be picked up 4 Februar 4 2014 FS 4 3 1 2 FOB 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18019 20 21 27 33 24 25 26 2728 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 Activate the date option to enter the desired posting date in the posting list If this option is not activated no date will be printed Print Preview Initiate the Print Preview to view the posting lists before you print them You will find more details on the further options of this Preview in the Print Preview on page 416 chapter This preview can also be initiated in the Print postal forms dialog window by double clicking the desired form Activate the check box Pallets will be picked up if you also want to print a pallet notification In this case a dialog to select reception and pick up point will appear 181 Beale natitiicaticn Reception paint Mame Contact person Phone Pick up point Street Na Musterstr ZIP City 12355 Musterhausen Country Germany Date Pick up date 05 02 2014 6 8 Production and posting documents With this menu item you can create com
379. reparing and calculating your direct marketing You can use Infopost Manager to check and review your addresses to print labels with addresses in the sequence required by the postal regulations and to create the production lists and all the forms you need to post your mailshot campaign Table of contents Main window on the following page Project menu on page 15 Addresses menu on page 48 Preparation menu on page 140 Results menu on page 169 Analysis menu on page 184 Extras menu on page 200 Help menu on page 241 Information on field assignment on page 244 Mail merge IPM on page 249 Mail merge Word on page 314 Production guideline on page 319 Address export on page 323 Modules on page 336 Plugins on page 385 Version history on page 387 2 Main window Contents 2 1 Menu bar and action buttons o ee eevee 22a CIVETVIEW 4 446466 46545 OSE AER ES Doe uek CHCES sar a bd ew ow eo ee ee we we Oe ee ee ar ees 24 RCCENt PIOJeCCts ersari ke REE SOR EERE HK ERE EO Se OR ew eS 2 9 R s lht arca sesos Ee eH REA OAM DES Ae OES You can use the main window to manage your Infopost project The main screen is subdivided into different areas e Menu bar and action buttons on page 11 e Overview on page 12 e Quick Clicks on page 13 e Recent projects on page 13 Result area on page 14 y Infopost Manager Professional Nes Project Prag Address Praparation Asus
380. retoolings Varant clean production without pallet consolidation Trap Bundle production Produce trays Produce bundles only with Grob or Masi terns Other Produce pallets Produce partial posting compliant E Routing district optimization ZIP of acc office As an alternative to trays Grof and Maxi items may also be combined in bundles The further options and the project s behavior depend on the chosen production type e g the second tab may be named Trays on the following page or Bundles on page 150 The choice of option also affects the appearance of the Pallets on page 151 tab Bundle production is only selectable for GroB and Maxi items resp for Infopost Kreativ Otherwise the productions properties automatically indicates Produce trays Rio 147 5 3 1 2 Pallet production Pallet production may have a considerable impact on the total charge by providing considerable rebates if at least 4 000 items are available Pallets must be produced as soon as the total net weight of Infopost items exceeds 0 5 tons the check boy will be automatically checked in those cases If you want to benefit from potential pallet rebates and therefore to produce pallets although the total weight of your items is less than 0 5 tons activate the options Produce pallets and Produce pal lets even if weight under 0 5 t on the Pallets tab Partial postings If you want to use partial postings on
381. riant A 2 4 3 Variant A 2 3 5 Variant A 2 3 5 Variant A 2 4 8 Variant A 2 3 8 Variant A 2 3 2 Variant A 2 4 2 Variant A 2 4 2 Variant A 2 4 4 Variant A 2 4 4 Variant A 2 4 3 Variant A 2 4 6 Variant A 2 4 2 Variant A 2 A oe Tray tanget Type E ER a a LECCE EE LLL Label Pallet target No Germany 1 Germany 1 Germany 1 Germany 1 Germany 1 Germany 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RI 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RZ 2 RI 2 RZ 2 RI HZ 2 RZ 2 RI 2 RZ 2 RI 2 RZ 2 RZ Be careful with overruling Infopost Manager as all changes directly influence the production and thus also the production rebates especially with tray production Infopost Manager calculates e g the filling amount of a tray for the single flow method on page 367 based on the settings you made here VarioPlus will also have influence on the various results the lists will now also include information on the VarioPlus mailshot Additionally further posting lists can be printed out and new fields are available for the export If you chose multi flow method on page 368 within the production properties the production list for trays resp bundles will show an additional column Variant With single flow method trays resp bundles will usually not be variant clean Therefore this column will not be shown in the production lists A MOP EJ Pi Ba P FA EJ Pi EJ P Pa oa EJ Pa B This new column displays the
382. ritten out country name using the Additional fields option Country codes tab Use this tab to edit remove or add descriptors and codes for individual countries Such changes will be available for all future Infopost Manager projects Add to the existing country abbreviations where necessary other abbreviations or country descriptors used in your projects Thus Infopost Manager can convert these to be written in compliance with the postal regulations Overview tab This tab will show a table overview of all the abbreviations and codes which have already been entered Further functions You can right click to access two further convenient functions for each of the addresses listed in the table which are available to facilitate quick retrieval of a specific data record 61 Ho Goto Enter here the number of the data record in the source file Infopost Manager immediately displays the desired data record Find Use this menu item to find a specific expression or part of a word in the imported files Address import Status report Clicking the button OK of the field assignment dialog window starts the address import Now Infopost Manager verifies whether or not the addresses contain sufficient information to be used for posting The postally correctness of the addresses is not checked This has to be done separately after importing using the address check on page 91 The status report can be viewed in the pro
383. ritten to as soon as the address check is finished By clicking this icon the respective address will be written to without any changes Addresses with a green tick comply with the postal regulations and have been automatically or manually corrected resp changed Addresses with a blue tick have been automatically corrected using a Thesaurus suggestion and are thus postally correct a 8 Addresses with a yellow question and exclamation mark do not comply with the postal regulations but Infopost Manager has found suggestions which can be selected E n Addresses with a blue question and exclamation mark do not comply with the postal regulations but there are Thesaurus suggestions in addition to Infopost Managers address suggestions which can be selected Addresses with a red bar do not comply with the postal regulations and Infopost Manager cannot make any suggestion The addresses shown can be viewed quickly in either view by holding the Cursor Down key If you want to edit a data record it can be opened immediately by pressing the Enter key The Edit address on page 67 dialog window appears There are also two buttons for each data record which permit the current address to be released or locked for writing to It is even easier to toggle the status of the address Write to address Do not write to address by pressing the spacebar If you right click you will open a context sensitive menu whose options refer to the current
384. rkerzentrum 25 52155 Monschau Die PLZ 52155 existiert nicht e address records with an invalid ZIP type for instance a street ZIP with a P O Box address or vice versa 74 Ee Bauer Kirch GmbH Am Handwerkerzentrum 25 52153 Monschau Die PLZ 52153 ist eine Postfach PLZ e address records of street address type with no content in the street field Bauer Kirch GmbH 52156 Monschau e address records of P O Box address type with empty P O Box field Bauer Kirch GmbH 52153 Monschau e address record with no content in field Companyl B2B or Last Name B2C 52156 Monschau All these address records are available for processing the project but can only be used if they are corrected manually in address management on page 66 or automatically via the address check on page 91 Important If an address record contains several address types e g street and P O Box address where only one address is incorrect the address record nevertheless remains useable because only the correct address type will be used Only if all existing address types of an address record have been detected as erroneous according to the selected options it will be marked as not usable unless it is manually or automatically corrected 5 Address options German addresses Extend 4 place ZIP with leading zero If you activate option Extend 4 digit ZIP wit
385. roject Internationale Kampagne national now Right after the projects are divided Infopost Manager will ask you whether you would like to open the first new project Please note that in order to avoid redundant data a project you have transferred to Deutsche Post already must be canceled before it can be divided 3 10 Create Pack amp Go It is also possible to create a Pack amp Go file on page 38 directly from the Project menu 3 11 Import Pack amp Go You can directly import Pack Go files on the previous page using this menu item and thus bypass the project explorer on page 28 The current project will be closed modification will not be lost 41 3 12 Data backup Using this item you can create a backup on page 232 of your data 3 13 Properties The project properties help to keep an overview of the projects They show a lot of information on the current project which Infopost Manager recorded from the beginning Some information from these properties are also available in the project overview under the topic General a WPfopost Mamager Professions Near Project Prag Address Praparation Remis Anakees Extras Help gt Ps m J ea tagih A hee 3 New Project SenderiMailer Sender Bauer Finch GmbH Aachen Pop cisieser number CATE Bauer inch Gari Aachen Pos eusie maTi Iinfonmacion dor this order Mide number Last tarse Machina FRANETT den
386. roject with the project data being available on the exchange server and adopts existing specifications such e g item data posting date order number etc You can only create a new project based on an order from the exchange server if a suitable customer is existing in your customer index on page 201 for the contained customer number Before you can continue working with the project Infopost Manager opens the project properties on page 42 dialog and you have the opportunity to change or expand project name and description General Details Project name new Project Description About Folder Project root directory Statuz Pry duration O minutes Created on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Changed on 17 01 2014 12 15 31 Sender Muster 4G Wusterhausen 123456789 Mailer Muster AG Wusterhausen H 23456789 Deler unknowre Cancel _ Now your project is created and you can e g start importing on page 49 the missing addresses 3 4 Open Here you can see the folder structure in which your projects are managed Click on the desired project and open it in order to continue work All other functions of this window are explained in the chapter project explorer on the following page Project Edit View O Or 7115 E Folder gt Hiis de E E Projects Demo Maiings Name Da Demo DHL Infop ta Demo International a Demo Professional 93 Demo Standard Pa Demo Yano Infopost Manager project
387. rrect major recipient names if possible Search mode Search intensity Rating tolerance a low normal high similar dose Thesaurus Activate Use for automatic correction Check Only check used addresses With this option addresses which are not released for writing to are excluded from the check The release can be done manually in the address management dialog during a previous address check or during the duplicate search status set to ignored If this option is unchecked all address records in the current address file will be checked 94 He Automatically ignore incorrect address types Theoretically there can be allocated up to three address types to each address record the street address the P O Box address and the major recipient address If single address types are incomplete in an address record but e g a useable street address is available the incorrect P O Box and major recipient addresses will be ignored in the address check if this option has been activated In the statistics of the address check in the column Incorrect address type no addresses will be listed since they have not been checked If you uncheck this option all address types will be checked for each data record Always append city name with official supplement If this option is checked all city names will be supplemented with its official supplement For instance 06132 Halle would be changed to 06132 Halle Saale while 33790
388. rs franked with stamps or by machine Deactivate option Allow dispatch as remaining item in order to post even small mailshots as Infopost You will save the efforts for franking the remaining items but have to pay more because Infopost Manager will calculate extra items until a dispatch as Infopost will become possible The properties set here can also be predefined as default for future projects To do so set them once under Extras Options on the tab Settings in the section Apply dispatch properties to all new projects on page 225 141 Individual Katalog dispatch If your mailshot complies to the requirements of Individual Katalog dispatch which means that the items are classified as Katalog and their format is Gro or Maxi item with wrapping there will be an additional option Allow dispatch as Individual Katalog dispatch available Dispatch prope ri i ls General Transport service Mode National and International O Only National sort out international addresses G Only International sort out national addresses National products Allow dispatch as Infopost Allow extra items to reach higher bulk discounts Send as Infopost Koop Individual Katalog dispatch is only allowed for catalogs that are send by Infopost It is only meant for single catalogs which have returned before or which have been reordered and don t comply to the minimum qu
389. rsum Show error messages The error messages list the reasons why an address was identified as postally incorrect They can be used to identify the problem for each data record which was existing prior to the automatic or manual check or otherwise why the address still does not comply with the postal regulations after the check E Address No 3 Record 193 Postally incorrect Comection Original Balbier cHG Balbier cHG Frau Doris Schmidt Frau Doris Schmidt 1a a Industiegebiet We Ta a Industriegebiet We Error Invalid specified Streets ZIP Do not separate addresses for pagination By checking this option each address is printed on a report page only if it completely fits to it If not its printing would be forwarded to the subsequent page This option guarantees a relative and mutual independence from the page sequence on the one hand but normally increases the total number of report pages on the other Show chosen options If this option is checked all selected options on page 92 for the current run of the address check will be listed in the report Additionally the used postal routing data version is included Later 113 Te e conclusions about the address check results can be drawn and serve as a useful tool for result analysis especially for people who have not done the address check personally Check options Database Datafactory Postalcode 1 2014 Mark automatically conected addresses as write to
390. s No 1355 of 1386 Postal y incorrect Suggestions avaiable Do not write to address Unsorted Depending on the settings only addresses will be shown e which are completely incorrect or where particular address types are erroneous e where suggestions are available but which could not be corrected automatically e where Thesaurus suggestions are available e which have been changed automatically e which have been changed automatically by using the Thesaurus e which may have been changed manually in address management on page 66 e whose spelling has been changed e or a combination of these groups Navigation buttons Hoon You can use the arrow buttons to change between the different data records or to move directly to the first or last data record wf OF Quits the address check and saves the automatic or manual changes for the current project Addresses for which the Write to address option is not marked are deactivated in the current project and are therefore not written to This marking can be undone in the address management using the Write to address option Cancel 103 Leaves the results view of the address check without retrieving automatic or manual changes to the address file JA Fause Saves the current project and freezes the working status of the address check At any time progressing the address check can be resumed by re opening the project In the meantime no other changes may be carried out to
391. s and the most important information on the step selected in the overview You cannot operate the program from this point but you can gain a very compact overview of the current status of your Infopost project The illustration of the various results will be explained later on in the chapters for the different menu items Please note that the results can become invalid if you make changes to information which has already been used You will be able to identify such changes in the project overview on page 12 14 3 Project menu Contents 3 1 New Intopost dicas raros e ooo wes 16 3 24 Now from Project cami 18 dude Reduce Torde eros aaa IA Se Es 18 3al Eber and find s se sa 2 kb 4 AS SEER EKA A 19 Soc ROGUE Is suas rosarino eee REE Eee eS ae 21 0 0 Request d tails lt o se sessu ada AAA 22 a AIN 26 O45 OPC esros are dra tw Sse ea AAA 27 Jide IMCODEN iaa eee EERO WERE ERE HERA DADE Ew ewe wo 27 3 6 Project explorer o vicerrector 28 fe ACOSO 46464 ta eee OO eee eRe ee ee ee 40 3 0 DAVO SAVE OS a ras AAA 40 3 9 Divide into national international o o 41 3 10 Create Pack amp Go isos cerrara rd As oe ws 41 3 11 Import Pack amp Go s seess 60664569 AAA 41 S12 Dato PACKS 466 bee be aE AA SE 42 31d PTOPEOrteS 0402 AAA DE RES 42 3 13 1 Order management iio o a a 46 OAT E E E SEG ow Ree AAA 47 You can use this menu to manage all projects which you are currently working
392. s data sources to allow for the address with the highest priority to be selected automatically more detailed information can be found below on the next page Ea Activate a record for writing to based on a date oldest youngest more detailed information can be found below on this page Use this button to mark all records for writing to Use this button to lock all records none of the addresses will be marked for writing to To mark only the first record of each group you have to use this button By using this button you mark only the last record le e LD Use this button to filter the table by match accuracy or edited and not edited addresses respectively Important If you select the Group overview option the six selection buttons no longer apply only to the current duplicate group but to all groups simultaneously This can fasten the decision which address is to be written to Please note however that by using this function decisions already taken regarding individual duplicates will be overruled Activating a record based on a date Marking a record based on a date is more complex the way that you can define the behavior in a preceding dialog Mark addresses by Field selection Date Field Date format TT babe ful Date example 20 01 2014 Interpret missing date as E Interpret invalid date as 20 01 2014 Write to address 8 with youngest date O with oldest date 124 o io
393. s for handling your customer index and still keeping the overview especially if the number of customer increases Sort table Mouse click the column header in order to sort the table by this column An arrow indicates the sort direction Change the direction by another mouse click into the same column header City street achen Aachen Alsdorf Berlin Dusseldorf If the arrow shows up the sorting order is ascending i e the sorting starts with the lowest number the beginning of the alphabet or the earliest date The opposite holds for the descending sorting order The column which serves as sorting criterion is always indicated in the lower status bar of the window If the extended mode is deactivated you can only sort the table ascending by the columns Customer No Company1 Compay24 Company3 City Street and Salutation Title First Last name Filter table Click on the blue button at the right border of a column to open a dropdown menu where you find all values found in this column You can filter the table by a value via selecting the respective entry from this menu 207 8 2 1 If you want to deactivate a filter click the menu item All Column order If you want the change the column order click a column header keep the mouse button pressed and drag it to the desired position City street Avi We pst l I ity street E se 2060 Aachen AO ie Aachen Redeye Alsdorf Th
394. s for international items Furthermore you can export those lists per category Infopost International Letters at kilo rates Remaining items International and not used items Optimizing only national addresses especially makes sense for products which are not available for interna tional dispatch such as unwrapped items or Infopost Kreativ International items can be consequently and easily processed at a later time by setting the respective option and choosing a product which is valid for international dispatch Projects with international addresses mode National and International and a product which is valid only for the national dispatch can not be optimized and thus not be posted and finished International products If you have set a mode in which international items are dispatched National and International e g you can determine the kinds of international dispatch the postage optimization should make use of International products lt Allow dispatch as Infopost International B Allow dispatch as remaining item Allow dispatch as Letters International at kilo rates Discount 5 kA Amongst others you can declare here whether or not the postage optimization may send your inter national items as Letters International at kilo rates Just activate the respective check box and enter in field rebate the percentage which is written down in your contract with Deutsche Post In order to produce le
395. s labels or mail merge document If you are going to use the Adressdialog service in your web site for which your customers and prospects already have access data for protected areas it is surely reasonable to allow those users to authenticate with their known data In those cases choose option Login via User name and Password and select a database field in the respective dropdown menu which contains the user name Field selection for PURL This step will only be displayed if you have chosen PURL or PURL and Password as encoding method In the Fields for PURL area you can specify which fields are used for the dynamic part of the PURL 135 Fo e Fields for PURL Mo Description Vorname E Nachname Add TE Down You can extend or reduce the list using the buttons Add and Remove The order can be changed by drag n drop of a field to its desired position or by using the buttons Up and Down Options for PURL This step will only be displayed if you have chosen PURL or PURL and Password as encoding method Here you can normalize PURLs and define the behavior when conflicts arise Separator Upper Lower case 2 None Initial in capital letters 5 Point O All lower case O Hyphen O All upper case Maximal length Conflict resolution Complete O Ascending number Limited Random number 5 Character 3 Digits There are different areas to define possible separators between the fields
396. s of the franking wave from 300 dpi to 1200 dpi Print a sample page for each quality type High Medium and Low in order to determine the optimum quality for your printer Premiumadress This position frame inserts the sender the address block as well as the data matrix code and all additional information for Premiumadress into your mail merge document Musier AG Musierstr 12 12335 Musiertauser a R sler Cie Instruments GmbH Herrn Adolf Stu ch Blumenstr 23 27211 Bassum Address tab On the Address tab you can specify how to print address and sender If you have imported the addresses in only ZIP on page 63 or Label format on page 64 mode the Premiumadress frame cannot create an address block In this case please care about a valid address block by yourself You can for example use text fields on page 282 289 Edit properties General Premiumadress Output Show sender Show address Font Font E Arial 9 Point Muser AG 12345 Musterh auisen Optional fields Show salutation company separately Company F Write to personally c70 Company Transform to capital letters Department Maximal number of lines ES attr F show in front of department additional options Street supplemer Output In the area Output you can hide sender and address information by deactivating the respective check box This can be helpful e g for inserting a self defined address block on p
397. s soon as you corrected the displayed error just start the data exchange once again 5 7 2 Manual data exchange via file transfer Before starting the file transfer the current project status will be shown and you have the opportunity to determine storage location for the exchange file to be transferred Please enter the name of the output file for Deutsche Post here The data at Deutsche Post are up to date Output directory CANT ranster Cancel In principle there are three different status The first notification and a project modification which makes a new transfer of the project data necessary In both cases the reason for the transfer will be 164 Ee Ee shown The third status alternative is the simple case that the project status is up to date meaning that no data have to be transferred Clicking the Next button creates the exchange file in the chose directory which you manually have to send to Deutsche Post afterwards Information on possible transmission methods can be re ceived from IT Customer Support Post IT CSP via hotline 49 6151 908 8000 or via e mail it csp deutschepost de In the second dialog you can input the response file a Transfer order da Please enter the name of the response file from Deutsche Post here Mame of order file CATranster AM_2333333393_20740121_095635_A00000054 xml The data have been successfully transfered and accepted by Deutsche Post Read response file from
398. s the number of used addresses with this value in the current address file Of course you can also define further contents if you for example would like to import on page 49 additional addresses with this value later on or for manually changing existing addresses Should addresses with different field contents in the field Variant Vario be allocated to the same variant you can enter these in the field field content separated by a pipe character e g A B 1 The option Standard indicates that the current variant is the standard variant i e all addresses that are not explicitly assigned to a variant for instance because the field Variant Vario is empty or contains an unknown value will automatically be assigned to this variant The standard variant will be emphasized in the list As it represents all field contents that have not been explicitly assigned to other variants the descriptive line of the field content will be empty If you have clicked the Add all button the following dialog window appears Add variants Here you can automatically add all variants predefined in your address files to the variant list Please note that this option automatically deletes all the variants you have already added Add variants General Pretix Wariant Mumeration O Consecutive number Field content Weight UA 9 E Unwrapped items Remaining items Set postage individually There are only two options in this dialo
399. s the totals and the average values With each tick this summary changes The partial posting management lists all partial postings defined so far in a well arranged table 161 fo 5 7 1 ama l No Desenplion Date Pallets Grose ke Posting 06 02 14 1 06 02 2014 3 1834 2 Posting 07 02 14 2 Posting 07 002 4014 3 Postmg 08 02 14 31 08 02 2114 REA You can now define more partial postings and change or delete existing ones It is important that there are no items left at the end of a project which are not allocated to any partial posting Please note that you must print a separate posting list for each partial posting and submit it to Deutsche Post 5 7 Order management This menu item is only visible if you decided to exchange your project data with Deutsche Post via order management and activated an option other than No data exchange in the application options on page 231 With it you start the transfer of the project data to Deutsche Post s data exchange server or have the opportunity to cancel an order which has been already transferred Dependent on the chosen transfer type the way of interaction with Deutsche Post s data exchange server differs Data exchange via Webservice Before starting the file transfer the current project status will be shown 162 Overview of the data to be transferred Requests to be created Notification of posting Reason First notification Cancel I
400. s this is possible especially taking into account that several input files have been imported When you click the small arrow beside Load template you can add another template to the ones already loaded Now all fields that are contained in any of the loaded templates will be exported In case a field is contained in more than one template Infopost Manager will inform you You will be able to prevent fields from being exported redundantly You can also define a default template which will be automatically applied to newly created projects Right click a template and select from the contextual menu Template is default template The default template is marked bold 14 2 Export addresses from address management Infopost Manager is capable of exporting the addresses out of a project for later use in other applica tions Some information e g mailshot data can only be exported from the Results menu after running postage optimization If address export is launched from address management these fields will remain empty If you used a filter on page 76 in address management only the filtered addresses will be exported and not the complete address database A relevant note will point out this fact The export wizard offers a variety of options for exporting the addresses It will help you to select the correct options in each case you can use the Next and Back buttons to go one step forward or back in order to check or make corrections
401. se areas are shown in light blue and indicated with Frei gestaltbare Zone Information in these areas may be altered You may even add proprietary information The following elements may be placed or changed on your routing labels e Text on page 282 e Rotated Text on page 286 e Graphic on page 295 e Frame on page 297 e Barcode on page 301 Infopost Manager will warn you if an element is placed outside the editable area prior to saving resp printing You may ignore this warning and print the modified routing labels anyway but you infringe the predefinitions of Deutsche Post Please be aware that those labels might be rejected when posting Modified routing labels can be saved and will be automatically used as template for further label prints If an altered label is used its file name is shown in the dropdown field of the respective routing label 423 Routing labels Tray label Format Tray label Default Alta Pallet label Default Retrieve to new projecte You can also define several different templates If you like to change the template recall the label editor and open the desired file As soon as you close the editor this last used file will be automatically taken as new template io Example Working with the routing label editor Practitioners often ask how to increase the font size of the bundle number and like to have the bundle weight on the label too This is how it can be
402. see how Infopost Manager Professional assigns the various items to the categories Infopost Letters at kilo rates and Remaining items Item properties The item properties are modified to some extent in order to deal with the required settings resp information on the dispatch of international items 341 ME International Wrapper format Format DL 220 110mm Preview Length 220 Length Width 110 gt C Portrait Landscape Thickness weight E Coextensive Thickness Oto 5 mm Wi enght AO g ario aa Marantz _ l Cancel Item details If desired you can get an extended view of the postages which are in particular complemented by the international values For this click the Details button MA el Format Clicking the Details button closes the window again International tab As soon as you have chosen option International together with National if applicable in the dispatch properties on page 345 the window tem properties gets another tab International 342 Ee Franking type Like National Franking mark Set individually Franking mark Extra items for Kreativ DE Wrapping weight for national items unwrapped 1S Product Format ostage Details gt Franking type In this area you can decide whether or not you want to apply the same franking type for both national and international items Check the option Like National to do so The information in
403. single rates in a separate window 302 tenso E Product Format Clicking the Details button closes this window If you press the Variants button you will be directed to the now visible tab Variants Variants tab In this area you can define the different variants and assign them the field contents of the address field Variant Vario With the buttons Add Edit and Delete you can directly adjust the list of variants 363 Variants Description Field content Thickness mm Weight g VWarlarit B to 10 100 Variant A 17 to 20 Variant B E 0 to Yanant E E ra Doe Product Format With the Details button the variants single rates which were calculated by Infopost Manager based on your settings can be shown also here If for instance price grading due to different weights applies the rates within a basis product may vary When adding or editing a new variant the following window will pop up 364 Te Ee Ee Edit variant Edit variant 1 General Descriptions Variant Thickness mm weight 100 g E Unwrapped items Field content Default Remaining items F Set postage individually Choose a suited name for the field Description describing the content of this variant In the fields Thickness and Weight you can specify the appropriate values for the current variant Take care that with the settings for weight and thickness you will work within the range of the same bas
404. soft Word mail merge documents with Infopost Manager 12 1 Settings in Infopost Manager In the dialog window Word mail merge you define the document name and the data source select the category ies and specify the fields which you want to use in your Word document Word mail merge New Proj Word document File Addresses create new address file File Project directory W4adressen tet Categories Category Address Infopost items 24010 E Unused items 6808 Fields das Selection 5 use existing address file Project directory gt Adressen tut Word document Field File contains the file name of the currently used Word document By default all Word documents are stored in the directory of the respective project As soon as you click the E button you can select a Word document which can be located in any directory as a template In the second step you enter the file name of the target file which then will 314 Ric be created ideally in the project directory The source document is certainly kept untouched You can also Create an empty document or Select another document which e g is not stored in the project directory via the dropdown menu Addresses In this area you define the data source and its data which are required by Word s mail merge module create new address file If you launch Word mail merge for the first time create a new address file in File For this purpos
405. ssible for the franking types canceling by sender Plusbrief and Frankierservice PW Stamping remaining postage is only possible for the franking types franking mark and FRANKIT 5 6 Partial postings Usually and especially with smaller Infopost projects all items of a project are posted in one job With projects involving more than 4 000 items however you can also post your Infopost in parts on different days Staggering large mail shots can for instance save time and stock space and may relieve a Call Center which is responsible for acquiring responses Partial postings may not contain any Germany pallets Germany trays resp Germany bundles Activate the option Produce partial posting compliant during specifying the production properties on page 146 If you produce and post items of a project over several days Deutsche Post regards the partial postings as one joint posting if the daily postings are implemented in self contained ascending or descending routing zone blocks At least 4 000 items must be posted in the first partial posting however The items which you would like to combine as partial postings must be determined by you This is only possible after the postage costs have been successfully optimized Once you have launched the menu item Preparation partial postings you will see in the lower area of the dialog box that initially no item is allocated to a partial posting The number of trays and the weight is shown
406. st Manager s analysis tool works very thoroughly and its suggestions are often correct Nev ertheless you should check all assignments otherwise it cannot be guaranteed that the program can provide correct results You will find a brief description of the various possible assignments below e Address files and their assignments Examples on this page 10 1 Address files and their assignments Examples Example 1 Detailed structure of an address The detailed structure of an address without name fields consists of ten fields and looks like this Field name selected assignment StraBe Street Hausnummer Street number StraBen PLZ Street ZIP StraBen Ort City Street Postfach P O Box Postfach PLZ P O Box ZIP Postfach Ort City P O Box GroBempfanger PLZ Major recipient ZIP GroBempfanger Ort City major recipient Land Country The field names used here are only examples and may vary Only the meaning is important here whereas the given names of the assignments are fixed and can be selected from Infopost Manager with this terms Example 2 Mixed field structure with fewer fields Addresses often have a mixed field structure using fewer fields 244 e Field name selected assignment StraBe mit Hausnummer Street Street number StraBen PLZ Street ZIP Postfach P O Box Postfach PLZ oder GroBempfanger PLZ P O Box major recipient ZIP Ort Mix of the three city fields of example 1
407. st aniaasich dieses maden Jubil ums laden wir Sie ganz heralich ein Datum WARE und Ort eninehmen Sie bile der beliegenden Wegbeschreibung Neben kulinarischen Geniksen und amen Zaubermnaten Unterhallungsprogramim wedosen wir unter allen Kunden fe E inbrittsiarten fir das Er finungsspial der kom menden Fubball Wellmesterscha Uber he Zusage w rden wir uns sehr freven Ante orkane aniei Fir e Zukun wunschen wir ihnen und uns weitere eine guie Zusammenarbel und verblelben mi Gia Pi 3 Objects 21 reaper ngs Elie COI AO T 2 By using a text frame you can integrate free texts into a mail merge document You can either copy the text from another application and use the Windows clipboard to paste it into the text frame or directly type and format the text within the text frame Edit text You can format the text in the dialog box Edit text which opens directly after having chosen the menu item Insert Text or which can be opened later at any time by double clicking or by using the right mouse button menu Edit text within the Text position frame Text Edt Format Extras JX Lio T aria n lE Additional address fields Letter salutation Sehr geehrte Damen und Herren Sehr geehrtel 111 210 1 50 Jahre Muster AG Ein Grund uns zu bedanken For die langj hrige und gute Zusammenarbeit bedanken wir uns ganz herzlich bei Ihnen Nicht zuletzt durch die Treue von Gesch ftspartnem wie Ihnen k nnen wir mittlerweile behaupten welt
408. sting for this ZIP Suggestions for Street address Street Brackstr 1 ZP 46117 Sreet Forsterbruchstr 1 ZIP 46149 Steet Brusbachstr 1 A suggestion may be accepted by double clicking it or by using the button Apply You can use the button Reset to undo this change Selection area Address No 340 Record 24947 Write to address Br kelmann Jaeger amp Busse GmbH amp Co Ignore address type Pl Street P O Box Major recipient Von Siemens Str 14 59757 Arnsberg Postfach 1380 50703 Amsberg If address check was not able to change an address so that it complies with the postal regulations the Write to address option to the right of the address field is deactivated per default if no other settings were given in the options on page 92 menu prior to starting the address check You nevertheless can mark a postally incorrect address for writing to by checking the respective option on this page to the right of the address Infopost Manager even asks whether or not you want to apply this presumable wrong decision to all identical addresses Such an approach can be taken for instance with street names which are not contained in your postal routing data version e g because it is too old and thus does not know the name but you are sure that it is postally correct If several address types are available for a data record Infopost Manager selects one of these types while the others are ignored for this data
409. switch die single routing labels using the cursor keys The dropdown field on the right side of the icon bar informs you whether you see a tray or a bundle routing label 6 7 Posting lists You can use this menu item to start printing the forms which are required for posting The forms are completely filled based on the information you provided for Infopost and only needs to be signed If appropriate additional forms such as the POSTCARD slip can be printed from here You can also print single sheets of the forms but all sheets of the posting list are required for posting the current project If the posting spans several routing regions the general terms and conditions of Deutsche Post regulate that a separate posting list is required for each routing region When optimizing via Infopost Manager one posting list is sufficient as long as the compilation of routing regions will be included Modules International optimization Vario and Job splitting With activated module International optimization the international posting lists will be available too If the Vario module is activated and if a VarioPlus mailshot is to be produced Infopost Manager offers here the required variant lists Comparable to this the Job splitting module provides posting lists for every single job Details can be found in chapters International optimization on page 352 Vario on page 372 and Job splitting on page 372 180 Rie Print postal forms Requi
410. t Level 1 masking of name fields 5 Level 2 masking of all fields except ZIP city and country Level 3 masking of user defined fields Level 4 delete addresses 39 e Ee Anonymize After creating the Pack amp Go file you may anonymize the project In order to do so activate the option Anonymize project and specify the desired level Ci The Pack amp Go file C Users Public Documents Demo Professional ipg was correctly created Import Pack amp Go You can use this command from the Project menu to import an externally created project in Pack amp Go format You will see the project with all the information which have already been provided and can directly work with it The software product Dialog Manager can also create Pack amp Go files which can be imported into Infopost Manager for further processing You can also import Pack amp Go files via drag n drop Click an IPG file and drag it to the application window keeping the mouse button pressed The mouse arrow will be extended by a plus icon As soon as you release the mouse button the Pack amp Go file will be prepared for import with the usual inquiries Order management If you choose this command the details on page 46 of the project transferred to Deutsche Post AG will be shown Properties You can use this menu item to call the project properties on page 42 Important information and details are shown ther
411. t Export descr tut Export template fou can store these settings as a template which can be used for Wace faeries Future exports By clicking the button Export you start the finishing address export All information required for exporting your addresses are listed in a table You can check all details Any changes can be easily carried out using the Back button If you activate the Create export description option a text file is created which contains all important information on the current export Templates Templates ensure in an easy way that your addresses are always exported in the same format for specified further processing Infopost Manager always stores the export settings within a project irrespectively of any template Thus you do not have to re specify them if you want to export addresses more than once Even if you duplicate a project in the project explorer all export settings are copied as well Save template If you want to reuse settings you have made in a subsequent project you can save them by clicking the Save template button Confirm whether or not you want to replace the used template here Standard Click No in order to create a new template with another name 331 If you changed the automatically suggested export file name by hand you can now define whether or not this name shall also be stored in the template If you want to save every export file with an identical name
412. t completely from the project without discarding the whole project Modules International optimization and Vario With activated module International optimization you will be able to filter your international items by the categories Infopost and remaining items If the Vario module is used filtering by variant will be possible Details can be found in chapters International optimization on page 340 and Vario on page 360 Cascaded filters As soon as you select another filter argument although there already is a filter you can specify whether you want to run this argument in addition corresponds to an AND operation or it should be executed on the complete address list The addresses are already filtered Do you want to apply a new filter on this existing one Do not show this dialog again Clicking Yes cascades the filter multiply if applicable The executed filter arguments can be seen in the status bar of the dialog 81 o 21 098 items of 30 818 1 selected used addresses National addresses You can kill a cascaded filter by answering the question about the additional application with No or by choosing the item Cascaded filter of the Filter menu ofessional filtered ind Aura C 0 Options ee Export Firma2 15 Analysis o Y E gt ceai mter etmi w Country codes User defined chol Update countries TE E R Mar Field structure Used addresses Country codes The Country c
413. t request 2 1 Menu bar and action buttons ihe ut PELETA EEE ETE AE tema You can access all program functions using the respective menu Y Menu items which are disabled cannot be selected because the required information has not yet been provided The same applies to the action buttons which are arranged below the menu These buttons repeat important commands or menus 11 2 2 Overview Overview we General Addresses Salutation check Address check Duplicate search Robinson check Nicie check Adressdialog Dispatch Item Production Optimization Payment method The most important steps of an Infopost project are listed in this area The large result area to the right and the Quick Clicks area below that will change according to the item selected in the overview There are different types of display for the individual steps in the overview e A step is displayed in light gray This action has not yet been started nor can it be called since specific information which is required has not yet been provided For instance it is not possible to calculate the minimum postage if you have not yet entered the item size e A step is displayed with a yellow arrow All information needed for this step has been provided and the action can be initiated e A step is shown with a green arrow This action has already been successfully executed If you click on the item the result of the action will be shown o
414. t simple address tuples 129 a Jager 3 Artur Rinck Hern Martin Jager Aechaffenburger St 63073 Offenbach Aschaffenburger Str 49 63073 Offenbach am Hit 1 of 62 9 Edit Robinson address 660709 Firmal Arma Firma Strabe Hausnummer Postfach PLZ Strabe PLZ Postfach PLZ Grofiempfiinger Ort Stra e Offenbach Ort Postfach Ort GroBempfanger Land For each shown address you can decide whether or not it shall be written to You already preset this decision by selecting the necessary match accuracy degree in the previous dialog You can call this window once again and specify another match accuracy degree via clicking the button e 4 8 Nixie check This function of Infopost Manager checks the current projects address database against a so called nixie file which e g contains your insolvent customers 130 fo 4 8 1 Addresses Nie address source CSU sers Public Documents Deutsche Post 4G Infopost Manager D atas E f Volume 4 579 addresses in 28 routing regions In the Addresses area you locate the nixie file which you want to check your addresses against In order to do that click the button You are directed to the familiar Import on page 49 dialog where you can also assign the fields and even apply Import on page 60 templates Right after the import the Volume of the nixie file will be shown As soon as you have run the nixie check once the res
415. tates Cities You can select here which additional objects rivers and seas highways and interstates cities you would like to be shown in the map by activating the respective check box 198 ij Please note that rivers and sees as well as highways and interstates can only be displayed for Germany 199 8 Extras menu Contents Sil Customer MUCK sissa ae a a A 201 Colle Mo ma eee tea eee RRR ERE AAA 202 Cla Ed ud Peewee aes CERES AA Oe eek ad eRe ea eae 203 ME LOC es hha eee eee ee eee as 206 lts ees oak a oe Ge Ee ee ee Gee ea A Ee 206 82 ender Mailer our EER Ee eR SRS eS eee ew A 208 S221 General ssr erea eard Hebe Rb SGD bE eS Be EY EE BSS eG 208 8 2 2 Details vee caedeeoee See see eee cee eias bh eee eeu eee 209 Ove LTO T e 4 oeaewe as os noir AAA nda AAA 210 G24 Dender y Mailers epocas ras aspas EH E ES 210 Alo PPO S pa ss A As 210 Bie Blank TOTS su sirios A CEES BS OR eee 211 8 4 Responseplus assistant sso oso eee eee ee 211 Sid Change password ssas 44 24 EB a o ew Ee EE ew 213 98 0 User administration usuarias HERE EAH EE A 214 SOL User dila 24646554 aaaaaaaa A pega 215 5 0 USErvichts operas ro 215 Site OMOW 10S aos AAA RS 217 8 8 Acceptance offices 2 ces drena A as 218 29 IP Searens ae a A oe oA ee a er sa E 218 8 10 Update address check o e 220 S LE ODIOS sa esas ea 221 MAME AA EEE TEEN 222 AFA erario E AA 220 Ooo F POSChUINGS E de h
416. ted Addresses Fervent 100 00 4 7 1 3 Salutation check This table contains the statistics on page 85 of salutation check Salutation check Aviom complemented Autom corrected Adom Com ble 7 1 4 Address check This table contains the statistics on page 101 of address check Percent 185 7 1 5 7 1 6 7 1 7 Address check Duplicate search You will see in this list e how many duplicate groups were found in the current address file e how many duplicates were identified within these groups and e the quota of removed duplicates Address check IO ETA Postal comes Comeched maniak Comacted alimen e al Comecied bey Tears Spelling changed heuteg ress Da Postalk incorrect hiemaional addresses Robinson check INE E TO INIA ENEE AO rt A RE IS EEE Here you can see the parameters and result of Robinson check You are provided information about selected subject areas number of checked items and how many addresses have been sorted out by the selected match accuracy Robinson check Dale Subject area Checked addresses Match accuracy Rejected addresses Nixie check 10 07 2015 Durabon 56 seconds Coins stamps collective articles Books and music Health articles dietary supplement cosmetic products Telecommunications cell phones Internet computer 30 656 Similar addresses 55 Similar 13 Here you can see the parameters and result of Nixi
417. ted out of a separate paper tray e g filled with colored paper Batches can be printed out of alternating paper trays e g for printing batches mutually turned by 90 e Routing Labels Bundle number and number of mailings in bundle can be printed on the bundle label Tray number and number of mailings in tray can be printed on the tray label Print sequence of the labels can be reversed e Adaptation sender s instruction to the current regularities e several improvements and some bug fixes What was new in version 5 1 from 01 07 2002 e Infobrief Kreativ for mailshots supported e Partial postings supported e Address management insert delete and copy of records feasible 397 e ZIP search Verification particular address for postal correctness e Optimization label printing e Preview option for Excel import e new fields for export ZIP code city first name last name with options salutation title e Mail merge printing single production batches supported e Address check explicit activation required due to legal reasons large street directory Datafactory Streetcode supported e EURO is only currency for payment and franking e various particular improvements e additional bug fixes What was new in version 5 0 4 from 31 01 2002 e new fields for export and mail merge Street No Address block for letters with options Attn with
418. ted terms such a attn or i e If option Suggestions only from main dictionary is activated all entries of the selected user dictionary on page 310 will be ignored added words as well as auto corrections Checked option Gnore two capital LEtters at the BEginning of a WOrd reduces words beginning with two upper case letters to one leading capital You decide that you want to check spelling before printing by activating the respective option Thus you make sure that no incorrect documents will be printed and sent afterwards Furthermore unnec essary misspellings do not impair your mailing s first impression Text length check While option Visualize truncated text on page 277 only holds for the current address this menu item makes far more It passes all addresses and shows all addresses with overfull text frames depending on the respective field contents Calculate text lengh ES iF AS One moment pleaze Expended time 5 seconds Remaining time 15 seconds Thus you can reliably and easily change the text frame s dimensions or shorten the text accordingly If you click the X Resetfiter button all addresses will be shown again The visualization of truncated texts only works with activated option accurate in the document s print options on page 265 Please note that Premiumadress on page 289 impression always are considered as big enough Based on the specification these impressions cannot be horizontally s
419. tely variable scaling of 301 any barcode can only be achieved with this option being deactivated If you choose Code 128 or UCC EAN 128 please note that Infopost Manager will use code set C if the contained characters are all numeric Starting from 5 digits this code set always encodes pairs of values 00 99 in order to be more compact and hence the encoded data must consist of an even number of digits If the data consists of 5 or more and an odd number of digits the first digit will automatically be preceded by a zero You can see this in the clear text below the barcode Examples Value 12345 will become 012345 in the barcode and therefore be the result of a scan Value 123456 will still be 123456 in the barcode Value 123 will still be 123 in the barcode 11 4 11 2D barcode Using this option you can insert a 2D barcode in your mail merge document like it is e g required for mobile tagging Edit properties Type GR code 6 Datamatrix Content Value Data format alphanumerical Pretix Format Versions Module size Version required 3 ETE With Infopost Manager you can create two different 2D barcodes a m QR codes 5 eae a i al Datamatrix codes Type In this area you decide whether you want to integrate a QR code or a Datamatrix code in your mail merge document Depending on the selected code the contents and the options in the
420. tently separate these categories because they have to be posted separately from one another Infopost items also need their own set of forms 13 1 Infopost All Infopost items have to be packed into trays sorted by ascending or descending ZIPs Items have to be inserted into trays upside down and the address block has to face the information carrier tray label Please follow the same procedure if you combine Gro or Maxi items in bundles instead of trays The items are always combined in trays or bundles All items are generally printed in the correct order and can be directly inserted into the trays 319 o Trays can contain items with similar ZIP with similar routing region first two digits of the ZIP or with the same routing district at the acceptance office In addition they can also be filled as Germany trays Bundles however have to be target clean i e they may only contain items with similar ZIP or routing region First print the tray list resp bundle list You can see from these lists how many items will be packed into which trays or bundles One row for each tray is printed in the tray list Trays with similar ZIP are merged by Infopost Manager to one tray target The same holds for trays with similar routing region Germany trays also represent a tray target 0 9 All trays belonging to the same tray target will receive the same printed information on the tray labels The items of a tray target ar
421. tes 1 Original address n 30 577 Assoctibon for Computing Machinery PMA PO Box 62 06 Boston MA 02205 92005 Source C Users Public Documents Deutsche Post 4GUnfopost ManagerDalalExamples Infemational x1s Original address no 20 576 De not write to Associaton for Computing Machinery cio Election Service PO Box 93 98 Boston MA 02205 Source lisas Public Documents Deutsche Post AGintopost Managen Data Examples Intemational ats Duplicate group 2 with 2 duplicates 1 Original address no 28 176 Write to Wyeth Medica Ireland Herr Tom Miller Mewt Co Kildare In addition to the duplicate search results the record numbers for the respective addresses in its source file will be listed as well as an indication of whether or not the address will be written to 4 7 Robinson check By using the Robinson check Infopost Manager Professional you can check your address against the Robinson list Thus all matched addresses are sorted out prior to optimization In order to start the Robinson check you need the Robinson file for Infopost Manager which can be purchased at DDV the German direct marketing association Use the form for ordering Further details can be found on the Internet at http www ddv robinsonliste de The DDV Code of Conduct requires all DDV members to check their address databases against the Robinson list As soon as you have run the Robinson check once the respective menu tem will get a submenu where you can di
422. tes and communibes are constantly developing it is important always to use the latest versions of these postal routing data These data are subject to license restrictions under the law on competition and have to be purchased If vou want to use the address check you can order the Datafactor using the enclosed forms as a PDF file form Dat F Order form Dstafactor Postalcode supolier Order form Datafacton Steslcode 7 Cancel 220 Ee You can also call the order form for the respective Datafactory from this dialog After having clicked the Next button you have to locate the XML file which Deutsche Post Direkt sent you after you purchased the Datafactory Normally it can be found on your hard disk in a dedicated directory You do receive this XML file only once Please mind that you can access it if you will run another update In the following step you select the respective file with the postal routing data which resides on the CD ROM you received from Deutsche Post Direkt per subscription if applicable and click Nezt If the postal routing data required by the ZIP search on page 218 are out dated you will be asked in an additional step whether or not you want to update them Update of postal routing data from version 1 2014 to version 1 2014 Datafacton 5treetcode Copying files Ore moment please 0 The update process is finished as soon as the file from the CD ROM is installed 9 11
423. tfach City P O Box Anrede Gender Frau Titel Title Vorname First name Tatjana Nachnane Last name billesser Vanante Variant Vario A Address record 17 of 19678 Ignored address Fields You can use this dialog window to view all fields in your address file together with the contained information Here you can view the precise assignment on page 56 and the field names on page 56 which have been selected and you can immediately recognize which fields will be imported Adie hid Ippe bp ilie 2 Fima 3 Sirahe 3 Sireti a Smert mumbai Dinh Sieti rats Sheet Deal rumbi 4 Postfach 5 F yeg PO Box PD Box 5 PLS Safe L k IP jare ZIF jiem Z F street amp PLE Portfacii F yer IPPO Ew AF F 0 Bm F Ont Shade k Ciy trea Cip jakem Ciy street amp Ont Postsch ez Cp FOL Be Cip FD Bm 9 Anwede Gendu Salubalion Salutation 10 Tiel Title T k 11 Worn i First narra Firat narra Fik pret 12 Nacha Lasi mame Las mame 13 Variante Vianan ario Ca ar faro It is also possible to compare the default field lengths with the current content of your source file Length gives the field length given in Infopost Manager while Max length gives the maximum values reached from your address file The Address field type by title column contains the assignment of the respective field which was automatically recognized by the field name analysis of the source file The Address field type by content
424. the item Properties of the contextual menu right mouse click Overview tab In this tab an tabular overview about the transactions transferred to Deutsche Post AG is presented to you This overview contains as well the categories of the posting as the assigned order number and the transfer status Overview Project Category Order no DPAG Transter status Infopost HM ational 4a 220 T Synchronous 4 Transfer status Infopost National 4435228 The order data at Deutsche Post are up to date Last change Deutsche Post 21 01 2014 09 44 56 Last change IPM 21 01 2014 09 44 56 In the Transfer status area you can see whether the project requires another data exchange e g because relevant data have been modified or it is synchronous Module Job splitting If you have defined partial postings on page 158 separate sub groups are created within the projects for these partial postings Every job of a Job splitting on page 372 is treated in a similar way Order tab All relevant data to the order can be derived from this tab such as e g the order number of Deutsche Post or your order number You can select a specific items category from the dropdown field Category and inform yourself about its details 24 Overview Details Category Infopost National Order no DP46 J 7435220 Status PLA DM Type ES Final Mo Date delivery 05 02 2014 12 00 00 Description Neues Projekt Label Customer number E
425. the production complexity by minimizing the retooling of the production equipment for each variant Trays and bundles have to be produced variant clean Furthermore Germany pallets are not permitted Variant after variant pallet spanning When you activate this option you will have to retool your production equipment exactly as many times as you have variants Therefore all pallets to be produced have to be completely available At first you have to produce the first variant and distribute it by and by according to the tray resp bundle list on the various pallets Afterwards the production equipment has to be retooled for the second variant which will then be produced and distributed on the pallets The same then holds for all other variants If you also use partial postings on page 158 for your VarioPlus project the multi flow method presupposes that you will have produced all variants before dispatching the first partial posting Pallet after pallet variant spanning With this method all pallets will be produced by and by This is especially recommended if there is not enough storing capacity or if you work with partial postings For each pallet the respective number of items of a variant which has to be packed on it has to be produced After each variant the production equipment has to be retooled for the next variant which then will be produced and packed on the pallet until the last tray resp bundle of the last variant for this pal
426. the same name to the address files as to the categories in order to avoid any confusion If you want to print the documents of a dedicated category simply choose the corresponding address file and click the Open with Word button Take care that the Word document does not contain any merge field which is not also contained in the data source 12 2 Processing in Word As soon as Infopost Manager launches Microsoft Word with the specified document and data source both files will be mutually linked Now you can work with Microsoft Word s mail merge module as you are used to 316 i As long as the Word document assigned to the project is open Infopost Manager has to wait and cannot be used meanwhile Please wait Please wait Document is shill active s If the document is closed this state changes and you can continue working with your mailshot project In the menu Insert Merge Field you will find all Infopost Manager fields which you have chosen during the field selection on page 315 Insert Merge Field Insert Word Field ne Adresstelder_Firmal Adresszusatzfelder_Anschriftenblock Adresszusatzfelder_BrieFanrede Sonstiges Absender Ort Sonstiges Absenderzeile Adresstelder_Firmaz Adressfelder_Positior Adressfelder_Abteilung Adressfelder Kunden Pr Adresszusatzfelder Bundesland AdresszusatzFelder_Landesname deutsch_ Beh lter_Mailing_Anfang Palette Mailing Anfang my You wil
427. thereof from a German landline or a maximum of 42 ct per minute or part thereof from the German mobile phone network or a Direct Marketing Center in your area 13 2 Remaining items Remaining items are normal letter mail items postcards etc They do not have to be sorted inserted into trays or posted at the same time No forms are required Remaining items may not be franked using the franking mark but must be franked by machine or with stamps 322 14 Address export Contents 14 1 Export addresses from Results menu o 323 14 1 1 Specify output file 6 exercise daa bd dba d es 324 14 1 2 Specify format 4 2 4 ko 6 8 4 eA eee EE YE BE EE RM eRe 327 TALA St CxO a tas Behe eG ROE EEE GE ee meee EE ES 331 14 2 Export addresses from address management o 333 14 2 1 Specify output file 2 4 os weed eee ed we HE ae Se 334 14 2 2 Specify format 22 64 645 amp 6 dee eh eee we wEG Se eee KE we 335 EA BIAT II 339 Infopost Manager is capable of exporting the addresses out of a project for later use in other applica tions Export can be launched from Address management or by using the Results menu 14 1 Export addresses from Results menu After the postage optimization Infopost Manager is capable of exporting the dispatch optimized ad dresses of a project for later use into other applications This can be done via the Results menu If the addresses are exported all address recor
428. this project View The data records listed as a result of the address check may be displayed in two different ways using the View button l as an addr Infopost Manag Y OK X Cancel Ul Pause gt Edit HW ow ess block like on a label Address check Demo Profession AR Europlast Rohrwerk GmbH Herr Alfred Seidenath Bruchstr 1 Fecken irfel GmbH amp Co Herr Gunther Hobbach Goebbelgasse 1 15 Postfach 725 Address No 1365 Record 25738 Frischauf Matratzenfabrik Walter Tusch Herr August Baumer Wittens tenstr 156 Address No 1365 of 1386 Postaly incorrect Suggestions avaiable Address Mo 1354 Each address is also accompanied by an icon which provides information on the address status Frischauf Matratzenfabrk WalterTusch 1 Glass Egeling Glunz Aktengesellschaft fila Statistics C Options View gt m e Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Werk Buin cheme Hiilskens amp Co Kesbaggerei 1 Ifurel GmbH amp Co KG Krusemeyer MAKARA GmbH Pharmazeuische Fabrik Meuywsen Buch und Kunstdruckerei of 1386 Postally incorrect Do mot write to address Wittensten Paramente Glunz Dorf Bruchsteg Sahnhofst Inderal 104 Icon Explanation Addresses with this icon will be used in the further course of your project and will thus be written to By clicking this icon the respective address will not be written to 0 Addresses with this icon are marked not be w
429. ting 257 You can use the Delete button to remove formats which you have created yourself Margins tab Here you can define the inner margins for your mail merge document which will serve as an aid in orientation for the correct dimensions of the position frames You can provide individual details for all four sides of the document In the Preview you will see these changes immediately With labels you can also provide information on the side margins of the sheets which will assist you in the exact positioning of these sheets for Printing on page 261 Ee General Paper Margins Background Other Inner Margin Left Right Preview If you linked the position frames integrated into the document on the General tab using the option Keep distance to the left margin on page 269 to the margin stated for the document these position frames are moved automatically when this margin is changed e Background tab On this tab you define all settings required to use backgrounds resp water marks 258 o Background Document Preview Insert Delete Only for positioning Print also Print in best quality Position and size Original size 1005 Document The dialog for locating the file to be used as background appears if you click the nsert button Infopost Manager supports the following formats e BMP e EMF e JPG e PDF e PNG e WME Infopost Manager also supports
430. ting to right after the address check or only after they were manually corrected depends on the settings given in options on page 92 The status window at the end of the address check provides information in the International addresses line about the ratio of foreign addresses contained in the current address file These addresses have not been tested in the address check The text line below the table show the number and types of addresses which will be displayed in the results window Both values depend on the specified options on page 92 102 4 5 4 Results The address check results show those addresses for which errors or deficiencies were discovered They appear as soon as the statistics window has been closed by clicking on OK Infopost Manager lists all data records depending on the settings given in options on page 92 This address selection can also be changed later The Options button provides a selection menu on the View tab where every address type can be activated and deactivated Y OK X Cancel il Pause gt Edt it Statistics c Options E view 3 bey aaa vaz Europlast Rohrwerk GmbH Herr Alfred Sedena Bruchstr 1 Fecken irfel GmbH amp Co Herr Gunther Hobbach Goebbelgasse 1 15 Postfach 725 S2006 2 Address No 1365 Record 25738 i ly ri Frischauf Matratzenfabrik Walter Tusch gt i Herr August Baumer E Wittenstansir 156 Wuppertal Addres
431. ting an address block Here you can choose which fields from the address file shall be printed into each specific address Depending on the position frame type the displayed tabs vary Only the tab General is identical for all position frames _ Edit properties Colors and lines Text Address Address block Keep field structure of the address block Optional held Show salutation company separately Companys F Write to personally c o Company Transform to capital letters Department Maximal number of lines 10 attr F show in front of department additional options Street supplemer See Additional address fields on page 400 for further explanations about the properties on this tab 281 11 4 2 Document Edit Were Insert Extras arial ee DIF o e 1ms TAE 4a 4 1 de e E Infopost Mistionel r ma a aba a Ww gt PE Ela i En RE gt BORRE idiet O O O joti j eiZ d etted etida t dami ioa j ibi j it 50 Jahre Muster AG Sehr geehrter Her Seeger 50 Jahre Muster AG Ein Grund uns zu bedanken F r de langj hrige und gute Zusammenarbeit bedanken wir uns ganz herzlich bei Ihnen Nicht zuletzt durch die Trew von Gescnaispaninem we nen b na wir Miewele behaupien wetwel m den tuhrenden Untemenhmen be der Hersielkung WON Mustem z hben zu k n nen Anbei finden Sie unsere Firmen Chronik die wir Ihnen dankend berreichen 50 Jahre Muster AG Ein Grund zum Felern Zu unserem Firmente
432. ting from the data in the address database or occur because specific fields have no contents for some single addresses Line break Use this option if you want the text to be automatically wrapped when it reaches the right border of the position frame Otherwise it will go out of the visible area and will not be printed Allow line breaks in fields Text frames are capable of displaying fields that were imported with address data If these fields contain line breaks in the import file these line breaks will by default be erased for display within the address block Using this option you can make the line breaks visible again Rotated text Similar to frame type tert on page 282 you see the dialog Edit text right after inserting a rotated text All edit and format capabilities are similar to those of non rotated text The two frame types differ in the existence of a rotation angle for rotated texts and a varying handling of alignment on the current page and usage of colors and lines on page 271 286 Text tab Edit properties General Default font Rotaton Rotation angle af Degrees Distances Line spacing Percent 100 0 5 Paints Additional character spacing 0 Points Empty lines Remove empty lines resulting from empty fields Remove left spaces in data fields C remove right Smooth lines with data fields remove unnecessary spaces Line break Default font You will see here the standard Inf
433. ting ones It is important that there are no items left at the end of a project which are not assigned to any posting Please note that you must print separate posting lists on page 180 for each job and submit them to Deutsche Post With the first partial posting the form Compilation of partial postings must also be submitted on posting Results menu In the results menu there are additional production lists and address export fields available similar to the ones of a partial posting Tray Bundle list With the Job splitting module specific tray bundle lists are available 377 2 Print Print optione Export i 4 05 02 14 Bauer Kich GmbH 1 17 e E Cose N Addresses Metikgl Gross kg Variant 06 02 14 Bauer Kinch GmbH 1 21 Type 1 7 Variant A 2 97 02 14 Muster AG 2 2 IRJ 2 7 Variant A a e z LRZ 4 8 Variant A 2 3 1 RZ 6 5 Variant A 2 E 24 1 RAZ 25 25 3 1 Variant A 2 1 RZ 2 3 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 2 Variant A 2 a 1 RAZ 7 2 Variant A 2 R 27 1 AZ 7 2 Variant A 2 i af 1 RZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1 RZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1i AZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1 RZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 2 Variant A 2 1 RZ 7 8 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 8 Variant A 2 1 RZ 7 8 Variant A 2 LR 7 8 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 8 Variant A 2 RR 1 RZ 7 8 Variant A 2 1 AZ 7 8 Variant A 7 7 Variant A 2 7 8 Variant A 2 1 7 Variant A 2 1 z 3 4 5
434. tings Every job of a Job splitting on page 372 is treated in a similar way Details Tab Order managemer i Overview Details Category Infopost National al Date deler 30 08 2013 12 00 00 Order no DP46 lt unassigned gt Customer number EKF Order number customer 0123456789 1308164 00000001 At this point you can learn about the details of the transferred items You can select a specific item category from the dropdown field Category and inform yourself about its details You will also see here the order number which was assigned by Deutsche Post to the project Addi tionally the customer numbers of all suppliers who worked with this project are displayed on the left side Right beside you will see the order numbers which were assigned to the project by the customers themselves Infopost Manager automatically assigns a system internal customer number which meets a given syntax Customer number formats which come from other systems may be made up differently The current effective numbers are also shown in the results area on page 14 of the main window in the General section 3 14 Exit Here you quit working with Infopost Manager the current project will be saved and closed 47 4 Addresses menu Contents 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 Use this menu item to import the addresses which you want to edit in your current project to check Import trom Ale i
435. to invoice your projects After all the settings have been specified finally the postage optimization will be executed which calculates the minimum total charge Another feature of Infopost Manager enables you to initiate the data transfer for your current project If you have questions concerning this topic please contact the IT CSP hotline 49 6151 908 8000 Mo Fr 8am 5pm Modules International optimization Vario and Job splitting With activated module International optimization you will get another menu item Dispatch properties which will be used to define the dispatch of international items By using the Vario module you can also specify the required variants Additionally the production and the dispatch of your mailshot can be distributed to several suppliers via the Job splitting module Details can be found in chapter International optimization on page 345 Vario on page 361 and Job splitting on page 373 5 1 Dispatch properties In this dialog window you define the properties for the dispatch of national items 140 Ye He Te General Transport service Mode National and International 5 Only National sort aut international addresses 5 Only International sort out national addresses National products W Allow dispatch as Infopost J Allow extra items to reach higher bulk discounts Send as Infopost Koop W Allow dispatch as remaining item International products All
436. to jump straight to the first or last data record With menu View you can show or hide optional parts of an address block ja Address preview El Close 1 H View Street address Address no 5 3K B romo bel GmbH Herr Erwin M ller Presse Industnestr 64653 Lorsch P O Box address Address no 5 not usable 3K B rom bel GmbH Herr Erwin M ller Presse lt empty gt lt empty gt lt empty gt Major recipient address Address no 5 not usable 3K B romo bel GmbH Herr Erwin M ller Presse lt empty gt lt empty gt 1 complete address Record 5 of 6561 If sufficient data are available the major recipient address is preferred to the P O Box address which in turn is preferred to the street address Address record preview You can use the address record preview to see the content of a data record in the fields of your address file where both the field name and its assignment are shown The Assignment column corresponds to the automatically recognized or manually assigned field type 59 You can use the navigation arrows to view your data records individually and thus to verify the correct assignment and name of the fields Address record preview A Close w H Descriptor Assignment Content Firmal Company Frma Company Stabe Street Street number Gubenbergring 55a Posttach P O Box PLZ Strafia ZIP street 22848 PLZ Postiach IP P 0 Box Ort Strate City street Norderstedt Ort Pos
437. to the project s process You can access the necessary settings and their results straight away Module International optimization With an activated module International optimization on page 339 you will be able to produce VarioPlus International too For both products variants must belong to the same basis product and the key document has to contain the same content for all items After you activated on page 336 this module you can access new menu items in Infopost Manager and you will receive further information in the result area of the main window as well as in the project statistics concerning the options for VarioPlus and the optimization results 357 a letoport Man Pres Aihame EJE Chri lham Quick Clics Beeni projects al Adena nition ar FTO BA co a i E a s isi a ira Edar Hal B e G ie Tah A i i Letter mail item Franking mark Postege stamp Remaining tem Premiunmadress GOGREEH Pio Hilo sat Por Oe ihe Ar Les par eed Foomal OL 3301 150 rm Content Thei ne VHist F 3 Lan LS A li Fibrin ke Die Hilo srta Por Oh ine lr bere Da 6 peo r Trin khisig Faning mir e oe This rasolls in the Tello values Pree Pea rae iskari Haberal Grol Fister TO E bee oe Iinbamiadonal b oon cote Pii Cahir gba Arecinass jen Uy es Ta F Ymi A 15 3 Varn E 23 3 Tiar E A Later mul aT Fran rar Portas timp Aeron ber Pri eesti GOGAREY Pu
438. ton and select the acceptance office where you will post you mailshot 153 Acceptance offices Show acceptance offices of the following routing regior Type IP City Address Posting volu ID 01 069 Dresden Bavrische Sir 8 un mited Gr4 5t 01 3 02 01 458 Ottendorf Olknilla Bergener Amg 10 un mited 1451 01 3 01 02625 Bautzen Ereckvatzer Str 11 un mited Gr 51 02 301 0052 Cottbus Oststr 5 un mited GrAst 03 3 01 04158 Leipzig Poststr 2b un mited Gr6 5t 04 301 06188 Hohenthunm An der Spitze 1 unkmited Gr 5t 06 3 01 Gera Jacob A Morand Str 5 uribmited Gr 5t 07 3 01 Reinsdorf Alfred Meef St 1 un mited GrASt 08 3 01 Chemnitz Winklhoferstr 11 un mited G14 51 09 301 I 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note Up to 5 000 items max total 100 kg or 10 trays are accepted by every retal office or postal agency If the local situation is suitable up to 10 000 items can be posted in some retail offices Posting Infopost and Katalog items wath franking mark ZL as well as slipless postings are only possible at major acceptance offices Conca Otherwise enter the address where Deutsche Post shall pick up your mail shot Delivery Pick up Posting Name Muster AG gt street Musterstr 12 ZIP City 12355 Musterhausen kd Fallet storage retrieval on 11 02 2015 Select the option palett storage if you want to make use of this service Please note that the retrieval date has to be after the delivery date If
439. treet directories by refreshing the postal routing data employed by the ZIP search on page 218 The Datafactory required by the address check can be updated via clicking the homonymic button or via the respective item of the Extras on page 220 menu Here you can also activate a demo version of the Datafactory Streetcode or a more current version of Datafactory Postalcode Your address will not automatically be corrected but you will get an idea of how many incorrect addresses are found by the address check how many can be automatically corrected and how many suggestions for correction are available prior to purchasing a street directory Thesaurus The Thesaurus is some kind of a look up table for the address check which can only contain postal correct addresses Using this valuable tool you can e g transfer a street whose name changed over the years to its new name once All other addresses with the same old street name can then be automatically corrected although this information is not included in the postal routing data Activating the Thesaurus as well as the auto correction capability has to be done through the address check options on page 96 In the options dialog you can also launch the Thesaurus editor on the 98 Ee next page Add Thesaurus entry Adding a Thesaurus entry can be only done via Editing on page 107 an address If you have changed an incorrect to a postal compliant address you can store the changes as T
440. truncated text Refresh view FS ES Align Order Navigation Position frame Pages Document toolbar You can use this navigation bar to control the most important actions on your document B be S AIF a 100 7 The buttons of this toolbar repeat specific items of the Document View and Extras menus Edit toolbar You can use this navigation bar to execute the most important actions on your selected objects such as editing the object properties A diy The buttons of this toolbar repeat specific items of the Edit menu Arrange align toolbar You can use this navigation bar to arrange and align the selected position frames in a comfortable way You will find more information here on page 272 F uh iS Sl a mej Ly 43 44 The buttons of this toolbar repeat specific items of the Edit menu Navigation toolbar Use the navigation arrows to scroll through individual addresses or to move to a particular address at the beginning or end of the address category Furthermore you will see the current sub category of your project Infopost remaining or non German items and you can switch between the different categories Furthermore specific addresses can be found on page 273 via clicking on the spyglass icon 100 H Infopost National a e International Optimization Mail Merge Module on page 341 218 Position frame toolbar You can use this navigation bar to insert new position frames into the current page of y
441. tters international at kilo rates a dedicated contract with Deutsche Post AG is required Contact your business customers consultant The activated products will be consequently integrated into Infopost Manager s project chain starting from the item properties and the project statistics up to the specific posting lists Transport Service tab In this area you determine the transportation type You can select a general or a country specific regulation This sheet is only available if you have chosen an international mode on the previous page in the previous tab 346 Ye fo Dispatch properties General Transport service County specific Transport service D General Economy Priority 8 Country specific If you check option Country specific you are able to define the transportation type for a every country separately A new tab Transport service appears You can manually switch to this tab or click the Edit button This selection has to be made for Infopost International only Country specific tab Here you can define the desired transport service for each country This tab is only available if you have chosen a Country specific on the preceding page transport in the previous sheet 347 o tio 15 2 2 4 Land Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Bulgaria Cambodia Canada Colombia Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Ghana Greece Hong
442. ttings You can use the button Settings to open a selection window where you can define the record separators and character set to be used in the exported file You can also create a description file which explains the structure of the ASCII file This file may help you later to create an import filter or other similar templates File format 419 Record separator Character set O No record separator DUS New line CRALF OD 0A Urijustified C Other characters Create INF description file A 8 Text file with variable field width For a text file with variable field width select the file format Text file separator txt Output format File format Settings Similar to the fixed field format you can also use the dialog window which pops up when clicking the button Settings to define the field and record separator as well as the brackets for the fields and the required character set If requested the first address record can contain all field names this may make it easier to process the exported file ASCI export settir gs Field separator Record separator C Line feed LF 04 C Line feed LF 04 C Carriage return CR OD C Carriage return CA OD OO New line CRLF OD 0A New line CRLF OD 0A C Tab TAB 09 C Tab TAB 09 Other characters O Other characters Bracket for fields a nial ANSI C Test fields in inverted commas
443. ttings The field address block contains the same text as the position frame address block on page 280 the properties for the optional fields are identical as well Optional fields W Show salutation company separately Compary2 Write to personally co Company Transform to capital letters Department Maximal number of lines 10 altri show in front of department additional options Street supplener Choose from the window which address fields the address block should include The specifications in the field altern attn made in the address management will be followed y With the check box show in front of department the lines department and attn will be shown in reverse order within the address block When the Show salutation company separately is activated the salutation of a private person will be placed in a separate line at the beginning of the address block The same applies if there is no contact person for a company address and the salutation field reads company With the check box Write to personally c o the contact persons of a company will be addressed personally i e name and company will appear in reversed order Letters with this address block may only be opened by the addressee in person The address block will be completely shown in capital letters if the respective option is checked Limit the Maximal number of rows if there is only limited space for the address
444. u can also do this by single clicking the icon an envelope which means that the address should be written to the recycle bin which means that the address will not be used or by double clicking the respective address Address 30 577 Association for Computing Machinery ACM P O Box 92 06 Ancam MA MINE Write to Stirg al 1 Show source file name C Users Public Docum InternationaLxls Views The results of the duplicate search can be shown in two different views Address block view The address block view has similarities with an address label Address 30 577 Association for Computing Machinery P O Box 92 06 Boston MA 02205 C Users Public Docum Internationalsxds An envelope next to the address indicates that this address will be written to By single clicking the envelope or by double clicking on the addresses you can change the duplicate status to not released for writing to This marking can also be undone outside the duplicate search in the address management on page 67 using the option Ignore address P O Box 92 06 Boston MA 02205 C Users Public Docum Internationalxls Add additional fields By default only the address fields are shown for any record You can use the button Fields to show more fields which makes it easier to distinguish between potential duplicates The fields which can be selected depend on the options which
445. un the recent reports can be read via the submenu report archive The specific procedures of Infopost Manager recognize not only identical data records but also use phonetic methods and work with fuzzy logic There is however a basic prerequisite for all duplicates which has to be met The city must be similar i e the ZIPs of the potential duplicates have to be in the same range of a so called Postort postal city Therefore the duplicate search will work far better after the address check has been properly executed In order to make it clear which duplicate forms may appear in an address file we have provided an 114 example where all four data records can be easily identified as duplicate by Infopost Manager Company Company Street P O ZIP ZIP P O ZIP major City major 1 2 Box street Box recipient recipient Gercke Gbr 1200 59172 59172 Kamen Gehrke MoBau Unna 25 59174 Kamen G rcke Unnaer Str 59174 Kamen 23 27 Gerke Modellbau Unnar Str 59174 Kamen 25 a Infopost Manager facilitates your decision on selecting the addresses which will be written to by offering bs you more than the default fields for selection on page 120 a If you do not want to run the duplicate search for the current project you can mark this by right clicking de the entry duplicate search in the overview You can nevertheless launch it This function is only for informational purposes il Duplicate search is dimensioned for a maximu
446. undles and trays per variant Production properties Variant Tray production properties Set production properties per variant Tray Bundle production properties In this area you have to activate the option Set production properties per variant in order to change the production properties for bundles and trays which were automatically calculated by Infopost Manager If you activated this option you then can access the dialog Edit variant via the button Edit General Max tems per tray Items half full In this window you can now set how many items of the current variant fit into one tray or at which point this tray should be considered as half full or how many items of the current variant may maximally be packed into one bundle 370 Rie 15 3 4 15 3 4 1 Ric a OF wy ch oem as le Results menu Tray Bundle list Preview Print Print options Export Close Tray HN Addes 41 41 41 39 39 26 24 20 a 29 gt af 28 zl 20 33 24 17 af e a 19 678 Net kg 4 1 24 1 4 1 3 1 3 9 3 9 2 6 2 4 2 0 2 9 2 9 2 9 2 7 2 8 2 0 3 3 24 2 7 2 7 3 0 3 0 2 9 3 1 2 7 1 9678 2 350 9 laross kg Wanart l l B Vanant 4 5 6 Variant C 4 5 6 Varant 4 5 6 Variant C 4 5 3 Variant 4 5 3 Variant C 4 4 1 Variant A 2 3 8 Variant A 2 3 5 Variant A 2 4 3 Variant A 2 4 3 Variant A 2 4 3 Variant A 2 4 2 Va
447. ur mail merge documents 11 1 Document Infopost Manager offers the facility to create five different types of mail merge documents You can use the menu Document to administrate the templates and documents and their respective 1 2 3 4 5 endless labels label sheets mail merge letters envelopes postcards formats printing addresses is also launched from this menu BS Intepast Manager Mail marge Document Ect Wire Insert Extras Ly i a a Malaga DHL Inapasa Walaga DHL Wood expe We Vosurrerdgurg Pakelscher Ereet ether Talec a aymbol ko wem the m Worle Vorlege Postkarte Vodage Senenbrel Elicelteniarser LIENE mmi Urraca Volk Wai iria Document Template 249 11 1 1 New Start working with a new mail merge document or create a new template A template offers you a pre designed document structure for later use Thus you only have to position and design the individual elements of the document once General tab Here you can select one of the five document types which can be created using the Infopost Manager mail merge module The information on paper format and size which you can see here using the list view on the current page is a default setting As soon as you have selected and opened a document type you can change the paper format using menu item Document Edit format on page 252 General Templates J BHAA Endless label
448. usability of project templates and support of the formats Loe and ACCOB for import and export EF 01 07 2013 New Postal Routing Data of July 2013 The postal routing data for the 3rd quarter 2013 are available EF 02 04 2013 New Postal Routing Data of April 2013 The postal routing data for the nd quarter 2013 are available E Only show news as of 17 01 2014 7 All current news are listed in the news window Additionally archived news can be shown by deacti vating option Only show news as of dd mm yyyy By using Update check Infopost Manager verifies whether or not the installed modules are up to date and indicates available updates _ a Available updates OOP 26 11 2013 Infopost Manager v8 1 1 The update to version 8 1 1 is ready for being downloaded Mew features include support of SEPA and Responseplus ln addition to that this version contains adaptions for data exchange with the order management sistem of Deutsche Post This update is required for all further updates This update requires version Infopost M anager v8 1 Please contact the support hotline for receiving the preconditioned update Clase If you click the Load button Infopost Manager contacts the download server and loads those updates your Infopost Manager is authorized After the download is completed you can simply and easily install the loaded updates by clicking the Install button In order to do so Infopost Manager has to be quit
449. use The list will be stored as a file on your hard disk Beside a file name you will have to specify a password to protect the file By specifying a consecutive number you can ensure that the generated TAN list can unambiguously be associated with the Responseplus campaign Summary Responseplus assistant Summary Summary Form Responseplus Referral Contractual partner EKP 012345679 Customer order no 1234 Start number Number 500 Campaign end 05 02 2014 File name of TAN list C Public Documents responseplus_taniiste zip DA Start mail merge This window presents the information about your Responseplus project From here you can start mail merge on page 304 to put the Responseplus items into shape You may also export on page 407 the collected data 8 5 Change password In order to change your password follow these steps 1 In the menu Extras click on Change password 213 Change password User Max Mustermann B Old password New password Confirm 2 In the first field enter your current password 3 Enter your new password in the fields below 4 Close the dialog by confirming with the button OK 5 Login with your new password by the next program launch 8 6 User administration This menu item will open the User administration It shows all users and their last logins listed in tabular form User administration User name Complete name Descrpton Last login User group
450. usiness e Default export templates e new form for posting sections compilation of routing regions e some cosmetic corrections e minor bug fixes What was new in version 6 0 1 from 10 12 2004 e further bug fixes What was new in version 6 0 from 23 11 2004 e Support tables of fees for 2004 and 2005 e completely reengineered postage optimization module with new parameters e massively improved doublet search module e XP look e Support FRANKIT e new news update check module e improved filtering methods for export and mail merge e new project explorer e new customer management module e new production lists e Justification in mail merge module e Demo address check without additional files now also with Datafactory Streetcode e EDS report visible outside the EDS posting data record module e the shipping schedule ZL can be printed in combination with the posting lists e Import password protected access files e additional bug fixes and optimizations 395 What was new in version 5 4 from 11 11 2003 Support tables of fees for 2003 and 2004 new form Announcement new posting lists minor bug fixes and optimizations What was new in version 5 3 0 from 31 07 2003 Stampit integration variable signatures new posting lists 7 2003 import file filter filtered addresses can be completely deleted some particular optimizations further bug fixes What was new in version 5 2 1 from 22 05 2003 Address check
451. uting data Automatic correction Always allow if hit probability equal or higher than qe 5 Ignore second best hit Correction dependent on distance to second best hit Minimum distance First specify the hit probability Addresses with hit probabilities with equal or greater values will be automatically corrected by Infopost Manager Both options Ignore second best hit resp Correction dependent on distance to second best hit will directly affect the results if there is more than one hit Using the first option Infopost Manager corrects the addresses as soon as the probability is equal or greater Additional hits are not taken into account This then can be possibly counterproductive if two very similar suggestion are made Here the second option comes into play Enter a probability distance Additional hits will be ignored if the address probability plus the distance is less than hit probability The lower you choose the distance the higher the probability that Infopost Managers also discards akin correction suggestions and accepts the hit with the highest probability instead The entered values will have massive effect on the quality of the automatically corrected addresses Thus always verify the address check results if you choose values differing from the default You can also modify these values at a later phase of the address check via the Options on page 111 menu You will directly see the consequences in the results area
452. vierung Firma Benutzer Lizenznummer lt Keep existing license gt Demoversion Standard Demoversion Professional C Manuelle Aktivierung ber das Telefon After you have renewed the license Infopost Manager will restart If any the functionalities of addi tional modules will now be available 15 1 Professional The module Professional is especially recommendable if you often use the Infopost Manager regularly produce larger mailings or even produce mailings for other customers The modules nternational optimization on page 339 Vario on page 357 and Job splitting on page 372 require an activated module Professional When the module Professional is activated Infopost Manager will consequently be renamed into Infopost Manager Professional INFOPOS MANAGER Please note that this help describes Infopost Manager as seen with module Professional available If you do not have this module activated you might experience some dialogs with reduced functionality Feature matrix The differences of the Infopost Manager Professional to the standard version can be derived from the following table Feature Standard Professional Address check x x Address check Extended options x Keep upper case unify spelling official city supplement check names of major recipients adjust search mode Address check Streetcode can be activated x x 337 Address check Thesaurus Address export txt csv xls xls
453. want to export the information used by Premiumadress on page 289 data matrix code Click the Change settings button in order to configure on page 290 Premiumadress 405 Edit properties General Address Premiumadres Product variant O Value from field Settings Contractual partner Sender Muster 4G Musterhausen 1434567939 ERP 123456789 Cd Mailer Muster 46 Musterhausen 123456759 ERP 123456789 O Payer Muster AG Musterhausen 123456789 ERP 129456039 C other Premiumadress ID fied value S Value from field Settings User specitic data fixed value O Value from field Settings Data format alphanumerical Frefis Other Values Fields info line In area Output you can define the format of the Premiumadress data Either decimal hexadecimal or font specific If required every value to be exported can be preceded by one or more characters This holds for decimal as well as for hexadecimal notation e g 8F The preceding characters have to be defined in the respective field Prefix fi Mind a proper export format if you need real line breaks such as CR LF e g text files on page 420 Invalid Premiumadress memos will not be exported The respective field remains empty Ho 2D barcode Using this field you can export the information of any fixed input or fields encoded as a two dimensional barcode 406 Rie Edit properties
454. was correctly created Do you want to call Adressdialog s web page now in order to upload the file to the server 139 5 Preparation menu Contents Si Dispatch ProOpertl s ssa sade 40 45 E a AA ee EA 140 dde Item Properties s s 444 lt 4 aaa ew ew we wee 142 S 21 Dimensions s s s 0 46 44424224 4c 4446 ee S42 eK eK REE ES 143 oe Losas Ghee age He 144 oe PAU E ae ek GREER ERE ee ee eee ewe ee 145 5 2 4 Remaining item tab o hea eiawew eho d 4 a BESS 146 hide Production Properties user a HEH A Bee 146 Hock AMIOPOsl lt a ranas og sona 147 gA Postage Optimization s s as aa aa IR ew 154 5 5 Payment method properties o 2 eee eee eens 156 Fods OMC an oo oak oe Se eee eRe eee ee eee eee eG 156 A Prepayment 24 lt us gevdeuw dgeeeeeeeedunwee on vaaee wes 157 DG Partial DOsStings W424 46h ed we ee we ee eee eee Se we 158 5 7 Order management s s sss scesero we as 162 5 7 1 Data exchange via Webservice 2 0 a a 162 5 7 2 Manual data exchange via file transfer 164 Stee Cancel order iones 64 oe ese Ee eR oro KS 166 Dll HeQUest Stabl s bi s sdi sns 664 SURES ERE ERS EE SE HH 166 5 0 Openin AM portal s sses ek R eRe ee RRR AA 168 You can use this menu to provide all required information on the items themselves on production in trays or bundles and where appropriate on pallets In addition this is where you choose how you would like Deutsche Post
455. weit zu den fihrenden Untemehmen bei der Herstellung von Mustern z hlen zu k nnen Anbei finden Sie unsere Finmen Chronik die wir Ihnen dankend berreichen 50 Jahre Muster AG Ein Grund zum Feiern Zu unserem Firmenfest anl sslich dieses runden Jubil ums laden wir Sie ganz herzlich em Datum Uhrzeit und Ort entnehmen Sie bitte der beiliegenden Wegbeschreibung Font and color alignment and character size can also be changed here afterwards 282 Rie e You can specify the font size with an accuracy of half points Please note that depending on your screen resolution the differences may be barely perceptible In case of doubt you should check the result with a test print In addition to that an immediate spell check can be performed if desired Incorrect or unknown words are underlined with a red wiggly line These words can be separately corrected in Edit text mode via the contextual menu Right click the word in question A window pops up which shows you inter alia a suggestion for correction if available nz Sa ein Datum herzlich ami herzliche bal herrlich herzlichem herzliches o Ignore all ube aa Change all You can also decide whether this word shall be ignored i e it is correct or you want to add it to the user dictionary on page 310 The first decision only holds for this document while the second holds for the current and all future documents You can clear all
456. will be read in decimal format internally converted to binary format and respectively coded in the data matrix code e g character sequence 128255 6 bytes will be coded in two byte if desired each character triple can have a prefix An error will occur if none decimal values are found or values off the range 0 255 The 2D barcode impression will become invalid On the lower margin of the Format area the minimum version resp the minimum dimension of your 2D barcode which is required for properly coding all characters is displayed This information cannot be given if you are working with dynamic fields Format Here you specify the final size of the 2D barcodes to be printed Select the favored Version QR code resp the favored Dimension Datamatrix code The Module size defines the number of pixels to be used for a module 303 Rie 11 4 12 11 4 13 11 4 14 Digression A 2D barcode is built up of square black resp white fields These fields are called Modules Sometimes smaller modules can no longer be correctly read by the machines in the necessary speed Besides the module size the print quality of every single module is vitally important for a rapid readability by machines The edge stridence has to be optimal This edge stridence can be obtained if the module size is optimally set according to the resolution of the printing system If the module size was fixed independently of the printing resolution the pri
457. window s Options menu 100 4 5 3 Correction Address CH City ZIP a samma Curen 52349 Rurdammiveg Bad Kreumnach sdhlofipark Umma B ddenberg Una Massener Dorfstr 2 disabled entries An activated entry is represented by a blue tick f a deleted one by the recycle bin icon Al You can toggle an entry s status via three ways e clicking the icon recycle bin or blue tick e double clicking the entry e right clicking the entry and choosing the respective item from the context sensitive menu If desired you can hide disabled entries Just call the respective item of the contextual menu Here you can also physically delete the current Thesaurus Please note that undoing this action is not possible all Thesaurus entries will be lost forever Statistics These statistics appear for the first time after the address check is finished They may be viewed at any time later on the main screen by using the Address check item in the Overview area 101 Salus Pela care Camacha munca Auyiom comercios Comracted by Thame Se bry changed ret oes poe TE Petia iee intorrabional adorassss Total This status report contains detailed information on the course of the address check and its results Automatically changed addresses are either released directly for writing to or are displayed for manual correction The behavior depends on the options on page 92 which have been set before starting the
458. x dbf mdb accdb and xml Address import txt csv xls xlsx dbf mdb and accdb incl import templates Address import label format Address import only ZIP Address import via ADO Adressdialog incl code creation Anonymization of projects Blank forms Customer index Data backup Data protection assistant Duplicate search Duplicate search Options Adjust search mode select search intensity and match accuracy show similar address as duplicates contact person with B2B first name with B2C consider field Company3 compare company and name fields Import and export Pack amp Go Individual Katalog dispatch Inkjet export Job splitting Letters international at kilo rates Logging of user activities Mail merge Barcode Mail merge Datamatrixcode Mail merge Interface to Word Mail merge Panel print Mail merge Premiumadress Mail merge QR code Mail merge Spell check Mail merge Text length check Mail merge Water marks Map Tool Merge address databases Multi Change with filtered addresses Multiple export of individual fields News Update check incl auto update Nielsen region provinces exportable Nixie check Optimization based only on ZIPs Optimization DHL Infopost Optimization Extended settings Optimization Infopost International 338 Optimization Infopost National x x Optimization Partial posting x Order management x x PDF export x x Production Minimize number of trays bundles x Pr
459. x r Salutation check x x x Address check x x x Duplicate search x x x Robinson check x x x Nixie check x x X Adressdialog x x x Optimization Execute x x O Reset x x O Lists and labels Production lists x z x x Routing labels x x x x Posting lists xX x x x 216 Mail merge Open Print PDF Export Edit address Save mail merge document Open mail merge Word Analysis Project statistics Address spread Map Tool Administration and settings Customer index Show log of user activities Change user password Change user Update address check User management Change options Change global options Change administrator options Software update Change license Execute data backup o only if the current user has executed the last optimization r read only 8 7 Show log If you have activated the logging of user activities in the options options on page 234 you can view the log with this menu item 217 From Mb 35 04 2004 Drag a column header here to group by that column Date time 05 05 2014 15 32 21 T 16 05 2014 15 38 29 55 06 2014 16 05 11 15 06 2014 16 31 23 oo 07 05 2014 10 45 55 07 05 2014 10 46 30 gt 07 085 204 ee 07 05 2014 11 16 06 User le Computer le To M107 08 2014 1133033333 Ai 31393333 23331333 pea A I III ERAAI Presse chisel Proiect opened Project opened Proyect saved Derma Profermonal Derio Professional Demo Professional Demo
460. y CUsers Public Documents l Last directory C Users nf Documents Import directory C Users Public Documents Deutsche Post AG Infop Exarnples Desktop G Users nf Desktop My Documents CA Users nf Documents Shared Documents C Users Public Documents You will see the files to be exported in the lower table of the Export files area Depending on the chosen settings and options the file names vary Activate the check boxes of those files which you want to export Specify format In this dialog window you can define the structure of the export file by deciding for each field whether or not it is required for external processing if necessary even more than once and thus has to be exported Additionally you can also specify here the field order for the later export 327 a Export wizard ep 2 of 3 Specify fields Specity the fields and ther order to be used for exporting Define the feld names and if appropriate the held widths to be used for exporting List of fields to be exported Inhalt Address fields Firmal Address fields Firma Address fields Abtelung Additional address fields Attn Additional address fields Deliver address Additional address fields Deliver ZIP Additional address fields Deliwery city Additional address fields Country name Additional address fields Letter salutation mn ddrase Field Ki mar Al Descriptor Firmal Fire Abteilung ZUHAENDEN ZUSTADA
461. y visible if you decided to exchange your project data with Deutsche Post via order management and activated an option other than No data exchange in the application options on page 231 Please take into account that an order does not contain any addresses i e your customer has to provide you with respective address files If you have selected option Manual data exchange via file transfer as transfer on page 231 type you only have to choose the project file in the opening dialog which you normally receive from your customer Afterwards the order will be respectively request from this file 18 oe Deutsche Post AG Infopost Manager Data Transfer Organiseeren Neuer Ordrer A Irfopost Manager Name Anderungsdatum Typ di Dats de Diets de DocForms di DocTmpl A Documents de Examples d ExpTmpl A Forms Le ImpTmpl di Logins de Projects Le responseplus de Transfer di Infopost Manager Preview de Manager Presse Distribution Dateiname XML Files xml AM_600000001 21 20070329 110854 ml 17 01 2014 12 24 KML Dokurment AM _B0000000121 20070329 115303 00m 17 01 2014 1244 RMIL Dokument AM 60000000121 20070329 13447 xml 17 01 2014 12 24 2ML Dokurnent A new project will be created based on the data contained in this file You finish the project creation process by confirming resp changing the project properties on page 42 If you have selected option Data exchange via Webservice you will be
462. you use the pick up and delivery service Hin Weg be sure that option Posting is selected in this dialog Otherwise your items might be collected twice First via Hin Weg and second via pallet announcement 5 4 Postage optimization Based on the given information Infopost Manager distributes all items within a few seconds into the categories Infopost and remaining items and produces the required sorting order of the addresses for production on page 146 At the same time Infopost Manager calculates the minimum total charges which result from any possible extra items see example below from the item distribution into the three categories and from additional production rebates 154 i than 45 letter mail items An example shall clarify the advantage of using extra items A very small mailshot consists of 45 items Since however the regulations of Deutsche Post AG for Infopost require at least 50 items you would have to pay the letter mail charge for every item But if you add five virtual extra items you will only pay the reduced charge for Infopost Since the letter mail charge is about twice as much as the Infopost postage 50 Infopost items are considerably more favourable Qpin Riera pra pecs eddie iri You can see the values calculated in the project overview on the main screen The message Information give you possible explanations about the result of the el Notes Al posteges are wilhowt
463. za za ES g5 a ES ES ES ES E g5 ES ES ES g5 al a Tray larget Type 65 9 4 Germary 94 Gemary 9 4 Ceman 9 4 Gemary 5 4 Germarry 3 4 Gemary 34 Gennarey 9 4 Germary 9 4 Gemary 9 4 Gemary 3 4 bemary 94 Germany 9 4 Gemary 9 4 Gemary 14 Germany 5 4 Germary 9 4 Gemary 94 Gemary 2177 5 The following lists are available e Tray Bundle list on page 169 e Tray target Bundle target list on page 173 e Pallet list on page 174 e Pallet target list on the previous page e Routing labels on this page 6 6 Routing labels Via the Routing label menu item you go to the area where you can administrate your tray and bundle routing labels Use theses labels to mark the trays and bundles Falei tangat Type 1 Gemary 1 Geimary 1 Gennary 1 Gemary 1 Gemary 1 Gaman 1 Genmary 1 Gemary 1 Gemmary 1 Gemmary 1 Gemary 1 Gemary 1 Geimary 1 Gennary 1 Gemeary 1 Germany 1 Gaman 1 Gemary 1 Gemary Tray routing label Tray label Format 4 labels on DIN 44 Tray label Default Pallet label Default gt Retrieve to new projecte Infopost Manager handles the marking of the tray routing labels after printing you only have to affix them to the trays according to the entries of the tray list on page 169 Bundle routing label Bundle label Format DIN AS 1 label per DIN AS page Bundle label Default 5 eis Do not print labels for ZIP bundles Pallet label

Infopost-Manager Online Help as Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents